Download: LaserJeSteries!1PriiTter [HP 33440) and LaserJeitlPlrinte(rHP33449) CombinedServicMeanual
LaserJeSteries!1PriiTter [HP 33440) and LaserJeitlPlrinte(rHP33449) CombinedServicMeanual _ HP Part No. 33449-90906 Printed in USA * ., First Edition - February 1990 ,, 2- ‘,. ,,,, . , \, ‘ / > Notice HEWLETT-PAC- MA~S NO WARRAN~ OF ~ ~ND ~TH REGARD TO T~S ~TERM, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED W~TIES OF MERCMTABILI~ AND FIT~SS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidenti consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. This document contins proprietary information which is pr...
Author:
Naruaki Sugahara Shared: 7/30/19
Downloads: 414 Views: 3455
Content
LaserJeSteries!1PriiTter [HP 33440)
andLaserJeitlPlrinte(rHP33449) CombinedServicMeanual
_ HP Part No. 33449-90906 Printed in USA * ., First Edition - February 1990 ,, 2- ‘,. ,,,, . , \, ‘ / >,Notice
HEWLETT-PAC- MA~S NO WARRAN~ OF ~ ~ND ~TH REGARD TO T~S ~TERM, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED W~TIES OF MERCMTABILI~ AND FIT~SS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidenti consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. This document contins proprietary information which is protected by copyright. Ml rights are resewed. No pati of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewleti-Packard Company. The information contined in this document is subject to change without notice. / -. ,* @ Copyright 1990 Hewleti-Packard Company, * HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED PRINTER SERVICE MANUALREADER’S COMMENT SHEET
Please @ve us your commente concerning this manual. Your constructive criticism will help us create betir manuals in the future. Be as specific as possible, giving section and page references where “appropriate. Commenb on the writing, graphiw, binding, size, and printing method are helpful ~n-m~ng our manuals more useful and friendly. If you wotid like a reply, be sure to include your name and address with your response. Thank you for your feedback. , .. ,. .’- w - ‘*+.\ +’ .-.,-. - * _J*-.\ > 1NO PO1STAGE :NECESSARY 1: lF~l~D IN TNE UN~D STA=S !BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS MAIL PERWT NO. 141 SOISE, IDAHO POST~E WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE Hewlti-Packard Company Boise DiWsion “Atin:Learning Produc@ M.S. 517 P.O. Box 15 Boise, Idaho 83707-99W llllltlllllllllllllllltlllllllllllllllllllllllllll1l TAPE HERE TAPE HERE ;,Printing History
This manual was created using HP Tagflectra sotiare on an HP Vectra Personal Computer. The body ted is printed in Centu~ Schoolbook fonts, and chapter and section heads are printed in Helvetica fonts. The camera-ready copy was printed on an HP LaserJet III printer and reproduced using standard offset printing. Hrst Edition - Februa~ 1990Trademark credits
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewleti-Packard Company. Resolution Enhancement is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. HP Vectra Personal Computer is a product of Hewlett-Packard Company. lBM is a registered trademark of Int~rnationd Business Machines Corporation. This manual uses the following conventions: CoIor indimtes te~ or graphics that is specific to the LaserJet III (HP 33449) printer. Color may dso be used for emphasis, tities, and other non-HP 33449-specific material. The names of major printer pafis and assemblies are capitiized. Bold is used for emphasis, patiicularly in situations where italic me would be confusing. Italic type is used to indicate related documents or for emphasis. COMPUTEtRype indicates teti visible on the printer’s display or commands as seen on a PC terminal. [-] indicates keys, such as (=], on the printer’s Control Panel or on a computer keyboard.Note Notes contin impotint information set off from the teti.
,! * Caution Caution messages appear before or tier procedures which, if not obsemed, could result in loss of data or in damage to equipment. @ Warning Warning messages signal a specific procedure or practice which, if not followed B correctly, could cause personal injury.M
... Ill, contents 1. PRODUCT INFoRmmoN 1-1Tables
l-1. Physid Dimensions .1-6 l-2. Electrid Specifimtions....1-6 l-3. Entironmenti Specifimtions .1-6 1-4. Key Functions ~ 33440 and ~ 33449 Printers .1-16 1-5. Control Panel Indimtors ~ 33440 and ~ 33449 Printers . , .1-17 1-2, f-l. introduction Features Common to Both Printers Because the HP 33440 (LaserJet series II) and HP 33449 (LaserJet III) printers produce high-quality output quietiy and reliably, they are idedly suited for today’s business environment. Both laser printers: Employ reliable, efficient, and easily maintained designs based on electrophotographic, electronic, and laser technolo~es to produce high-quality print on a variety of media, including copier papers, cotton bond papers, envelopes, transparencies, and labels. Output selection can be for either correct (face down) or reverse (face up) order. Combine a charging corona, photosensitive drum, toner, developer, and drum cleaner in a single assembly, the Electrophotographic (EP-S) Cartridge. Simply replacing the EP-S Cartridge allows maintenance and periodic replacement of consumables and parts by the customer, saving both time and maintenance costs. Employ a compact, safe semiconductor laser driven directiy by control signals. It is certified as conforming to U.S. Bureau of Radiologid Health (BRH) standards. Produce up to eight pages per minute, depending upon sotiare and dati constraints, with extended symbol set capability and Control Panel configurability. Provide serial (RS-232 and RS-422) and pa~lel (Centronics) 1/0 mpabilities, with provision for other 1/0 mpabilities through an optional 1/0 slot. Support macro cartridges for forms generation. Features Which Apply Only to the HP 33440 Memo~ Provides 512 ~ytes toti internal read/write memory with the capability to increase memory by the addition of 1, 2, or 4 Mb~es, through a single expansion slot, up to 4.5 Mb~es toti. Font Handling Provides up to 7-inch character cell size, printable space character, downloadable fonts, font managemen~ and Upto 16 fonts per page. Ten bitmapped fixed-pitch internal fonts are standard. Two font mrtridge slots are available. Printer Command Language: Employs the PCL4TM Printer Command Language. ■ PostScriptR Printer Language: Supports the PostScriptR printer language through an optional HP interface package. ■ Resolution: Provides up to 300 x 300 DPI (dots per inch) resolution. 1-3, Features Which Apply Only to the HP 33449 Memo~ Provides 1 Mbfie of toti internal read/write memory with the capability to increase memory by the addition of 1, 2, 3, or 4 Mbytes, through tio expansion slots, up to a toti of 5 Mbfies. Font Handling Provides dl the features of the HP 33440 as well as font soling capability for generating fonts of any desired size from 4 to 999.75 points in quarter-point increments and autorotation for fonts and raster graphics. (Print images are rotated automatically as the page orientation is rotated, allowing available fonts to be used in dl rotations.) Expanded symbol sets are dso built in, as well as 14 bitmapped fonts and eight salable ~efaces. Printer Command LanWage: Employs the PCL5TM Printer Command Language, containing HP-GL/2 (HP’s ~ndard plotter language) and other enhanced printing features such as font soling and font rotition. PostScriptR Printer Language: Supports PostScriptR printer language through an optional HP persondi~ wrtridge. Resolution: Provides up to 300 x 300 DPI resolution as well as employing Resolution Enhancement,TM an HP proprietary technolo~ that improves the visual quality of printed images beyond the 300 DPI standard capabiti@. Page Protection Provides, with expanded memo~, the ability to avoid partial printing of complex, graphics-intensive pages. Localized Display Messages: N1OWSlodization of display messages for five languages. 1-4, 1“2. IDENTIFICATION The re@atory labels, lomted behind the Face-Up (Rear) output Tray, are different for the HP 33440 and HP 33449. For the HP 33440, the regulatory label contins both the model and serial number. On the HP 33449, the model and serial number are located on a separate label just below the power connector on the right side panel of the Main Body Covers (see Figure l-l). Note that this portion of the right side panel is removable on the HP 33449. (Care must be taken to ensure the printer’s cover, with its serial number, stays with the printer.) The model number is an alphanumeric such as HP 33440A or 33449AB. For both printers, the serial number consisti of the following sequence: a four digit prefk, a letier, and a five digit suffk (for emple: 0000JOOOOO)T. he prefk is used to indicate year and week of manufacture. The letter designates the country in which the printer was manufactured (“J” indicates Japan, for e~mple). The suffii is a sequential number incremented for each printer produced. For both printers, the power rating is lomted on a plate nefi to the Power Switch (see Figure l-l). FACE-UP OWPUT TWY @EGUWTORY UBEL BEHIND)RWER RAnNG E:: 3344?A 3;::00001 1WT- - 1OO-W5 MODEL AND SERIAL No. PLATEHz 50-w (HP 33449 ONLWWS. 7.6
HP 33W REGUMTORY MBEL Figure 1-1. Printer identification and Power Rating 1-5, 1-3. specifications Physical Dimensions Table 1-1. Physical Dimensions Electrical Specifications Table 1-2. Electrical Specifications* Volkge 100 V or 115VA10% 220 V or 240 V ~ 10% FreWencies 500r60Hz+2Hz 50 Hz+2Hz C-nt, 8.7 A at 100 V 3.4 A at 220 V Steady State 7.6 A at 115 V 3.1 A at 240 V Power, 870 Wati at 115 V 850 Watts at 220 V Printing -mum 3000 BTU/hr 2900 BTU/hr Power, 170 Wati at 115 V 170 Wa~ at 220 V Stindby 580 BTU/hr 580 BTU/hr * With no accessories instiled.Note The HP 33440A and HP 33449A (50/60 Hz) have a transformer that
automatidly adjus~ for 100 or 115 volk, the HP 33440AB/AU and HP 33449AB Pi (5O Hz) automatidy adjust for 220 or 240 volts. v Environmental Specifications Table 1-3. Environmental Specifications 1-6, Table 1-3. Environmental Specifications (continued) H~idity Operating 20 to 80% RH *Non-Operating 10 to 80% RH Mtitude Operating Oto 4,600m (Oto 15,100 fi) *Non-Operating Oto 15,300m (Oto 50,200 ft) Audible Noise Printing 5,8 B LWAd(1 B = 10 dB) 42.9 dB LP~~ (bystander at 4 positions) Standby 5.0 B LW*d (1 B = 10 dB) 33.3 dB LpA~ (bystander at 4 positions) * Printer only, not EP-S Cartridge. See Chapter 2, Section 2-3 for EP-S Cartridge. I 1“4. RELATED DOCUMENTATION The folloting documents provide additiond information about the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers: HP 33440 Shipped tith printer: ■ LaserJet series II Printer Getting Started Manual (P/N 33440-90908). (Replaced by Your Road Map to setting up Your tiserJet series II Printer, P/N 33440-90004, in November 1989; included here as Appendk A.) ■ LaserJet series II Printer User’s Manual (P/N 33440-90901). (English language version.) ■ LaserJet series II Software &plication Notes (P/N 33440-90006). (U.S. only.) ■ LaserJet series II Printer Technical Reference Manual (P/N 33440-90905). Additiond information: ■ LaserJet series II Printer Paper Specification Guide (P/N 5954-7339). w Peripherals Handbook Insert (P/N 33440-90906). H Self-Paced Training Guide and Final Review (P/N 33449+49A-901O1). HP 33449 Shipped tith printec ❑ Your Guide to Setting up Your hserJet III (P/N 33449-90905); included here as Append& B. ■ LaserJet III Printer User’s Manual (P/N 33449-90901). (English language version.) ■ LaserJet III So~are &plication Notes (P/N 33449-90917). (U.S. only.) ■ LaserJet III User’s Quick Reference Guide (P/N 33449-90902). Additiond information: ■ Peripherals Handbook Insert (P/N 33449-90908). ■ SelfiPaced Training Guide and Final Review (P/N 33449+ 49A-901O1). ■ LaserJet III Technical Quick Reference Guide (P/N 33449-90904). ■ LaserJet III Technical Reference Manual (P/N33449-90903). 1-7, ?-5. SAFETY AND RELATED INFORMATION General The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are UL 478 listed, CSA 22.2154 certified, and manufactured in accordance with DIN EC 380/IEC 435. Where necessary, warning labels are affked to the printer wherever special service atiention is needed. warning Because the printers contain potentially hazardous voltages, accessories such B as watches and rings should be removed before working on the printers. u Laser Safety The both printers are certified as Class 1 laser products under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that they do not produce hazardous laser radiation. Both printers dso comply with the Center for Detices and Radiologid Health (CDRH) regulations. Since laser light emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and etirnd covers and futiher contined by an interlock system, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. The Center for Devices and hdiologid Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented relations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label below (see FiWre 1-2) indicates compliance with CDRH regulations and must be attached to liner products marketed in the United States. European models dl comply with or meet IEC 825 for laser safety.L
Figure 1-2. Printer Regulatory Labels warning When servicing or adjusting the printer’s optical system, do not place B screwdrivers or other shiny objects in the path of the laser beam. Although . invisible, the reflected beam can cause permanent eye damage. u * 1-8, mere there is danger of exposure to laser radiation, the fo~oting label is attached inside printer covers:I DANGER-INv~Bu LASERRADIAmONWHENOPEN.AVOID DIRE~ EX~URE TO BEAM. \
ATTENTION - RAYONNEMENLTASERINVISISLES1OUVE~. DANGEREUXN REGARDERA Ul~MEUR. VORSICHT- UN~ RE LASERSTRAHLEWN ENNGE6FFNH. NM HINEINSEHEN. \ ~ g’ c&\ CAUTION-INVSBM LASERRADIAN WHENOPEN. AV~D EX~SURE ~ BEAM.I ATTENTION -RAYONNEMENTLASEREN CASDOUVERTUREExPO~N DANGER-AU FAZU. I
VARO!-AVATTAESSAOLET ALrmNA NAKYMAnOMAW U=RSA_lLYLLE AM KATSDS~TEESEEN. @ K-6 m-wa I Figure 7-3. Laser safety Label ExampleFinnish Laser Statement
The folloting notice is required to be printed in Finnish. \ TURVALL IS UUSYHTEENVETO MERTURV&LISUUS HP 33440AB ja HP 33449AB laserki~oitimet ovat ti~an kanndta turvdlisia luokan 1 laserlaitieita. Laitieet on tirkastanut Suomessa Tyoterveyslaitosja tyyppihyv~ynyt Tyosuojeluhdlitus, Tyosuojeluhdlituksen hyv~yntinumerot HP 33440AB: TSH 1563/6019/87 HP 33449AB: TSH 713/6019/89 Tarkastuksessalaitieiden turvdlisuusluokka on mtira~ vdtioneuvoston p=toksen N:o 472/1985 ja standardin SFS-EC 825 mukaisesti. NormAikaytossa laitteen suojakotelo estia laser~teen p%syn laitteen ulkopuolelle.HUOLTO
firjoittimien sis~la ei ole ka~jan huolletitissa olevia kohteita. Laitieet saa avati ja huoltaa ainoastaan laserltitieiden huoltimiseen koulutetiu henkilo. T~laiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota variainekasetinvaihtimista, paperiradan puhdistusta ti muiti kayttoohjeessa lueteltuja, ka~j an tehtiv~si tarkoitetiuja yllapitotoimia. Wrjoittimien turvdlisuusluokitus muuttuu mikNi niiden suojakotelo ava~n. Laitteiden sis~la olevassa laseryksikossa on laserdiodi,j oka Iaitieen toimiessa lahe~ silm~le n~ymatonti, luokan 3B Iasersateilya. Figure 1-4. Finnish Laser Statement 1-9, — German ZZF Declaration The fo~owing notice, which is required to be printed in German, applies to printer operation and seticing in Germany. Funkentstorung Deutschland Herstellerbescheinigung Hiermit wird bescheini@, dd das Gerat HP 33440 oder ~ 33449 in ~ereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen von Postverfugung 1046/84 funkentitirt ist. Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerates angezei~ und die Berechtigung zur ~erpfifung der Serie auf Einhdtung der Bestimmungen eingeraumt. Wird das Gerat innerhdb einer Anlage betrieben: 8 So mufi bei Inanspruchnahme der Algemeinen Genehmigung FTZ 1046/84 die gesamte Anlage der oben genannten Genehmigung entsprechen. H Die mit einer FTZ-Serienprtifnummer gekennzeichnet ist, und fir die eine Betriebsgenehmigung vorlie~ oder beantragt wird, so sind in der Regel keine weiteren Schritte notwendig. Figure 1-5. West German ZZF Declaration FCC Regulations Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Statement This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energ. If not instiled, serviced, and used properly (that is, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions), it may cause interference to radio and television reception. The equipment has been type tested and found to comply within the limits set for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifimtions in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC ties, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential instigation. Note Use of a shielded interface able is required for compliance to fdl within the Class B timits in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC rules. # w No guarantee can be given that interference with radio or television reception will not occur in a particular instigation. If this equipment does muse interference - which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on – try to correct it by using the following measures: ■ Reorient the radio or television antenna. ■ Reorient the device with respect to the radio or television receiver. N Move the device away from the receiver. E Plug the device into a different outiet so it is on a different branch circuit than the receiver. 1-10, If necessary, consult your deder or an experienced radio/television technician for additiond suggestions. The Federd Communimtions Commission has prepared a booMet entitled lnte~erence Handbook (1986) (stock number 004-000-004505-7) which may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washin@on, D.C. 20402. Ozone Emission General The corona assemblies found in laser printers and photocopiers generate ozone gas (03) as a by-product of the electrophotographic process. Ozone is only generated while the printer is actually printing (i.e., while the corona assembly is energized). Unde~riters Laboratory (UL) has established a standard for ozone emissions. Ml LaserJet printers meet this standard when shipped from the factory. Employer Responsibilities Because ozone can be an irritant, various regulatory agencies have e~blished limits to the amount of ozone to which employees may be exposed. The employer should provide a work environment that meets the following standards: ■ A person may not be exposed to an average concentration of greater than 0.1 part per million (PPM) of ozone for a period of eight hours. ■ At this time, the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) has proposed a ceiling limit of 0,1 PPM for ozone. Recommendations for Minimizing Ozone Exposure Mmost dl ozone concerns arise from abnormal site or operating conditions. The following conditions may generate an ozone complaint ■ Multiple laser printers in a confined area. w Efiremely low relative humidity. ■ Poor room ventilation. ■ Printer exhaust port directed toward the faces of personnel. E fisting Ozone Filter in need of replacement (see Chapter 4). ■ Long, continuous printing combined with any of the above conditions. Inspect your work environment for the operating conditions listed above if you believe ozone emissions are a problem in your area. Some people may be extremely sensitive to ozone odor. If this situation is encountered, it is advisable to position the printer away from the sensitive user. Toner Safety and Care Toner is a nontoxic substance composed of plastic, iron, and a small amount of pigment. Care should be taken to avoid breathing toner particles. To clean toner from skin and clothing, remove as much toner as possible with a vacuum or dry tissue wipes, then wash the toner from skin or clothing with cold water. Hot water makes toner very difficult to remove. Bemuse toner tends to be degraded by vinyl materials, contact with vinyl should be avoided. 1-11, -> ?-6. PRINTER PARTS OVERVIEW @ Since the lomtion of major components is similar for both printers, only the HP 33449 is shown here. For an HP 33440-specific pa~ overview, see Chapter 6. Figure 1-6. HP 33449 Prin%er (Front and Right side view) 1. Top Cover Release Bution. 2. Test Print Bution (under panel on HP 33449). 3. Control Panel. 4. Right Cartridge Slot. 5. Lefi Cartridge Slot. 6. Paper Tray Slot. 1-12, 1. Rear (Face-Up) Output Tray Release. 2. Top (Face-Down) Output Tray. 3. Rear (Face-Up) Output Tray (closed). 4. Expansion Memory Slot(s) (one in HP 33440, ~o in HP 33449). 5. Par~lel Port. 6. Serial Port. 7. Optional Interface Slot. 8. Serial Number (HP 33449) (On ReWlatory Label for HP 33440). 9. Power Connector Socket. 10. Power Stitch. 1-13, 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL Figure 1-8. HP 33449 Printer (Internal Wew) 1. Ozone Filter. 2. Feed Guide Assembly. 3. Transfer Corona Assembly. 4. Transfer Guide Lock Tray. 5. Print Densi@ Did. 6. Transfer Guide Strip. 7. Cleaning Brush. 8. Fusing Assembly. 9. EP-S Cartridge. 1-14, 7-7. CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW General Since key names and functions for both printers are essentially the mme, the table of key assignments below applies to both printers. A complete overview of Control Panel finctions with regard to service needs is given in Chapter 3. For a detailed overview desi~ed for users, see the kserJet series II Printer User’s Manual or the kserJet III User’s Manual. +READY
- 0 Display window 00 READY M-ANUAL D Indicator light BnnD[M+m White Yellow d Figure a-9. HP 33440 Control Panel , 1 = Raady H Manml 00 READY Display window Indicator Y On UM light nmmL&j=,
Figure f-lo. HP 33449 control Panel 1-15, Table 1-4. Key Functions HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printers Keys Description m Turns printer on line and OR line. When on line, the indimtor light is on and the printer a receive data. When OHline, other Control Panel functions can be performed. ~CONTINUE/RESETj ~ Briefly pressing this key clears most errors and returns printer to on-fine status. Will dso reprint lost pages due to correctable error conditions. [=] Holding down key until 07 RESETis displayed (2 -5 seconds) resets the printer, returning dl printing setiings to Control Panel settings and clearing temporary sofi fen%, macros, and stored page data. [PRINT FONTS/TESTj [PRINT FONTS) Briefly pressing this key gives a printout of sample characters from currentiy available fonts. ~ Holding down key until 05 SELFTESTis displayed te- the controller and prints a test printout. If key is held down longer, 04 SELFTESTis displayed and continuous test prints are made (press ~~) again to stop test print process). (FORM FEED) Form feed tight indicates that page data is stored in printer’s memory. Pressing (~] printi dl stored data. m Accesses and steps through Printing and Configuration Menus. Pressing [H) enters the Printing Menu (COPIES=is dis- played). Holding down [-] (about 5 seconds) until SYMSET= (HP 33440) or AUTOCONT=(~ 33449) is displayed enters the Configuration Menu. (ENTER/RESET MENuj _ Pressing key saves a Menu choice while in the Printing or Configuration Menus. [RESET MEN u) Holding down key until ogMENURESETis displayed returns Printing Menu confi~ration to factory defaul~. Qor Q Pressing Q or Q will increment or decrement menu item choices. Holding down a key til scroll through choices. 1-16, Table 1-5. Control Panel Indicators HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printers Indimtor Dacription On Line Indimtor When the amber LED adjacent to the [~] key shows a steady light, the printer is on line, indimting that it is ready to receive data. The printer should be on line tier it has been turned on and warmed up. Form Feed Indimtor The amber FORM FEED indiwtor adjacent to the [~) key will light whenever page dati is stored in the printer’s memory and flash when this data is being printed. Ready Indicator The green READY indimtor is lit when the printer is on and ready to print. When the light is flashing, the printer is receiving dati or processing data &ready received. Manual Indicator The amber WUAL indimtor is lit when manual feed has been selected from the Control Panel or through a sotiare application. Overview The basis for repair for both the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers centers on the modular-level replacement of electro-mechanid assemblies and some associated components as well as the assembly-level replacement of printed cirmit assemblies (PCAS). For both printers, the diagnostics and this document together aid in isolating problem areas. After lomtion, the problem assembly or component should be replaced without further atiempts to identi~ failures within the component or assembly. Repair Parts For both printers, an exchange program for Interface/Formatter PCAS, DC Controller PCAS, optional memory PCAS, and the Fusing Assembly will be available. Ml other failed PCAS will normally be dismrded when discovered to be defective. Service parts may be ordered from Hewlett-Packard’s Support Materials Organization (SMO) or Pam Center Europe (PCE). Part numbers can be found in Chapter 8 of this document. Support Materials Organization Parts Center Europe 3625 Cincinnati Avenue Wolf-Hlrth Strasse 33 RocMin, California 95677-1297 D-7030 Boeblingen, West Germany (800) 227-8164 0049-7031-140 1-17, Consumables and Accessories Consumables may be ordered from Hewleti-Packard’s Direct Marketing Division (DMK) and are often available through an authorized Hewlett-Packard deder. The telephone number for DMK is 800-538-8787 (In California 408-738-4133). Mthough they should not be used as a part of normal repair operations, more common consumable and accessory part numbers can be found in Chapter 8 of this manual. Current font cartridges, cables, and miscellaneous accessories and part numbers can be obtained by dling the DMK number above and requesting a current catiog. 1-9. WARRANTY STATEMENT General The fo~owing material is taken from the bserJet 111Printer User’s Manual with only slight changes. Unless specifidly noted, it applies to the LaserJet series II as well. Warranty This warran~ gives you specific legal rights. You may dso have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province. One-Year Limited Warranty Hewlett-Packard warrants its computer hardware products against defects in rnaterids and workmanship for a period of one year from receipt by the end user. During the warran~ period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Should HP be unable to repair or replace the product within a reasonable amount of time, a refund of the purchase price may be given upon return of the product. Exclusions The warran@ on your LaserJet HI printer shall not apply to defects resulting from: ■ Improper or inadequate maintenance by customer. z Customer-supplied software or interfacing. ■ Unauthorized modiflmtion or misuse. ❑ Operation outside of the environment specifications for the product. ■ Operation of non-supported printing media. ■ Duty cycle abuse (see note on next page). , Operating the printer from a mechanid switchbox without a designated surge protector. w Improper site preparation and maintenance. ❑ Use of non-Hewleti-Packard EP-S Cartridges, memory boards, or interface boards. 1-18, Note Operation of the printer beyond the limit of its duty cycle (printing greater than the equivalent of 12,000 (HP 33440) or 16,000 (HP 33449) single-sided pages per Ej month) shall be deemed printer abuse and dl repairs thereafter will be billed on a time and materials basis. If you are using a mechanid switchbox, ensure that it is equipped with a surge protector. Damage to your printer could occur from the use of unprotected mechanid switchboxes. The warranty period begins either on the date of delivery or, where the purchase price includes instigation by Hewlett-Packard, on the date of instigation. Your LaserJet III printer must be serviced by one of the authorized repair depots within the country of original purchase. Customer shall prepay shipping charges (and shall pay all duty and taxes) for products returned for service. Except for products returned to the customer from another country, Hewleti-Packard shall pay for return of products to the customer. If the unit is repaired by an authorized dealer, you will need to negotiate the method and cost of returning the unit with the dealer. YOUmay convert your one-year warranty to a 90-day on-site service agreement any time within 90 days of purchase. Contact your dealer or HP Sales Representative for details regarding this option. Warranty Limitations The warranty set forth above is exclusive and no other warranty, whether written or oral, is expressed or implied. Hewlett-Packard specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Some states or provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. However, any implied warran~ of merchantability or fitness is limited to the one-year duration of this written warranty. Service During the Warranty Period If your hardware should fail during the warranty period, bring the equipment to an authorized HP Dealer Repair Center or send the equipment to one of the HP Field Repair Centers. When sending equipment to an HP Field Repair Center or Dealer Repair Center, follow the repacting guidelines listed below. MSO,complete and enclose the Service Information Form beginning on page 8-9 (HP 33449 only) of the User’s Manual. Insuring the equipment for shipment is recommended. warning Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packaging is the customer’s responsibility. Use the original packing materials whenever possible. 1-19, Service After the Warranty Period If your hardware fails after the warran~ period, contact an Authorized HP Dealer Repair Center. If you have an HP Maintenance Agreement, request service under your agreement. When sending equipment to an HP Field Repair Center, follow the repacking guidelines Oisted in the User’s Manual). Mso, complete and enclose the Sefice Information Form (in the User’s Manual) and enclose a copy of proof of purchase. Insuring the equipment for shipment is recommended. Repacking Guidelines for Returning Your Printer ■ Remove any font mrtridges instiled in the pfinter. ■ Remove the EP-S Cartridge and the Fuser Cleaning Pad. ■ Remove any non-HP accessories (if instiled). ■ Remove paper trays, but include them in the box with the printer. ■ Use the ori@nd shipping container and packing materials, if possible. ■ Include the completed Service Information Form. Include print samples which illustrate the problems you are having, if applicable. w Include 50-100 sheets of any problem paper or forms, if possible. Note If you have already disposed of your printer’s packaging materhd and are unable q to locate another package, the packaging can be ordered from HP’s Support@P ..b.,,Jt.: Materials Organization at the following phone numbers:@ United Stites: 800-227-8164 Canada 416-678-9430 Europe: 41-22-83-81-11 Ask for part number 33440-00908 for the HP 33440 or 33449-00908 for the HP 33449. The proper packaging material @ox and inserts) will be sent to you for a nominal charge. (For further packaging information on both printers, see Chapter 3, Section 3-2 of this manual or Appendix A (HP 33440) or Appendk B (HP 33449).) 1-20,S;TE PLANNING AND REQUIREMENTS
2. sm F~NG AW REQmRmm 2-1. INTRODUCTION ., 2-3 2-2. sITEREQumMENTs +...2-3 2-3. STORING AND WDLfiG EP-S CARTRIDGES .2-4 Storage tith Packaging Intict .2-4 Storage Mer Opening Packaging .2-4 Storage Conditions .2-4 Handling Suggestions .2-5 2-4. PAPER SPECIFICATIONS .2-6 Genera l .2-6 Paper T~es to Use .2-6 Paper T~es to Avoid .2-6 2-5. E~LOPE SPECIFICATIONS..2-8 Genera l .2-8 Envelope Procurement Recommendations .2-8 Envelope T~es To Avoid .2-9 Envelope Construction and Size .2-9 2-6. ~HES~ MEL AND OWRHEAD TRANSPARENCY SPEC~ICATIONS 2-11 Adhesive Labels ...,...2-11 Overhead Transparencies .2-12 2-1. Printer Space Requirements .2-3 2-2. Toner Distribution and Storage .2-5 2-3. Good and Poor Envelope Construction ., .2-8 2-1,Tables
2-1. EP-S Cartridge Storage Conditions With Pa&ging Intact .2-4 2-2. Paper Specifiwtions .2-7 2-3. Envelope Specifimtions .2-1o 2-4. Adhesive hbel Specifiwtions .2-12 2-5. Transparency Specifimtions .2-12, 2-1.INTRODUCTION HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are mrefnlly adjusted and inspected before they are shipped. To maintin the performance level set at the factory, correct selection of a location is ~remely impo~nt. The service representative should filly understand the functions of the printers to ensure selection of a suitable lomtion. 2-2S.ITEREQUIREMENTS The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are designed to operate in a clean environment, preferably in an area not subject to excessive mechanid shock, vibration, or a wide range of temperatures. Mthough air conditioning and power conditioning are not required to ensure reliable operation, the environment specifications listed in Chapter 1, Section 1-3, should not be exceeded. The following suggestions should be taken into consideration prior to instigation The printer should not be instiled near water faucets, humidifiers, refrigerators, or similar devices that affect the environment. A location where the temperature changes abruptly, such as near an air conditioner, should dso be avoided. The printer should not be exposed to open flames, dust, ammonia fnmes, and direct sunlight or other excessively bright light source at anytime. The room should be well ventilated. The printer should be intiled on a sturdy, level surface. Stilcient space should be protided to permit unimpeded printer operation and adequate ventilation (see Figure 2-l). 57” (144 cm) +I8“ (20 cm)
m 22” (55 cm) 4 *I8“ (20 cm)
Figure 2-1. PrinterSpace Requirements 2-3, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUU ~.~m ~~~~j~~ ~~~ ~~~~~~~~ ~p.~ ~~~~~~~~~~ m The EP-S Cartridge can be adversely affected by the environment and time. Careful atiention shotid be given to the fo~owing information about storing and handting cartridges. Storage with Packaging Intact The following conditions should be observed: 1. Keep the EP-S Cartridge out of direct sunfight or other bright light. 2. Keep the EP-S Cartridge on a secure, level surface where it is not likely to be bumped. Under warehouse conditions, be sure the storage area meets the conditions in Table 2-1. Table 2-1. EP-S Cartridge Storage Conditions With Packaging Intact 460 to 760 mm Hg (0.6 to 1 atm) Severe Conditions High 350 to 400 c High 85 to 95% RH 460 to 760 mm Hg (18 Days) Low –20° to 0° C Low 10 to 35% ~ (0.6 to 1 atm) Maximum Temperature High 40° to 15° C n/a n/a Change (3-Minute Period) Low –20° to 25° C 4 Toti Storage Time (Storage + Use): 2.5 years Storage After Opening Packaging The drum in the EP-S Cartridge uses a photosensitive organic coating that deteriorates when exposed to strong fight. The toner in the EP-S Cartridge mn dso be affected by the environment. For these reasons, the customer must be fully informed about the correct method for storing and handfing the cartridge. me EP-S Cartridge must be Mly used within Sk months after it has been removed fim its pachging. Storage Conditions 1. Do not place cartridges in tlre~ sunfight or near a window. Mso, do not leave them inside an automobile for a long period of time in warm weather. (These conditions apply even if the cartridge is still in ih package.) 2. In addition to avoiding areas with constant high or low temperatures or relative humidity (as listed in Table 2-l), avoid lomtions subject to abrupt changes in either temperature or humidity, such as nmr an air conditioner. 3. Do not Wore cartridges in dusty locations and avoid exposure to ammonia gas or other organic solvent vapors. 4. Do not store the EP-S Ctidge above 35° C (95° F). 5. Never qose the mrtridge to tempemtures above 40° C (104° ~. — Note The expiration date specified on the cartridge box is 2.5 years (storage time plus use time) after the dati of manufacture, assuming an intact storage bag. E the bag is broken, the maximum storage-plus-usage time is six months. a 2-4 —, Handling Suggestions 1.When institing a cartridge, slowly rock it 45 degrees about its long axis (see Figure 2-2) about five times to distribute the toner evetiy. 2. As shown in Figure 2-2, do not stand the cartridge upright invert i~ or handle it rougMy. 3. Do not touch the surface of the drum when opening its protective shield on the bottom of the EP-S Cartridge. If it becomes absolutely necessary to cl-n the drum, use only toner app~ed with a dry cloth. Do not wipe with a d~ cloth and do not me any solvents. 4. Do not attempt to disassemble or refill the EP-S Cartridge. 5. Do not expose a tidge to unnecessary vibration or mechanid shock. 6. Nthough an EP-S Cartridge has fight-blocking shutters to protect the photosensitive drum, exposure to light for a long period of time may muse fight Orwhite arias to appear on prints. If this happens, stop the printer and wait a few minutes. This shotid efiminate the problem. In extreme cases, some life may be restored to the drum by placing the EP-S Cartridge in a dark place for an extended period of time. If drum exposure has been excessive, the EP-S Cartridge may require replacement. 7. If it becomes necessary to rotite the drum, always turn it in the same direction it turns while making prints. If it is turned backward, the spring-loaded contact that appfies the developing bias to the inside rim of the developing cytinder may be bent backward so that it no longer contacts the cylinder, thus preventing proper image development. Note Normal room light measured a few meters from a window on an average day, is 1 about 1,500 lUX. Do not expose the photosensitive drum to tight of this intensi~ for more than five minutes. H accidentiy exposed under these conditions, the TV EP-S Cartridge can be stored in a dark place to recuperate, although an image may be retained on the drum for some time. Direct sutight is 10,000-30,000 lUX. A dmm exposed to light of this intensi~ may be permanently damaged. 2-5, 2“4. PAPER SPECIFICATIONS m General HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are designed to work well with most types of xerographic and bond paper. However, some paper variables may have a significant effect on print quality or handling reliabili~. Use of the following guidelines when choosing paper will ensure maximum printer performance. Paper Types to Use To obtain the cleares~ sharpest images, paper manufactured for photocopying, such as Canon NP or Xerox 4024, should be used. Genetily, these types of papers are manufactured to specifications that provide desirable characteristics for laser printer image qudi@ and paper handling. The supplier should be informed that the paper or envelopes are to be used in a laser printer. Aways test samples of the paper before buying to ensure that it provides desirable performance. Preprinted papers should use inks that can withstand the temperature of the printer’s fusing process. For some applications, cotton bond paper may be preferred. Several cotton papers are now being manufactured with properties optimized for laser printing. HP has tested cotton content papers such as Gilbert Neu-Tech and Neenah NP with satisfactory results. Many other types of cotion bonds will work well in these printers. However, always test paper to ensure desirable performance, Paper having a rougher surface, such as coc~e or laid finished paper, or paper that ,,. is wrinMed or puckered may exhibit degraded performance. ● Note HP neither warrants nor recommends the use of any particular paper. Paper properties are subject to change by paper manufacturers, and HP has no control .Pfl over such changes. The operator is responsible for the quality and performance of w paper used with the printer. Paper Types to Avoid Some specific types of paper may not perform well or may damage the printer. (See dso “Envelopes Types to Avoid” in Section 2-5.) Paper types to avoid are: Those not meeting the specifications given in Table 2-2. Extremely smooth or shiny paper, or paper that is highly textured. Coated or chemidly finished papers. Damaged or wrin~ed paper, or paper with irregularities such as tabs and fiples. Letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography. These materials may transfer onto the fusing ro~er and cause damage. Any preprinted paper should use inks able to withstand 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second. Multipart forms or mrbonless paper. Caution Damage or other defects mused by the use of papers listed under “Paper Types to Avoid” above and media with tabs, clasps, stiples, or other objects attached to them will not be covered by HP warran~ or standard HP service agreements. o ● 2-6, Table 2-2. Paper Specifications Ash Content ]Not to exceed 10%. Basis Weight 160 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb.). Brightness ]83% minimum. Ctiper 13.0 to 7.0 roils (0.076 to 0.18 mm). Furnish 1100% chemid wood pulp and/or cotton fiber. Curl Ream: mat within 0.3” (8 mm). Printed: Flat within 0.8” (20 mm). Cut Edge Conditions ICut with sharp blades with no tisible fray. ElectriA Surfaces 2.0 to 15 x 1010 ohms/sq. (conditioned @ 23° C & 50% RH), Resistitity Electrid Volume 1.2 to 15x 1011ohms x cm (conditioned @ 23°C and 50% RH). Resistiti@ Finishing \Cut sheet to within *0.031 in. (.79 mm) of nominal, corners 90° *0.2°. Fusing Compatibility Must not scorch, melt, transfer material, or release haardous emissions when heated to 200°C (392° F) for 0.1 second. Any pre-printed sheets must use inks compatible with the fising process. Grain lLong grain. Moisture Content 4% to 6% by weight. Opacity 85% minimum. Packaging Polylaminated moisture-proof ream wrap. Smoothness 160 to 250 (Sheffield). (The’ rougher surfaces tend to degrade print quality.) Stiffness 1.6 to 7.5 machine direction. 0.6 to 3.5 cross direction (Taber). W= Pick 12 minimum (Dennison). 2-7, 2“5E.NVELOPESPECIF!CATIONS General A wide varie~ of envelopes have been tested and most have performed acceptably. However, some envelopes til not feed through the printer because of their construction. A suitable envelope shotid have not more than two thicknesses of paper along the leading edge (the edge that enters the printer fir~ see Figure 2-3) and the lmdlng edge should be straight with a sharp, well-creased fold. ~lmsy envelopes lacking stiffness or those having curved leading edges fi not retiably feed into the printer. Nso, envelopes having “baggy” construction may writie w~e going through the printer’s fnser. Poor resdts dso occur when envelopes are folded smaller than normal, musing a thick leading edge near a corner. The folding accuracy of some manufacturers’ envelopes may vary enough to cause some envelopes to feed well and other, apparently similar, envelopes to jam. Note The Face Up (rear) Output Tray - the most direct path for envelopes and other n media - should be used to reduce wrin~lng and curl. Envelope Procurement Recommendations Purchase qudi~ envelopes only from a supplier who understands that the envelopes will be used in a laser printer. Envelopes should lie flat, have folds that are consistent and sharp, and be packaged in a protective box. Envelope samples should be tested before purchasing. Consistent, long-term performance requires quality control from the envelope manufacturer and proper handling until use. Envelopes should be stored where they m he flat and the edges will not be damaged. They should be kept away from efiremes in temperature and humidi~ and should be allowed to reach room temperature before use. Figure 2-3. Good and Poor Envelope Construction 2-8, Envelope Types To Avoid ■ Envelopes that do not meet the spetilmtions fisted in Table 2-3. ❑ Envelopes constructed of paper with weight greater than 24 pounds (9Og/m2). ■ Poorly manufactured envelopes with leading edges having more than two thicknesses of paper and that are not consistently square and straight (see Figure 2-3). ■ Envelopes with “ba~” construction or folds that are not sharply creased. N Envelopes that have drmdy been printed on with a bserJet printer. ■ Envelopes with cl=ps, snaps, or tie strings. m Envelopes with transparent windows, holes, perforations, or cutouti. 9 Envelopes using paper, inks, adhesives, or other materials that discolor, melt transfer material, or release hazardous emissions when exposed to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second. Envelopes made with extremely smooth, shiny, or recycled paper. Envelopes that are very rough, highly te~red, or deeply embossed. Envelopes which do not tie flat or that are damaged, curled, wrinMed, or irregularly shaped. Envelopes having an open flap with adhesive exposed so that closing the flap seals the envelope. Envelopes that use encapstiated ~es of adhesive that do not require moistening but instead rely on pressure to sed them. — caution Under no circumstances should envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, or synthetic materials be used; severe damage may occur to the printer. Such damage is not covered by HP warran~ or standard HP service agreemen~. Envelope Construction and Size Both the HP 33440 and HP 33449 use an adjustable envelope cassette. Standard envelope sizes that = be used are Commercial 10 4+11~ g;tl Monarch 3~11~ 7+11 C5: 162 mm x 229 mm International DL llOmm x 220mm Non-standard envelopes that fdl within the folloting size ranges can dso be used Minimum size: 3.5” x 7.5” (89 mm x 190 mm). Maximum size: 7.2” x 10.1” (182 mm x 257 mm). 2-9, Note Hewleti-Packard neither warrank nor recommends the use of a particular envelope because envelope propetiies are subjed to change by envelope ● # manufacturers. Hewlett-Packard has no control over such changes. The entire v responsibfity for the quality and performance of envelopes ties with the customer. Mthough testing helps to characterize an envelope’s performance, long-term satisfaction requires process qufllty control by the envelope’s manufacturer and proper handling until use. Envelopes should meet the specifications Ested in the following table Table 2-3. Envelope Specifications Basis Weight 16 to 24 pounds (17” x 22” per 500 sheets) (60 to 90 grams/sq. meter). Caliper 3.3 to 5.5 tis (0.084 to 0.14 mm) single layer thickness. Curl Must tie flat with less than 0.25” (0.064 mm) curl across entire surface. Finishing Envelopes must be accurately (+0.04” (0.01 mm) of normal) folded so there are no more than tio thicknesses of paper at the leading edge, Ml folds must be sharply creased and construction must be tight. Furnish 100% chemid wood pulp and/or cotton. I Fusing CompatibKlty Must not scorch, melt offset or release hmardous emissions when . heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second. ● Moisture Content 4% to 6% by weight. Paper Paper used for envelope construction must meet dl the paper specifications listed in Table 2-2. Smoothness 100 to 250 (Sheffield). (The rougher surfaces tend to degrade print quality.) Note Envelope performance in both the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers may be influenced by properties other than those specified here. True verification of performance requires actually running the envelope through the printer. # Consisten$ acceptable, long-term pefiormance of envelopes in this printer requires careful process qutity control by the envelope manufacturer and proper handling until use by the customer. 2-1o, 2“6. ADHESIVE LABEL AND OVERHEAD TRANSPARENCYSPEC1FICATIONS
HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers will dso print on certain adhesive label and overhead transparency media. (Label and transparency part numbers have been listed as of this printin~ contact DMK for current information.) caution Use of labels and transparencies not designed for the HP 3.3440or HP 33449 printers may result in damage not covered by HP warran~ or standard HP service agreements. Use only labels and overhead transparencies recommended for # use in laser printers. Adhesive Labels An adhesive label is paper with a pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. The three components of label stock are the top or face sheet (the actud.label), the adhesive, and the liner or carrier sheet, sometimes referred to as the backing. Use the rear output tray when printing labels to reduce curl. The elementi of label stock include: Top or Face Sheets: The top sheet, which is the printing surface, is usually composed of photocopy paper. Carrier Sheeti The carrier sheet should be bleached sulfate stock, silicone coated for easy release of the face sheet. Adhesive: The adhesive should be acrylic-based since such material is more stable than other adhesives at the high temperatures encountered in the printer’s fusing process. warning Air quafity testing has been conducted on a similar Hewlett-Packard printing product in accordance with National Institute for Occupational Safety and HealthP
(NIOSH) test procedures and standards. As a result of this testing, only labels Q using an acrylic-based adhesive are recommended for use. Adhesives should not come in direct contact with any part of the printer because the label stock may stick to the photosensitive drum or the rollers, causing toner offset or paper jams. No adhesive should be exposed between the labels. To test label stock for adhesive exposure, a sheet of plain paper should not adhere when pressed against a sheet of label stock. ■ Label arrangement Labels should be arranged on the carrier sheet so that they cover the entire page, with the only reposed spaces being lengthwise down the sheet. Using label stock with spaces betieen labels often resulti in labels peeling off during the printing cycle, causing serious jamming problems. Do not remove any excess top sheet material from the carrier sheet until tier printing. These precautions will help prevent problems restiting from labels pulling loose from the carrier sheet. I kbel curl: Labels must lie flat with no more than ~ inch of curl in any direction. ■ Poorly mantiactured labels: Do not use labels having wrin~es, bubbles or other indications of delamination; they may result in damage to the printer due to labels peeling off. 2-11, HP 33440/HP 33449: COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL Face Sheet Fusing Ml adhesives, Eners, facestocks and other materials used in the label Compatibility construction must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset material or release h~ardous emissions when heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 seconds. Construction Toti construction diper must not exceed 0.0070 inches (0.18mm). HP has tested labels-such as Ave~ labels specified for laser printers and Hewlett-Packard LaserJet labels-and found their performance to be satisfactory. Hewlett-Packard Labels (8 ~” x 11”, 100 Sheets): 9 p/N 92296A II: x 2:** ■ p/N 92296F: ;II x l;II ■ Pfl g22g6B: l~!~ x 4]! ■ P/N g22g6@ $*8x 3~*# ■ P/N g22g6C: 11(x 411 ■ P/N g22g6H: 2~B*x 2~** ■ P/N g22g6D: 2*!x 4$! ■ P/N 92296J: 1+11x 411 ■ P/N g22g6E: 3$ II x 4$s ■ P/N g22g6K 8+11x 11~1 Caution Remove each label immediately fier printing. Bemuse they may stick together due to their heat retention properties, do not allow them to stack up in the paper a tray. Always use the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray to prevent possible labeljams o and resultant damage to the printer. Overhead Transparencies Hewlett-Packard has tested overhead transparency film such as HP overhead transparencies and found the performance acceptable. Use the rear output tray when printing transparencies to reduce curl. Overhead transparencies should meet the specifications provided in Table 2-5. Table 2-5. Transparency Specifications Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm 3.9 to 4.5 roils Cutting Dimension Tolerance & 0.7 mm 0.031 inch Cutting Angle 900 + 0.20 Hewlett-Packard offers the following overhead transparencies through its Direct Marketing Division: ■ P/N 92296T: 8;” x 11”, 50 Sheets ■ P/N 92296U: A4 (210 mm x 297 mm), 50 Sheets 2-12,INSTALLATIONAND CONFIGURATION
contents 3. INsTmMmoN m comGmmoN 3-1. mTRoDucTIoN .3-3 3-2. UNPAC~G AND INSTALWTION .3-3 UnpacHng Instructions .3-3 Hardware Instigation .3-4 Genera l .3-4 Interface Cabling .3-4 Serial Interface Setup.3-4 RS-422 Configuration .3-5 Sotiare Intimation .3-5 MS-DOS System Configuration .3-6 In Caseof Difficulty.3-6 3-3. USING THE CONTROL PANEL .3-7 Overview .3-7 Control Panel Functional Description .3-8 Genera l .3-8 Indicator Descriptions .3-8 Key Descriptions .3-8 Default Setiings and Restati Routines .3-11 Default Settings .3-11 Factory Defatit Settings .3-11 Envelope Cassette Size Setiing .3-12 Resetting the Printer .3-13 Menu Reset Routine .3-13 Cold Reset Routine .3-13 3-4. USING THE PR~TING AND CONFIGURATION MENUS .3-14 Overview .3-14 Printing Menu Setiings .3-14 Configuration Menu Setiings .3-16 Symbol Sets .3-17 Auto Continue .3-17 Interface Type .3-17 Resolution Enhancement (HP 33449 Only) .3-17 Print Density and Resolution Enhancement .3-19 Page Protection (HP 33449 Only) .3-20 3-5. FONT PRINTOUTS .3-21 3-1, Understanding the Font Printout . 3-21 3-6. SELF TESTS .3-25 Genera l .3-25 05 SELF TEST.3-25 Self-Test Printout Information . 3-25 HP 33440 Self Test Printout .3-26 HP 33449 Self Test Printout .3-27 04 SELF TEST.3-29 Test Print (15 ENGINE TEST) .3-29 3-7. SERWCE MODE .3-30 General .3-30 Using Setice Mode .3-30 Self Tests ... ~...3-31 Setting the Page Count .3-32Figures
3-1. Setting HP 33440 Stitches .3-5 3-2. Control Panels .3-7 3-3. Print Densi@ at Line Transitions .3-19 3-4. Vertid Stripes in the 33% Pie Slice .3-19 3-5. HP 33440 Font Printout (In Engtish only) .3-22 3-6. HP 33449 Font Printout (Lodzed for selected language) .3-24 3-7. Portion of HP 3344005 SELF TEST Printout .3-26 3-8. HP 3344905 SELF TEST Printout .3-28 3-9. Selecting the Test Print Svtitch (HP 33440 shown here) .3-29 3-1o. Portion of Test Print Pattern .3-29 3-11. Portion of Sefice Mode SeMTest .3-31Tables
3-1. Factory Default Setiings .3-11 3-2. HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printing Menu Items .3-15 3-3. HP 33449 Additiond Printing Menu Items , .3-15 3-4. HP 33440 Configuration Menu Items .3-16 3-5. HP 33449 Additiond Cotil@ration Menu Items .,..3-17 3-6. HP 33440 Symbol Seti in Sequence .3-18 3-7. HP 33449 Symbol Sets in Sequence .3-18 3-8. Page Protection Memory Configurations With 1 ~yte of additiond memory) 3-20, 3-1= INTRODUCTION Two basic topics are discussed in this chaptec ■ Unpacking and Instigation. ■ Using the Control Panel to configure the printer and to check printer functions. Each printer is mrefully inspected before it is shipped. Proper instigation is e~remely impotint to maintain printer performance at the level set at the factory. The service representative should fully understand the operating environment parameters of the printer to ensure that it is properly instiled in a suitable location (see Chapters 1 and 2). A thorough knowledge of the Control Panel is necessary to understand default settings, restart routines, and the font and other printouts– as well as to use the Printing and Configuration Menus, run self tests, and use the service mode. Since their physid appearance is quite similar, the HP 33449 has generally been used to represent both printers. If there is a significant difference, appropriate instructions for both printers have been added. 3-2. UNPACKING AND ‘INSTALLATION Unpacking Instructions Note ALL packaging material should be retained in case the printer needs to be repackaged for shipment at a later date. For both printers, packaging material to be saved includes dl cardboard and foam materials. Replacement packaging material is available through SMO (800-227-8164) or PCE (0049-7031-140). Pafi numbers are 33440-00908 for the HP 33440 and 33449-00908 for the HP 33449. Mthough unpacking and instigation instructions for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are quite similar, there are some differences. For the HP 33440, refer to Appendk A for the pamphlet, Your Road Map to setting up Your kserJet series II Printer, which was packaged with printers after November 1989. (The Getting Started Manual was packaged with printers before November 1989.) The pamphlet, Your Guide to Setting up Your hserJet III, which is shipped with the printer, is included here as Appendix B. Prior to unpacking either printer, examine the shipping container for any signs of physical damage (holes in the container, large indentations, etc.). If damage to the shipping container is evident, request that the carrier’s agent be present when the printer is unpacked. The recipient assumes all liabili@ for shipping damages once the box has been opened. warning Take care when unpacking and handling the printer. Because both the HP u 33440 and HP 33449 printers weigh approximately 50 pounds (22.4 Kg), twoB people may be required to lift a printer from its packaging or move it around theworkspace. 3-3, Hardware Installation General Ensure that the printer’s site environment meets dl the specifications in Chapter 1 and Chapter 2. Refer to the appropriate appendk for actual hardware instigation instructions - Appendk A for the HP 33440 and Appendti B for the HP 33449. The HP 33440 factory interface default is serial; the HP 33449 default interface is parallel. Decide at this time which interface connection will be used based upon the host system’s capabilities and the protimi@ of the printer to its host. Configure the printer accordingly. Interface Cabling Typid cabling diagrams can be found in Appendk D for both serial and parallel (Centronics) configurations. HP part numbers for mbles used in MS-DOS environments can be found in Appendk A (for the HP 33440) or Append& B (for the HP 33449). ~ Serial Interface Setup For both printers, to reconfigure from padlel interface to serial or to change the baud rate, etc., follow these instructions: 1. Make sure both the computer and printer are titched off. 2. Connect the serial cable between the printer and the computer. 3. Switch the printer on. 4. Take the printer off line. 5. Hold the [-j key down (about 5 seconds) until SYMSET= (HP 33440) or AUTOCONT= (HP 33449) is displayed. 6. Press the [=] key once until 1/0= is displayed. (To change the display, press the ~ or ~ key to display I/O=SERIAL and then press the [=) key to save the selection.) 7. HP 33440 only Press the (=) key to show BAUDRATE=. 8. HP 33449 only Press the [-j key to show SERIAL= and select SERIAL=RS-232; then press the [-j key again to show BAUDRATE=. 9. Press the Q or ~ keys if the baud rate needs to be changed to match the host computer’s baud rate. 10. Press the [=] key to save the selection. 11. Press the [-j key to show ROBUSTXON= . If ROBUSTXON=OFF*mON=DCl) appears, press the ~ key to display ONand press the [-J key to save the selection. (See the note below for additiond information on ROBUST XON configuration.) 12. Press the (=) key to show DTRPOLARITY= . Select the proper polarity (normally HI, determined by the host). (Note DTR polarity is only configurable when the selected 1/0 type is Serial and Serial is set to RS-232.) 13. Return the printer to on-line status by pressing (~]. 3-4, ND%e The ROBUST XON configuration determines the method by which the printer generates XONS (DCIS). If ROBUST XON is ON, an XON is transmitted by the controller ti the host system when (1) the controller’s l-~yte 1/0 buffer has less than 128 data bytes remaining, (2) the printer is in an on-fine state, and (3) the printer is not busy. If no data is received within approximately one second, then additiond XONS are transrnitied at one second intervals until data is received. If ROBUST XON is OFF, the printer sends a single XON whenever (1) the printer can accept more data following an XOFF (DC3), (2) the printer returns to an on-line state, and (3) the printer is not busy. The printer does not send XONS every second while the printir is on line and ready for more data. RS-422 Configuration HP 3344& To select M-422 operation, remove the MO screws securing the plate labeled “OPTIONW 1/0” on the lower rear section of the printer (see Figure 3-1). Move SW1 on the Interface PCA from the DOWN to the UP position. When 1/0= SER~ is selected from the printer’s Configuration Menu, RS-422 protocol, rather than W-232, will be in effect. HP 3344W W-422 communication is selected through the Control Panel’s Configuration Menu. — —— — —— I l== IllIIIll Figure 3-1. setting HP 33440 switches Software Installation Once the printer has been properly instiled and appropriately mbled to its host system, the host system till need to be configured to communicate with the printer. Following are guidelines for MS-DOS-based systems. Assuming a serial connection on systems baaed on an operating system other than MS-DOS, the host must be cotilWrable using the following protocok Word Size: 8-bit. Start Bits: 1. Stop Biti: 1. Pari~ None. Handshting Hardware (using DTR) or XON@OFF. (Hardware handsh&ng is not available using the W-422A configuration.) 3-5, - The polari@ (HI or LO) of the DTR signal fine can be configured at the printer to match the host system’s requirements. The baud rate @its per second) setting of both printer and host system a must match. In the printer’s Configuration Menu, ROBUST XON should be set to ON, unless the host system is unable to handle repeating XON’S (DC1’S) at the rate of approximately one per second whenever the printer is ready to receive data. Setting ROBUST XON to OFF will cause the printer to issue only a single XON when it comes on fine or following an XOFF when its 1/0 buffer can once again accommodate additiond data. Note The HP 33440 has the additiond capability of responding to a “status request” sequence ([ESCI ? [DCII), providing compatibili~ with system drivem that issue ~ such requests. This capability can be added to the HP 33449 using an Optional w 1/0 Interface. Contact your HP sales representative for more information. MS-DOS System Configuration To communicate properly with the printer, the MS-DOS environment will require the addition/modification of MODE commands in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Add or modi& the MODE command(s), depending on the interface cotilgnration, as fo~ows: Padlel MODE LPT n , , P where n is the parallel port designator to which the cable is attached (typidly 1 or 2). (This command sequence retries sending output if timeout errors occur.) Serial MODE COM n : [baud rate + 100] , N , 8, 1, P where n is the serial port designator to “-Klch the cable is attached (typidly 1, 2, 3, or 4). (This command sequence sets ,- baud rate, parity, number of data bits and stop bits, and retries on time-out errors.) ● MODE LPT1: =COM n. (With this command sequence, any output sent to “LPT1” is redirected to the serial port.) Since the MODE command is an e~ernd MS-DOS command (i.e., a program named MODE.COM is run when the command is invoked), the program file must be contained in the root directory or in a directory specified in a preceding PATH command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Once modification to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file has been made, the computer must be rebooted for the changes to take effect. Note Some PC sotiare applications override these MS-DOS configurations set using ,8 the MODE command. These applications must dso be configured appropriately to communicate properly with the printer. w In Case of Difficulty E the preceding steps have been followed and the printer and host have matching configuration parameters set but the printer is not operating as ~pected, refer to the “Interface Troubleshooting” section in Chapter 7, Section 7-6. 3-6, 3-3. USING THE CONTROL PANEL Overview Control Panel operation for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers is quite similar. Mthough the HP 33440 uses a membrane-@e keypad and the HP 33449 uses a set of raised keys with a slightly different arrangement (see Figure 3-2), the keys and indicators as well as most of the functions displayed are the same. The HP 33449 adds the following features: h=lintion: Five languages (English, French, German, Itiian, and Spanish) can be chosen for display, self test and font printout messages. Sealable ~efaces: Pitch or point size mn be selected from the Printing Menu if the chosen font is a salable ~eface. Expanded Symbol Se&. An expanded list of symbol sets is offered. Symbol set selection appears in the Printing Menu, not the Configuration Menu as in the HP 33440. %solution Enhancement ‘M This HP proprietary technolo~ improves the visual quality of printed images beyond the 300 dpi standard. Page Protection: This feature, with the addition of at least 1 Mbyte of expansion memory, reserves additiond memory to ensure that an entire page @ be printed, regardless of its complexi~. Note that for both printers, some keys have a lower function label which indicates a second or, for some keys, a third functional level. Pressing keys briefly accesses the top level of Control Panel fnnctions. Holding down keys for a number of seconds accesses a second or third level of Control Panel finctions. Remember tha$ with the exception of the (~] key, the printer must be off line to use the Control Panel. (HP 33440) (HP 33449) Figure 3-2. Control Panels 3-7, Control Panel Functional Description General The ~ 33440 and ~ 33449 operator control panels consist of eight keys, one green LED indicator (RE~u, three amber LED indicators (ON HNE, FORM FEED, MUM), and a one-line by 16-character LCD display. The functional descriptions which follow apply to both the W 33440 and W 33449 printers unless othetise specified. Since timing for key press duration may differ slightiy, the durations @ven should be taken as a gened indication only. For the ~ 33449, display messages are iodized (i.e., they appear in the selected display language) unless otherwise noted. Indicator Descriptions On Line Indicator When the amber LED adjacent to the (~) key shows a steady light, the printer is on tine, indicating that it is ready to receive data. The printer should be on line after it has been turned on and warmed up. When on line and printing, use of the [~] key does not result in an immediate off-line indication. The ON L~E LED flashes and the Control Panel does not respond to firther operator requesti until buffered pages have finished printing. Form Feed Indicator The amber FORM FEED indicator adjacent to the (~] key will tight whenever page data is stored in the printer’s memory. Do not turn the printer off when the form feed indicator is on or the data stored in merno~ will-be lost. Use the ~~] key to print stored data if the RE~Y indicator shows a steady light and the FORM FEED indicator is tit. While the page is being printed, the FORM FEED indimtor will flash. Ready Indicator The green RE~Y indicator is fit when the printer is on and ready to print. When the Ught is flashlng, the printer is receiting data or processing data already received. In order for the printer to receive data, it must be on line and ready. When the ready indicator light is off, an error, status, or attendance message W be displayed. Manual Indicator The amber WUW indicator is lit when manual feed has been selected from the Control Panel or through a software application. Key Descriptions On Ulne Key m The printer can be switched from on-line to off-line status by pressing the ~-] key. To receive data, the printer must be on line. To use the other keys on the Control Panel, the printer must be off line. Note that when on tine and printing, use of the ~-] key does not result in an immediate off-line stat% response is delayed until paper motion is finished, although data transfer betieen the printer and host ceases at the time the key is pressed. 3-8, Continue~set Key The (CONTINUE/RESET) key has two modes: ~ Briefly pressing the (CONTINUE/RESET) key clears most errors (except hardware errors) and returns the printer to on-line status ~er an error condition or device attendance request. The continue aspect of the key overrides manual feed and media size requests and resumes printing following recoverable error conditions. Holding down the (CONTINUE/RESET) key until 07 RESETis displayed (about two seconds) returns dl current printing settings to Control Panel settings (see “Resetiing the Printer”). A Control Panel reset dso clears tempora~ sofi fonts, temporary macros, and stored page data. Print Fontsflest The (PRINT FONTS/TEST) key creates a font printout, a self-test printout, Key and continuous self-test printouts. It has two basic modes: (PRINT FONTS) Briefly pressing the (PRINT FONTS/TEST) key muses several pages to be printed showing sample characters from dl available fonts. The display W show 06 FONTPRINTOUTwhile the pages are printing. (See Figure 3-5 (HP 33440) or Fignre 3-6 (HP 33449) for an example and e~lanation of the font printout.) Holding down the (PRINT FONTS/TEST) key until 05 SELFTESTis displayed (about two seconds for the HP 33440 and about three seconds for-the HP 33449) causes the printer to test ik built-in controller and to create a test printout. During the test, dl the Control Panel indicators light up. When the printing portion of the test begins, 06 PRINTINGTEST is displayed. When the test is completed, 00 READYis displayed. (If an error occurs during the test, an error message will be displayed instead.) If the (PRINT FONTS/TEST) key is held down for at least five seconds (until 04 SELFTESTis displayed), test printouts will be continuously printed until the (-] key is pressed (the [~] and PRINT FONTS) keys @n dso be used). The 04 portion of the message will then flash and the printer will return to on-line status when the page buffer is cleared (up to six additiond pages may print). Note A reset is performed before and after the font printout and the self test. This reset first prints any buffered data, then clears dl tempora~ fonts and temporary macros. Fom Feed Key ~ Pressing the ~~j key while the printer is off line and in a ready stite tells the printer to print the contenti of the page buffer. If the last page sent to the printer from the host is a partial page and the software does not send a command to print this data, use the (~] key to print the partial page. If there is no dah in the page buffer (i.e., the FOW FEED indicator is OFF), pressing this key will have no effect. 3-9, Menu Key The (=) key is used to access both the Printing Menu and the Configuration Menu (see Section 3-4). Printing Menu items can be overridden through sotiare applications. Briefly pressing the (=] key enters the Printing Menu. COPIES= is displayed. Once the menu is entered, pressing the (=] key wi~ step through the menu items. The Q and Q keys are used to display choices (see the Q and Q keys below), and pressing the ENTER/RESET MENU key will save a selected menu item. Holding down the (=) key until SYMSET= (HP 33440) or AWO CONT=(HP 33449) is displayed (about 5 seconds) enters the Configuration Menu. Once the menu is entered, pressing the [=) key will step through the menu items. The Q and @ keys are used to display choices (see the Q and Q keys below), and pressing the (ENTER/RESET MENU) key will save a selected menu item. Enter/Wset Menu The (ENTER/RESET MENU] key has two modes: Key m / Pressing the (ENTER/RESET MENU) key saves a menu selection. An asterisk (*) will a-p-pear beside the item to indicate it is saved. When these new settings tie effect is dependent on which printer is being used. HP 33440 only: New setiings will not take effect until an 07 RESETis performed or an ‘CE is sent from the host. HP 33449 only A new Printing Menu feature, Auto &et, is performed if the printer determines th~t no buffered data and no temporary soft fonts or temporary macros are currentiy present. If buffered data, temporary fonts, or temporary macros are present and a new Printing Menu item is selected, the display will show 10 RESETTO SAVEwhen the printer is returned to on-line status. New settings will not take effect until an 07 RESETis performed or an ‘CE is sent from the host. Pressing and holding the (~) key until 07 RESETappears will invoke the new Printing Menu setiinge but buffered data and temporary soft fonts and temporary macros will be lost. Pressing the (~j or (~j key will save the data but the Printing Menu items will not be in effect. (The display will show the selected change but the current printer settings are not changed.) Holding down the (-) key at least MO seconds until 09 MENU RESETis displayed returns Printing Menu settings to factory default settings and pu~ these settings in effect. It dso clears temporary soft fonti, temporary macros, and any stored page data. Plus and Minus Keys: Once the desired menu item has been reached, these keys step through the available choices. For example, if the display window shows COPIES = 03 (HP 33449: COPIES= 3), pressing the Q key will change the message to COPIES= 04 (HP 33449: COPIES= 4). Pressing the ~ key .- will change the message to COPIES= 03 (HP 33449: COPIES= 3) again. Holding down either of these keys will scroll through the available choices 9 for each menu item. 3-1o, Default Settings and Restart Routines Default Settings Default printer settings are defined as those settings which will be used as a result of performing a Control Panel 07 RESETor issuing a sotiare reset (ECE) from the host system. The printers originally ship with factory default settings as specified in Table 3-1. The factory default menu settings till remain in effect until altered using the Control Panel menu selection. Note that dl default Printing Menu setiings can be overridden using software commands and will remain in effect until a subsequent printer reset (an ‘CE or Control Panel 07 RESET)is performed. These software commands do not alter the menu settings. Note also that sotiare commands mnnot override Configuration Menu setiings. Factory Default Settings Factory defaults are permanently stored in the printer’s ROM memory and mn be used to set Printing and Configuration Menu settings in ~. The printer will use these default settings until they are changed using the Control Panel or overridden by sending printer commands through software. Both Printing and Configuration Menu settings can be returned to factory default settings using the COLD RESET routine. Performing the RESET MENU routine will reset dl Printing Menu settings to their factory defaults. Factory default setiings for both printers are shown in Table 3-1. Table 3-1. Factory Default Settings Number of Copies (COPIES=) 01 1 Font Source (FONTSOURCE=) I (Internal) I (Internal) Font Number (FONTNUMBER=) o 0 Pitch (PITCH=) n/a PITCH 10,001 ~oint Size (PT. SIZE=) ;oINT sIzE 12.002 Paper Size (PAPER=) n/a LETTER/A43 IOrientation (ORIENTATION=) In/a IPORTMT I IForm (lines/page) (FORM=) 160 160/643 \ IManual Feed (MANUAFLEED=) 10FF 10FF I ISymbol Set (SYMSET=) 1Row-8 IROW-8 I IAuto Continue (AUTOCONT=) 10FF 10FF I 11/0 (1/0=) ISEW IPMLEL I ISerial (S~RIAL=)4 In/a IRS-232 I IBaud Rate (BAUDRATE=)4 19600 19600 I IRobust XON (ROBUSXTON=)4 10N 10N I 3-11, Table 3-1. Factory Default Settings (continued) DTR Polari@ (DTRPOLARITY=)5 HI HI RET (RET=) n/a DARK Page Protect (PAGEPROTECT=)6 n/a OFF Display Language (LANGUAGE=)7 n/a ENG (Engtish) Envelope Tray 8 E~LOP= COM1O PE TRAY= COMIO/DL3 1. Ody displayed when a salable, fried-spaced font is selected. 2. Only displayed when a salable, proportional-spaced font is selected. 3. Facto~-set with HP 33449AB (220 ~. 4. Only ~lsplayed if SERN is selected as the 1/0 interface. 5. Only displayed if SERN and RS-232 are selected. 6. Only available with added memory. 7. Refer to Appendix B for configuration instructions. 8. Only &splayed when the Envelope Tray is insetied. Envelope Cassette Size Setting Whenever an envelope tray is inserted in the printer, the Control Panel will display ENVELOPE= (HP 33440) or PE TRAY= (HP 33449). The envelope tray was designed for a variety of envelope sizes and the Control Panel setting establishes the printable area for four common sizes. These are MONARCH, C5, DL, or COM1O. The first time an envelope tray is inserted in the printer, this message will read ENVELOPEC=OM1O*or PE TRAY=COMIO*(the asterisk indicates the current default choice). If an envelope size different from COM1O is being used, the Q and Q keys should be used to display the available choices. When the [-j key is used to make the desired selection, this choice becomes the new default value. This means that when an envelope tray is insetied in the printer, the display will read from that time forward ENVELOPE/PETRAY=[selected choice]*. For the HP 3W9 only, note that if an dternati selection is not made within 10 seconds tier inserting the envelope tray, the printer @ return to an on-line condition using COM1O (or other previously selected envelope size setting) as its expected envelope size. To alter this setting, the envelope tray should be removed and reinstiled, and the selection procedure repeated within 10 seconds of reintilation. In contras~ the HP 33440 printer will remain in an off-line condition until expficitiy placed on tine by the user after insertion of an envelope tray. Keep in mind that this setting is completely independent of any Printing Menu item selection. This means that for example, although the paper/envelope size in the Printing Menu of the HP 33449 may have been changed to ENVELOPE=C5in, sertion of an envelope tray will yield the same PE TRAY=[envelope size] message, where the displayed envelope size may not necessarily be c5. If C5 envelopes are indeed loaded in the envelope tray, the user must notify the printer of this fact at the time the tray is intiled. Once selected, however, mch subsequent time the envelope tray is instied, PETRAY=CS*(in our example) will be displayed as the new default value. For both printers, once set, the envelope tray size setting will not be altered by any other procedure than the one just discussed. Not even a COLD RESET routine will modify this setting. a 3-12, Resetting the Printer The printer an be reset in three different ways: ■ Pressing the CONTINUE/RESET key until 07 RESETis displayed or sending an ‘c E resets the printer to the values the user has selected through the Printing Menu. ■ Pressing the ~ENTER/RESET MENU] key until 09 MENURESETis displayed resets the printer and all Printing Menu items to the factory default setiings. ■ Performing a COLDRESET(or “Cold Start”) operation resets the printer and menu items to factory default Printing and Configuration Menu settings. (See “Cold Reset Routine.”) Most sotiare automatidly sends the ‘c E command (the RESET command) before and after each job. With some sotiare packages, this command may need to be sent by the user from the computer or a Control Panel RESET routine may need to be performed before sending a new job to the printer. Resetting the printer ensures that the Printing Menu settings from the Control Panel are used. If these settings are changed often or if printer commands that affect page format are sent, the printer may need to be reset to make sure that the desired settings are in use. (Note: any tempora~ fonts and temporary macros are dso cleared when resetting the printer.) Ordinarily, sohare tin perform any necessary printer reset for the user. Note that a Control Panel reset will cl-r (rather than print) any buffered data in the printeds memory. Reset Menu Routine Holding down the (RESET MENU) key at least two seconds until 09 MENURESETis displayed returns Printing Menu settings to factory default setiings and puts these setiings in effect. It also clears temporary soft fonts, temporary macros, and any stored page dati. Cold Reset Routine A “COLD RESET” returns dl Printing Menu and 1/0 Configuration Menu items to their factory default settings. “COLD RESET” does not reset the page count or envelope cassette size (or, for the HP 33449, display language) settings which are dso stored in non-volatile RAM. A “COLD RESET” is performed by holding down the ~-) key while powering on the printer. 08 COLD RESET(not iodized for HP 33449) is displayed for one second, followed by the power-on SELF TEST message. The actual “COLD RESET” is performed immediately tier the display shows 00 READYa, nd, afterward, the printer must be put on line by the user. Since 1/0 confiWration values have been reset to factory defaults, proper settings should be verified before placing the printer on line. 3-13, 3-4. USING THE PRINTING AND CONFIGURATION MENUS ● Overview Since the HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printing and Configuration Menus are quite similar, they have been combined, using the HP 33440 as the basis for discussion, with HP 33449 information added where there is a substantial difference. Ml HP 33449 messages for Printing and Configuration Menus are iodized. (See Appendk F, “HP 33449 Display Language Message Translations.”) The (=J key accesses both the Printing and Configuration Menus. (The printer must be off line to access both menus.) Briefly pressing the (=] key enters the Printing Menu. Holding down the (=] key for seved seconds enters the ConfiWration Menu. The Printing Menu contains printing items which determine the find appearance of the printed page, such as the number of copies, lines-per-inch, or font selection. The Configuration Menu contains printer configuration settings such as communication parameters, Resolution Enhancement levels, and memory configuration. Pressing the Q or Q key allows the user to step through the menu item choices; holding down the key scrolls quic~y through menu item choices. Once the desired selection appears, it can be saved by pressing the [~) key. An asterisk (*) will appear nefi to the item to indicate it has been selected. Press (~j at any time to etit a menu and return the printer to the on-line state. Printing Menu Settings The Printing Menu for both the HP 33440 and HP 33449 includes the following items: H Number of copies. m Manual feed selection. ■ Font source, ■ Font number. I Lines-per-page. The Printing Menu for the HP 33449 includes these additiond items: ■ Pitch (salable, fked-spaced fonts ody). E Point Size (salable, proportionally spaced fonts only). ■ Paper (or envelope) size. H Print Orientation. ■ Symbol Set (in Configuration Menu for HP 33440). To enter the Printing Menu, briefly press the (=J key COPIES= will be displayed. Table 3-2 (combined HP 33440 and HP 33449 Ptinting Menu items) and Table 3-3 (HP 33449 additional Printing Menu items) can be used as quick reference gaides for using the Printing Menu. These tables describe printer Control Panel keys used to select Printing Menu items (the “Printer Displays” column shows the factory defatit settings). NOte For the HP 33440 only, if a Printing Menu selection is made and the sotiare does not perform a reset by sending an ‘c E, thenlthe printer muti be reset using PI the RESET key on the Control Panel in order for the selection to take effect. The w HP 33449 accomplishes this with the AUTO RESET feature. a 3-14, Table 3-2. HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printing Menu Items “Items Printer Displays Press Choices PressI Copies = 33440: COPIES=O1*]HP 33~4g: COPIES=I* LManual MANUAFLEED=OFF*Feed ksFFont FONTSOURCE=I* step I-Internal Fonts
Source or L-Left Cartridge scroll through Font 00 .99 F Number o .999 Form 005 .128 continue Length 5 .128 1. An afiefisk (*) fo]loting an item indicates that the selection is saved. 2. FORM=6L4INEStith ~ 33449~ printers as shipped (220 v). Table 3-3. HP 33449 Additional Printing Menu Items Items P~gter Displays Press Pitch2 PITCH=IO. 00*1 Q ~or Pt. ;ize3 PT. SIZE=12.00* & Media PAPERL=ETTER*4 to step Size or scrollEOrientation ORIENTATION=P* throughSymbol SYM SET=ROMAN-8* items See Table 3-7 toSets (HP 33449 only) I continue
1. An asterisk (*) folloting an item indicates that the selection is saved. 2. Sele&ble for a salable, freed-pitch font only. 3. Selectable for a salable, proportional-pitch font only. 4. pApER=A4Mth HP 33449M printers as shipped (220 V). 5. symbol set is in the Configuration Menu for the HP 33440. 3-15, Configuration Menu Settings The Configuration Menu for both printers includes the following items: ■ Symbol Set (HP 33440 only). ■ Auto Continue. w Interface Parameters. The HP 33449 Cotilguration Menu includes the following additiond items and omits Symbol Set which is in the Printing Menu: ■ Resolution Enhancement. ■ Page Protection. The Configuration Menu is used to program the printer for communication with a specific computer. To enter the Configuration Menu, press the [=] key until: HP 33440: SYMBOLSET= appears in the display (about 5 seconds). HP 33449: AUTOCONT=appears in the display (about 5 seconds). Table 3-4 (combined HP 33440 and HP 33449 Configuration Menu items) and Table 3-5 (HP 33449 additiond Configuration Menu items) can be used as quick reference guides to Configuration Menu items. They describe menu items used primarily during initial setup and configuration. (The “Printer Displays” column shows the factory default settings.) Table 3-4. HP 33440 and HP 33449 Configuration Menu ItemsQ
; ~ 33440: I/O= SERIAL* step SEW or PARALLEL = ~ 3344g: I/O=PARALLEL* or (or OPTION&)5 Interface SERIAL=RS-232*3 scroU Type (HP 33449 only) through Baud BAUDRATE9=600*3 items Rate XON ROBUSXTON=ON*3 Disposition =Co’nue DTR DTRPOLARITY=HI*4 HI or LO Polarity 1. Symbol Set is in Printing Menu for the HP 33449. 2. An ~terisk (*) following an item indicates that the selection is saved. 3. Only if SER~ is selected. 4. o~y if SERN and W-232 are selected. 5. ody if an optional 1/0 interface is instiled. 3-16, Table 3-5. HP 33449 Additional Configuration Menu Items Item Ptinter Displa~ Pm Choices Press Resolution RET=DAW*l ~:ep DARK ~DI~, m to save Enhancement HGHT or OFF selection, Page PAGEPROTECT=OFF*2 or-scro~ OFF, LTR, LGL, or A4 ~~j to efit, or Protection through items (=J to continue 1. An Aerisk (*) folloting an item indlmtes that the selection is saved. 2. p~e Protitiion is avdable only when optional additionrd memory is instiled. Symbol Sets A symbol set is usually selected during initial printer configuration. If a new default symbol set is selected from the appropriate menu, it will cause the font selection menu item to revert to FONT NUMBER=OT.his is done bemuse the prnnterplaces dl fonts in the selected symbol set at the top of its font list and reassigns font numbers. If, ~er speci~ng a new default symbol set, font Ois not the desired default font a new Print Fonts routine should be performed and a new default font selected from the resulting printout (see Section 3-5 for more information regarding Print Fonts). With ROM-8 selected as the defatit symbol set, the symbol sets in Table 3-6 are arranged in sequence as they are displayed on the HP 33440. The symbol sets in Table 3-7 which follows are arranged in sequence as they are displayed on the HP 33449. Auto Continue When AUTO CONTINUE is set to ON,recoverable errors will take the printer off line and display the message for 10 seconds before the printer will resume printing. When it is-set to OFF,the printer will wait for the (-] key to be pressed before printing will resume. It is recommended that AUTO CONTINUE be set to OFF so that any recoverable error messages show until they are corrected. Note: If your printer is part of a network, remote, or spooling system, AUTOCONT=ONis the recommended setiing. Interface Type The me of serial interface (RS-422 or RS-232) is selected from the Control Panel on the HP 33449. To configure the HP 33440 for RS-422 communications, refer to Section 3-2. Resolution Enhancement (HP 33449 Only) Resolution Enhancement (RET) refines the print quality of characters and graphics by “smooting” the fine gradations along the edge of the printed image. The RET option has four choices: dark, medium, light, and off. The factory default seting is DARK. caution Some optional interface boards from vendors other than Hewlett-Packard are not compatible with Resolution Enhancement. Emmples are the IntelR Visual Edge c!~lf kg and the OP-Tek bserPort and bserPort GrayScale. When using one of these products, set RET=OFF. 3-17, Table 3-6. HP 33440 Symbol Sets in Sequence ON ECW-94 ECW-94 Latin 1J
10U IBM-US PC-8 OF 1S0 25 French llU IBM-DN PC-8 Denmark/Norway 2K 1S0 57 Chinese 2U 1S0 2 Int’1 Ref. Version OD 1S0 60 Danish\Norwegian lE 11S0 4 IUnited Kingdom 1 lD 1S0 61 Norwe~an V2 ] ‘OU ] 1S06IMcn1m1S0 69 French 3s 1S0 10 ~edish 0s 1S0 11 SwedishI OK 11S0 14 I~S MCII I
01 1S0 15 Itiian 4s 1S0 16 Portuguese Table 3-7. HP 33449 Symbol Sets in Sequence 1S0 61 Norwegian V2 1S0 69 French 1S0 84 Portuguese 1S0 85 Spanish lU ]LEG& ILegal OG German *HP German J 2U [1S0 2 IInt’1 Ref. Version I* 1s Spanish HP Spanish lE 1S0 4 United Kingdom 6M VN ~TH Ventura Math Ou 1S0 6 MCH : F 13J VN ~TL Ventura International 3s 11S010 1Swedish I IT w us Ventura US 0s 1S0 11 Swedish 5M PS ~TH PS Math OK 1S0 14 ms Mcn 10J PS TEXT PS Tefi 01 1S0 15 Itiian 8M 4s 1S0 16 Portuguese 15U 2s 1S0 17 Sp=ish 6J lG 1S0 21 German 9U OF 1S0 25 French 7J DESKTOP IDeskTop 1 2K 1S0 57 Chinese Note Changing the Control Panel symbol set affects the order in which fonts are listed on the font printout. It dso affects the Control Panel default font. 3-18, Print Density and Resolution Enhancement The print densi~ adjustment (see Chapter 4, Section 4-9) setting interacts with Resolution Enhancement. For any resolution enhancement level, adjusting the print density may place too much or too Iitie toner at the transition poinfi along gradudly sloping lines. A slight bulging or pinching effect may be seen if tie lines are examined closely. The following drawings illustrate how the line transitions appear with different amounti of toner: Figure 3-3. PrintDensity at Line Transitions 1. Normal line transition. 2. Too much toner; set RETin the Control Panel Configuration Menu to a lighter setting. 3. Too litie tone~ set RETin the Control Panel Configuration Menu to a darker setting. Check the adjustment by examining a self-test printout (see Figure 3-4 for an enlarged portion of the printout). Look at the 33% slice in the pie chart. If light vertid stripes appear (see lefi side), try setting RETto the nefi darker setiing. If dark vertid stripes appear, try setting RETto the next lighter setiing. If the output still has dark vertid stripes (see right side), adjust the print density did to a slightiy lighter setting (a higher number on the print densi~ did) and repeat the adjustment. 33 33 Figure 3-4. Vertical Stripes in the 33% Pie Slice 3-19, Page Protection (HP 33449 Only) For Page Protection to appear as a Configuration Menu option, at least 1 Mbyte of optional memo~ mmt be installed A page’s compIexi@ (rules, vector graphics, or dense text) may exceed the printer’s ability to create an image and keep pace with the engine printing process. If a page is too complex, the page might print in parts or only part of the page might print. In such cases, a 21 PRINT OVERRUNmessage (signifying possible loss of print data) will appear in the display. Page Protection reserves additiond memory for the page image process, Wowing the printer to create the entire page image (in memory) before physidly moving the paper through the printer. This ensures that the entire page will be printed. Page Protection can be set for LTR (letter), A4, or LGLOegd) size pages. Page Protection recotilgures the printer’s memory each time the page protection level is changed. For example, when Page Protection is enabled for letter-sized paper (“LTR’), 1040 ~ytes of memory is reserved for the “image memory,” which is memory dedicated for page-image definition. When Page Protection is disabled (i.e., “OFF”), however, 848 ~ytes is released to user memory and 191 ~ytes is retained for the image memory. Witha1~~e memory board intiled, user memory consists of 720 ~ytes of internal (the memov that comes with the printer) user-available memory and the 1024 ~ytes of added memory- a toti of 1,744 ~ytes. Table 3-8 Mustrates the available memory for various configurations: Table 3-8. Page Protection Memory Configurations (Wth 1 Mbyte of additional memory) sti~ user ,.,M&-o+ Image ‘M.ernory OFF 1,744 Bytes 191 ~ytes LTR/A4 896 ~fies 1,040 ~ytes LGL 702 ~fies 1,284 ~ytes When the (-J key is pressed, 17 MEMORCyONFIGw briefly appear in the display, indicating that the memory is being reconfiWred for (or from) Page Protection. The printer then performs an internal self teat and automatidly returns on line. When dl optional memory is removed from the printer, Page Protection is automatidly set to OFF. Note The printer erases d] dotioaded fonts (including permanent fonts) and dl macros (includlng permanent macros) and any page data when memory isB
Q recotilgured for Page Protection. 3-20, Understanding the Font Printout Font printouti for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 are different although the printout procedure is basidly the same: 1. Take the printer off fine, then briefly press the [PRINT FONTS/TEST) key. 2. The message, 06 FONTPRINTOUTw, ill appear and several pages W be printed. (HP 33449 only thirty seconds may elapse between pages to allow time for the generation of any salable characters.) HP 33440 The HP 33440 printout displays sk columns of information numbered items below refer to Figure 3-5: 1. Font ID is the number the printer uses to select internal fonts, catiridge fonts, or downloadable SORfronts from the Control Panel. (Note: this is not a sofi font ID number used by sotiare.) The letier preceding the font number indicates the lomtion of the font. s = Permanent soft font residing in printer memory. R = Fonts in the right font cartridge. L = Fonts in the lefi font cartridge. I = Internal printer fonts. 2. Name is the name of the typeface (e.g., COURIER). 3. Pitch shows the characters-per-inch of a f~ed pitch font or “PS” for proportionally spaced fen%. 4. Point Size refers to the character’s height (72 points per inch, 28.3 per centimeter). 5. Symbol Set refers to the specific collection of characters and symbols associated with a font (see Table 3-6). 6. Print Sample shows what the font characters look like. 3-21, - PORTRAITFONTS-FONT POINTSYMBOL ID NAME PITCH SIZE SET PRINT S~PLE
- - - - - - ,,p~~NENT1lsOFT FoNTs 7J ~CDEfghlj#$@\l”’{1}-123 f$V~.0mmn7*’%Yd<<<~~fa~? :9:ZDGE ‘s 10 L45 Helv Ps 12 ou ABCDEfghij#$@[\]A’{]}-123 L46 Helv ITALIC Ps 10 OU ABCDEfgh~#$@[\]~’{1}-123 L47 Helv BOLD Ps 10 OU ABCDEfg~#$@[\]A’{1}-123 L48 Helv Ps 10 OU ABCDEfgMj#$@[\]A’{1}-123 L49 Helv Ps 8 OU ABCDHghij#$@fi] A’{1}-123 RIGHT FONT CARTRIDGE INTERNAL FONTS OF ABCDEfghijC$a”q5-. “..”’ 8U ABCDEfghij#$@[\]~’ (1)-123 10U ABCDEfghij#$@[\] -.(l )-123 llU ABCDEfghij#$@[\] ”. (1)-123 ioljj17{1744~+*wla7* IO ON ABCDEfghij#$@[\] A.(l }-123 i$> “n,l>>&fiEE12D06X0fiPAZ& 8U ABCDEfghij#$@[\] A’(l }-123 ghijf$a0g5- ’kU&””123 107 COURIER BOLD BCDEfghij#$@[\] ‘.(I}-123 ~Ol+{17+lIJ4~+fi%# lure* 108 COURIER BOLD llU ABCDEfghij#$@[\] ”.(1}-123 iolii17+17J4LA%Wla~* ON ABCDEfghij#$@[\] -.(l}-123 ;~3 ,q>1,,~tiEEI%Do6x06Baze 110 16.6 a.5 8U ABCDEfghi j~Q[\I”\{l )-123 .AA”GQiLE5eeaeeoA05zAUfiADa 16.6 a.5 OF ..ABCDEfghijE5A”;5 eue 123 16.6 8.5 10U ABCDEfghij=~[\l”.{1)-123 e f61{{74,~4~*~~* 13 LINE_PRINTER 16.6 8.5 llU ABCDEfghij~O[\l-.Cl)-123 ~61{{7~1J4u+~~*Figure 3-5. HP 33440 Font Printout
(ln English only) 3-22 —, HP 33449 The HP 33449 printout displays 11 columns of information in the iodized language. Numbered items below refer to Figure 3-6: 1. Font #is the number the printer uses to select internal fonts, cartridge fonts, or downloadable sofi fronts from the Control Panel. (Note: this is not a soft font ID number used by sotiare.) The letier preceding the font number indicates the location of the font. s = Permanent soft font, residing in printer memory. R = Fonti in the right font cartridge. L = Fonti in the left font cartridge. I = Internal printer fonti. Note For the HP 33440, Font ID is the equivalent of Font # for the HP 33449. 2. Font ID is an ~ number assigned only to permanent soft fonts downloaded from the host system and selected by software. 3. Symbol Set refers to the specific co~ection of characters and symbols associated with a font. Internal and cartridge salable fonts will only be shown in the symbol set selected on the Control Panel. (See Table 3-7). 4. fi/PS indimtes whether the font has fked or proportional spacing (F or P). 5. Pitch (cpi) shows the characters-per-inch of a fried pitch font. (If the font is a salable, fried-spaced font, “Sale” will appear in this column.) 6. Point Size refers to the character’s height (72 points per inch, 28.3 per centimeter). (If the font is a salable, proportional-spaced font, “Sale” will appear in this column.) 7. Style indicates whether the font is upright or itiic. 8. Stroke Weight is a font treatment such as medium, bold, light, or black. 9. Name or ~eface is the name of the typeface. “,‘ 10. Defadt Orient indicates whether the font defaults to either portrait or landscape orientation. (Note that the HP 33449 printer, untike the HP 33440, can rotate fonts to the orientation selected by the sotiare, even if the font is not resident in the printer in that orientation.) Fonts produced from salable typefaces are only listed in the portrait orientation. 11. Print Sample and Esmpe Sequence. Print sample shows what the characters look like. Escape sequence is an actual printer command sequence used to select the designated font. 3-23,Font List
F.., ,0., Sg 1 FiX Pitch POi Ot Style Stroke Maw or Default PPint Samle & # ID /Ps (cPi) size Weight l~~face orimt C..*P Sq.m.e .,,p~~~~~~~oh,~,,, , Sool320 PC-850 P Scale UPright Light Revue Lt p.,t ~cOEfgtijiO I + ~“+l ~ (%$~[]-’ ( I}-123 .Esc.(12uEfghijA~O~fii~f ?6#$@[]-’{l}- 123
Figure 3-8. HP 3344905 SELF TEST Printout
3-28, HP 33440/HP 33W9 CQMBIWD SERVICE MANUAL 04 SELF TEST Holding down the (PRINT FONTS/TEST) key until 04 SELFTESTis displayed (about 5 seconds) will cause a continuous self test to be run using the 05 SEW TEST printout page. The continuous self-test mode is a good way to test the paper path since it only tests the electronics once while continuing to print out the self-test page. Pressing the PRINT FONTS/TEST )) -, or (CONTI NU E/RESET) key terminates the continuous test mode. The numeric portion of the message will flash while the self test is being aborted. Note Bemuse of the complex graphics on the Self-Test page, printing speed for the HP 33449 til be less than the full eight-page-per-minute rated level. Test Print (15 ENGINE TEST) Activating the TEST PRINT switch– accessed by inserting a pen or pencil into the hole on the lower right side of the printer (Figure 3-9) (behind a cover panel on the HP 33449) – causes a page of vertid lines (shown in Figure 3-10) to be printed. While printing, the display will read 15 ENGINETEST.This is an en~ne test only since the Interface PCA is completely bypassed to produce this print. It is useful to verify proper operation of the DC Controller circuitry and all other print engine components (i.e., everything but the Interface/Formatier PCA). Holding down this bution will produce continuous pages until the button is released. Figure 3-9. Selecting the Test Print Switch (HP 33440 shown here) f 1 Figure 3-10. Portion of Test Print Pattern 3-29, 3-7. SERVICE MODE General Service Mode should only be used by service representatives. It etists to allow the page count (which measures the life of the print engine) to be reset in the event the Interface PCA is replaced and to print a test pattern which is useful for print quality analysis. Note For the ~ 33449, Service Mode messages are not lodzed (except for cetin messages, such as 05 SELFTEST,which are used in both user and Service Mode). Using Service Mode To access Service Mode 1. Hold down the (-j, the [CONTINUE/RESET], and the ENTER/RESET MENU keys simultaneously for at least one second while powering on the printer. This interrupts the normal initial non-printing self test. If Service Mode has been properly selected, the display will be blank and dl four LEDs will be illuminated. 2. Press the (CONTINUE/RESET) key once only. Then press the (ENTER/RESET MENU) key. 3. The display will read SERVICEMODE (not iodized) and dl four LEDs on the Control Panel will still be illuminated. ,x ,●— Note Any attendance message, such as 16 TONERLOWw, in override the SERVICEMODE display. However, the printer is .in service mode at this time if the preceding PI steps were performed. w 4. Mthough the procedures are essentially the same, timing for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 differ at this point HP 33440 ~er from 5 to 30 seconds, depending upon instiled memory, 05 SELFTEST will be displayed and dl four lights on the Control Panel will turn off. After about five seconds, 02 WARMINUGPwill be briefly displayed, after which the printer will again display SERVICEMODEand the ready indicator (only) will illuminate. HP 33449 ~er less than one second, 05 SELFTEST(not iodized) will be displayed and dl four lights on the Control Panel will remain lit for up to 60 seconds, depending upon intiled memory, then turn off for about 10 seconds, after which the printer will again display SERVICEMODEand the ready indicator (only) till illuminate. If the self test fails, the printer will display the same error message that it normally would. 5. To exit Service Mode for either printer, press either the (~j or the ~~] key. To return the HP 33440 on line, the [-) key must be pressed again. 3-30, m Self Tests Several self tests mn be performed in Service Mode 1. HP 33449 only Press the (PRINT FONTS/TEST) key h perform the printing portion of the se~ test. 05 SELFTESTis displayed (lodzed for HP 33449) and a self-test printout is produced. 2. For both printers, holding down the (PRINT FONTS/TEST) key until 05 SELFTESTis displayed (about two seconds) causes the formatier to first perform a self test. During the printing portion, 06 PRINTINGTEST(lowed for HP 33449) is displayed and a Service Mode self-test printout is produced. The printer will then again display SERVICEMODE.Figure 3-11 shows a sample of the Service Mode self-test print. 3. The (PRiNT FONTS/TESTj key mn dso be used to run continuous Service Mode se~ testi by holding down the key until 04 SELFTEST(iodized for HP 33449) is displayed. ~er several seconds, the printer will begin continuously printing the Service Mode printout. 4. To abort the self test press the (~) key onc~ this@ return the printer to Service Mode. Several additiond pages maybe printed to clear the buffer, during which time the 04-portion of the message will flash. ■,= 11I11 11=–=1= M;&:%..i2.:a:.%’:f,:*.m,::m gm~ ; ~ 1: ==wf~~.%... 7s.%<< = 1111u 111‘1- 2:63:52:41:34:43:32:2 1:1 ‘- 2:63:52 ■m= 111I1 111E1= ,W~s,$,;3;;Z@,;,;;a<@g: ~~ ■ ❑== 11I11 11=—1==Ei$:x@%%#It$ = 1[101111‘-1 2:63:52:41:34:43:32:2 1:1 = 111111111‘- 2:63:52 ■== 11I11 11ss1~w,%,.,..,.m,~, ,~l::~t..,f>,l,g,;>* ■== 11I11 11~1~’=~:W’#:K::jf$.; = 11m1111‘1-1 2:63:52:41:34:43:32:2 1:1 = 11I1111‘1- 1 2:63:52 ■m= 11I1111S1=1*,MIEimMmgU ■ms 11I1111=1G1wj%;g = 111!1 111–1 - 2:63:5 2:41:34:43:32:21:1 = 1111I 111=1- “:26:3;”; 9== 111111111—–= H~~w;g;,w,:rj*jm,.:*.,a=~ :.:.:.:.::.::v.:kW.z...&. z , g = 1111I 1111s ~ ~~.: :;*:: ‘X“ = 11111 111‘[= 2:63:52:41:34:43:32:2 1:1 = 111191111 ‘- 2:63:5 2 ■=- 111111=1=1w1:.m:.:s..x:..>x.:..m...,m.. u ■m= ; ~ 1; =—==Es..#...:Note The page count is accurate (current) as long as the printer is powered on. When
,8 the printer is switched off, the page count is rounded down to the nearest 10 increment and retained in ~. This means that the page count number may w be off by up to nine pages each time the printer is switched off. 3-32,PREVENTIVEMAINTENANCE
4. PRm~ WmN~CE 4-1. INTRODUCTION .4-3 4-2. LIFE ~ECTANCY OF CONSUMABLES AND REMTED PARTS .4-3 4-3. MNTENANCE CHEC~OINTS .4-4 4-4. CLE~NG THE PRINTER .,.4-5 Genera l .4-5 Transfer Guide .4-5 Transfer Corona Assembly .., .4-6 Registration Assembly . , .4-7 Feed Guide Assembly .4-7 Fusing Assembly .4-8 Fuser Separation Pawls .4-8 Beam-To-Drum Mirror .4-9 Primary Corona .4-1o 4-5. CLEWNG PAPER JAMS .4-11 Paper Pickup Area .4-11 Transfer Guide Area .4-12 Fusing Assembly Area .4-12 4-6. OZONE FILTER REPMCEMENT .4-13 4-7. FUSER CLEANING PAD REPLACEMENT .4-14 4-8. EP-S CARTMDGE HFE AND USE .4-15 Ctidge Life .4-15 “16 TONER LOW’ Message .4-15 4-9. PRINT DENSITY ADJUSTMENT .4-16 4-1, Figures 4-1. Maintenance Checkpoints..4-4 4-2. Cleaing the Transfer Guide..4-5 4-3. Cleaning the Transfer Corona Wire .4-6 4-4. Cleaning the Registration Assembly .4-7 4-5. Cleaning the Feed Guide Assembly .4-7 4-6. Cleaning the Fusing Assembly .4-8 4-7. Cleaning the Beam-to-Drum Mirror .4-9 4-8. Cleaning Brush Lomtion.4-1o 4-9. Cleaning the Primary Corona Wire in the EP-S Cartridge .4-1o 4-10. Paper Pathand Jam Areas .4-11 4-11. Clearing Jams in the Paper Pickup Area.4-11 4-12. Clearing the Transfer Guide Area.4-12 4-13. Clearing the Fusing Assembly Area.4-12 4-14. Ozone Filter Replacement..4-13 4-15. Replating the Cleaning Pad ., 4-14 4-16. Distributing Toner in the EP-S Cartridge .4-15 4-17. Adjusting Print Density .4-16Tables
4-1. Sefice Life of Consumables.4-3 4-2, 4“?. INTRODUCTION Very litie routine operator maintenance is required for HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers. Most maintenance and adjustment procedures are carried out only when the EP-S Cartridge is changed or there is a print quality or paper feed problem. Since the maintainable parts of both printers are similar, the HP 33440 has generally been used for illustration. Note Ml routine maintenance and adjustments are the customer’s responsibility. Most of the following procedures are included for reference only. 4-2. LIFE EXPECTANCY OF CONSUMABLES AND RELATED PARTS The expected service live of consumables and related parts is given in Table 4-1. Nways inspect these components for wear when servicing the printer. The expected-service-life estimates are based on A4 or letter size prints with an average of 5 percent toner coverage at a density dial setting of “7”. The control panel self test printout produces approximately a 12 percent coverage for the HP 33440, 10 percent for the HP 33449. Table 4-1. Service Life of Consumables EP-S Cartridge* 1 Approximately 4000 pages RocMng the cartridge when (application dependent). TONERLOWappears may Open: 6-me. shelf life. prolong catiridge life. Unopened: 2-yr. shelf life. Cleaner Pad* 1 Life of EP-S Cartridge. Included with EP-S Cartridge. 100, OOO** 100,OOO**or anytime the Separation Pad is replaced. Separation PadI1100,OOO**or anfiime Feed Roller Assembly is replaced. 50,000** 100,OOO** *Customer responsibility. **Estimated, see note below. ***HP responsibility on early HP 33440s. — Note The 100,000-page component service life is ONLY AN ESTIMATE. The service life of consumables is directiy related to the type of media used and the type of Pi printing being done. The Fusing Assembly, Feed Roller Assembly, Separation @ Pad, and Transfer Corona Assembly should be inspected for excessive wear and replaced if necessag whenever a printer is being serviced. 4-3, 4“3. MAINTENANCE CHECKPOINTS Principal maintenance checkpoint for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are ~ustrated in Figure 4-1 below. Since the printers are quite similar, the HP 33440 has been used for illustration here. EP.S Catidge ozone Ffi*r, * * 1111 Feed hUer Asembly & SePmtion Pad * II ,...,,.,. , s,,,.,,.. W,y.1111 ,Sm... ..I
Lwer [Sopmpyl Remove acmm”laed debris. De!,vev alcohol G“,de *Rqlace eve~ 100,~ pag~. **Replm evey 50,000 pagw. Figure 4-1. Maintenance Checkpoints caution Do not clean with-or expose rubber rollers or other rubberized parts to-isopropyl alcohol. Do not use ammotia-based cleaning produti or the EP-S Cartfidge drum may be permanently damaged. m,.-* 4-4, 4-4. CLEANING THE PRRNTER General If reduced print quality occurs, clean the inside of the printer by wiping any visible toner away with a damp cloth. Items that are colored green are user-accessible for cleaning. Note Toner is a nontotic substance composed of plastic, iron, and a small amount of pigment. Care should be taken to avoid breathing toner particles. To clean toner from skin and clothing, remove as much toner as possible with a vacuum or dry tissue wipes, then wash the toner from skin or clothing with cold water. Hot water may make toner very difficult to remove. Because toner tends to be degraded by vinyl materials, contact with vinyl should be avoided. There are seven primary areas of the printer which should be kept clean: 1. Transfer Guide. 5. Fusing Assembly. 2. Transfer Corona Assembly. 6. Beam-to-Drum Mirror. 3. Registration Assembly. 7. Primary Corona. 4. Feed Guide Assembly. caution The printer must be turned off prior to cleaning. Transfer Guide Wipe the Transfer Guide (silver strip, see Figure 4-2) clean with a damp cloth (use water only). Figure 4-2. Cleaning the Transfer Guide 4-5, Transfer Corona Assembly To clean the Transfer Corona Assembly 1. Switch the printer OFF and open the Top Cover Assembly. 2. Dip a cotton swab in isopropyl alcohol. Water an be used if isopropyl alcohol is not available. M&e sure the mab is not dripping. 3. Care~y clean the Transfer Corona housing, removing as much toner buildup as possible. 4. With a dean swab and isopropyl alcohol (or water), gentiy wipe the Transfer Corona wire (see Figure 4-3) with the cotton swab until no residue remains. 5. With the brush-end of the green cleaning brush, remove any debris accumulations around the sharp row of static teeth on the output side of the Transfer Corona (see Figure 4-3). Caution Be mreful not to br~ the monofilament tines that cross diagondly above the T~sfer Corona wire. Aso, be carefil not to get alcohol on any rollers or plastic parts. # Figure 4-3. Cleaning the Transfer Corona Wire 4-6, Registration Assembly Remove any debris from the Re~stration Assembly’s cover. Llfi the cover of the Re#stration Assembly (see Fi~re 4-4) and wipe off any paper dust underneath the assembly cover with a damp cloth (use water only). Figure 4-4. Cleaning the Registration Assembly Feed Guide Assembly Wipe the Feed Guide Assembly (see Fi~re 4-5) with a dampened cloth (use water only). Figure 4-5. Cleaning the Feed Guide Assembly 4-7, Fusing Assembly a Periodidly cleaning the Fuser Separation Pawls (claws) (see Figure 4-6) will help prolong the life of the printer’s Fusing Assembly. warning The fusing area gets HOT. Also, be careful not to get toner on clothing; it may stain. Separation Pawls Figure 4-6. Cleaning the Fusing Assembly Fuser Separation Pawls To clean the pawls: 1. Turn the printer OFF. 2. Fully open the Top Cover Assembly. 3. Push the rear section of the Fusing Assembly (the section toward the rear of the printer) fully open. You will be able to see the four black plastic Fuser Separation Pawls (claws) along the lower edge of the section just pushed back (see Figure 4-6). 4. Clean the tip of each pawl with a cloth dampened with water. Avoid contact with the main portion of the Fusing Assembly. 4-8, Beam-To-Drum Mirror The Beam-to-Drum Mirror can be easily damaged. Normally, it can be cleaned by carefully blowing any debris off its surface. caution Newer assemblies contain a first surface mirror (i.e., a mirror with its reflective coating on the top, or first, surface) which can be easily damaged. Do not clean the mirror unless absolutely necessa~ (e.g., fingerprints, water condensation, etc.). If additiond cleaning is required, proceed as follows: 1. Access the Beam-to-Drum Mirror, lomted under the Top Cover Assembly, by moving the Mirror Shutter Assembly to the right (freeing the lever) and swinging it up and out of the way (see Figure 4-7, dso “Mirror Shutier Assembly” in Chapter 6). 2. Carefnlly clean the mirror with a clean, lint-free wipe, dampened only with a cleaning fluid approved for a camera lens. Figure 4-7. Cleaning the Beam-to-Drum Mirror 4-9, Primary Corona Bemuse the Primary Corona is deficate, it shotid ody be cleaned when print quality begins to degrade (~idly, dark vertid streaks on the page). Caution Clean the Primary Corona wire using only the pad-end of the cleaning brush provided. Using a cotton swab or other cleaning tool may break the wire, requiring replacement of the EP-S Cartridge. @ 1. Turn the printer OFF. 2. Open the printer’s Top Cover Assembly. 3. Remove the EP-S Cartridge from the printer. 4. Lift out the cleaning bwsh, as shown in Figure 4-8. 5. Carefully insert the felt-tipped end of the brush in one end of the EP-S cartridge slot, as shown in Figure 4-9. (The brush will fit only one way. Look care~y at Figure 4-9 for the correct way to position the cleaning brush.) 6. Slide the brush back and forth a few times to dean the Primary Corona wire. 7. Return the brush and the EP-S Cartridge to the printer. Figure 4-8. Cleaning Brush Location Figure 4-9. Cleaning the Primary Corona Wire in the EP-S Cartridge 4-1o, 4“5. CLEARING PAPER JAMS If 13 PAPER JAM appears in the display window, open the printer’s Top Cover Assembly and look for jammed paper. Paper jams occur mainly in the following three areas: ■ Paper Pickup area. ■ Transfer Guide area. H Fusing Assembly area. The three areas in the printer paper path mentioned above are illustrated in Fignre 4-10 below: Figure 4-10. Paper Path and Jam Areas Paper Pickup Area Open the Registration Assembly cover and, if necessary, take out the paper tray to remove jammed paper (see Figure 4-11). Caution Do not atiempt to ptil paper that has jammed back through to the front of the 1 printer. This W result in damage to the Registration Assembly.$.t,i, # Figure 4-1 %. Clearing Jams in the Paper Pickup Area. 4-11, ,- Transfer Guide Area Open the Registration Assembly cover (Transfer Guide Lo&) and remove jammed paper as shown in Figure 4-12. Figure 4-?2. Clearing the Transfer Guide Area. Fusing Assembly Area Open the rear door of the Fusing Assembly and remove the jammed paper (see Figure 4-13). Pull a the sheet back out of the fuser (as shown) to prevent contamination from unfised toner. Figure 4-13. C!earing the Fusing Assembly Area. 4-12, 4-6. OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT Ozone is a colorless gas generated by dl kser printers and photocopiers. It maybe perceived as pungent to those sensitive to its odor. The Ozone Filter, a customer-replaceable item, removes this odor. The fflter should be replaced every 50,000 pages. If the printer is being operated in a confined environment, it may need to be replaced more ofien. Visual inspection will not show that a filter is dim, page count is the only reliable indlmtor on which to base a decision to change a filter. On older HP 33440 printers, it maybe necessary to remove the Ozone Filter Mount to change the filter. Until the printer is updated, it is HP’s responsibility to change the Ozone Filter. On these models, the Ozone Ffiter Mount can be upgraded to allow the filter to be changed without removing the mount. Refer to Service Note 33440A-7 and to Chapter 6, Section 6-3. Conditions that may generate ozone complaints are: ■ Multiple laser printers and/or copiers in a confined area. ■ Extremely low relative humidity. ■ Poor room ventilation. ■ Printer exhaust port directed toward the face of personnel. ■ Ozone Filter in poor condition (i.e., over 50,000 page count). ■ Long, continuous printing combined with any of the above. Examine the printer’s environment to determine if any of the preceding conditions exist. It may be necessary for the customer to take corrective action to ensure the printer’s environment is free of conditions that may generate an ozone complaint. To replace a user-replaceable filter: 1. The Ozone Filter is located in the housing on the inner right side of the printer (see Figure 4-14). 2. Switch printer OFF and open the Top Cover Assembly. 3. Slide the filter out and replace it with a new filter. 4-13, 4-7. FUSER CLEANING PAD REPLACEMENT To replace the Fuser Cleaning Pad 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly. 2. Open the Fusing Assembly top cover (green felt cover). 3. Remove etisting cleaning pad (see WARNING below). 4. Use the felt end of the new cleaning pad to wipe the Fusing Assembly roller. 5. Discard the felt end of the cleaning pad and insert the new cleaning pad. 6. Lower the Fusing Assembly cover (it does not close tightiy). 7. Close the printer’s top cover and turn the printer ON. — Warning The Fusing Roller gets HOT. Be sure to hold the Cleaning Pad by the green tabs as shown in Figure 4-15. @ Figure 4-f5. Replacing the Cleaning Pad 4-14, 4-8. EP-S CARTRIDGE LIFE AND USE Cartridge Life The electrophotographlc (EP-S) cartridge is a dean and convenient means of supplying the consumable items needed in the printing process. When using either the HP 33440 or HP 33449 printer for typid word processing applications, an EP-S Cartridge will print approximately 4000 pages. H average page coverage is fight (a typid page of teti has a great ded of ‘White space”), the EP-S Cartridge should last longer. If the application requires a denser page coverage (graphics and forms, for emple), then the EP-S Cartridge will not last as long. The fife of an EP-S Cartridge mn be emended by operating the printer with the print densi~ adjustment did set on a higher number (for lighter prints). See Adjusting Print Density on the following page. Mso, see Chapter 2, Section 2-3, for EP-S Cartridge storage data. Do NOT atiempt to refill a used cartridge. Damage to the printer can result. “16 TONER LOW” Message The 16 TONER LOW message indimtes that the amount of toner in the EP-S Cafidge is getting low, White stre~s will soon appear on printouts. For mtimum usable Efe, remove the EP-S Cartridge and rotate around its long tis (see Figure 4-16) to distribute the remaining toner . Mthough the 16 TONER LOWwarning may stil be displayed, the fadeout should clear up allowing up to 100 more pages to be printed. If the fadeout condition persists, the EP-S Cartridge must be replaced. Figure 4-16. Distributing Toner in the EP-S Cartridge 4-15, 4-9. PRINT DENSITY ADJUSTMENT Print density refers to the rektive darkness of the print on the paper. Dense print appears very black tith a stightiy kauier look. Less dense print looks lighter, and sohd-filled areas may not be completely black. When print densiv’is set at a low number, tiner is used at a faster rate, reducing the Efe of the EP-S Cartridge. Printing with the print density set to a higher number is a good way to conserve toner when darker print is not necessary. To adjust print densi~: 1. Open the printer’s Top Cover Assembly. 2. Use the numbered green did located at the left side toward the front of the printer (see Figure 4-17) to adjust densi~. “l” is the darkest setting, “9” is the tightest. An initial setting of “W’ is recommended. 3. Fidy close the printer’s Top Cover Assembly. Note When using h-tier paper and envelopes, the print densi~ did may need to be set B to a lower (darker) setting b minimize backgound. Figure 4-17. Adjusting Print Density — The Resolution Enhancement feature of the HP 33449 and the densi~ adjustment affeet each other. See Chapter 3, Section 3-4, for proper adjustment procedures. 4-16 -—, 5. mNcTIoNfi OWRWEW 5-1. INTRODUCTION .5-3 5-2. IMAGE FOWTION SYSTEM.5-4 Overview .5-4 Photosensitive Drum .5-5 Drum Sensitivity .5-5 CLEANING: Stage One...5-6 CONDITIONING: Stage Two...5-7 ~ITING: Stige Three .5-8 DEVELOPING: Stage Four...5-1o TRANSFER Stage Five .5-11 FUSING: Stage Sk .5-12 5-3. PAPER PIcKuP/FEEDsYsTEM .5-13 Paper Path .5-13 Manual Feed .5-14 Paper Jam Sensing, .5-14 Main Drive .5-15 5-4. MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM.5-16 5-5. INTERFACE SYSTEM .5-17 Genera l .5-17 Descriptions of Blocks inthe HP334401nterface PCA Diagram .5-17 CPU(Centrd Processing Unit)..5-17 ROM(Read-Only Memory) .5-17 NVRAM (Non-Volatile Wndom Access Memory) .5-17 SRAM(Stitic Random Access Memory) .5-17 Address Controller .5-18 DRAM (Dynamic Wndom Access Memory) ., .5-18 Bit Shifier .5-18 Timing Controller .5-18 I/O Controller .5-19 Video Interface .5-19 Font Cartridge Interface .5-19 5-1, Descriptions of Blocks in the W 33449 Formatter PCA Diagram .5-19 Genera l .5-19 ASIC (Applimtion Specific Integrated Chip) .5-20 CPU(Centrd Processing Unit).5-20 EPROM/ROM (Erasable ProgramabIe Read Only Memory/Read Only Memory) 5-20 NVRAM(Non-VolatiIe RAM)..,.5-20 DW (Dynamic Random Access Memory) .5-20 Font Cartridge Interface .5-20 5-6. PO~RDISTRIBUTION .5-21Figures
5-1. Diagram of Functional Blocks for ~ 33440 and W 33449 Printers .5-3 5-2. Diagram of EP-S Cartridge Mustrating Image Formation System .5-4 5-3. Photosensitive Drum .5-5 5-4. Drum Cleaning Stition .5-6 5-5. Erase hpEffeti .,..5-6 5-6. Primary Corona Assembly ..,.5-7 5-7. Rotating Smnner Mirror (Top view) .5-9 5-8. Drum Signals .5-9 5-9. Developing an Image .5-1o 5-10. Transfer of Toner Image .5-11 5-11. Paper Separation .5-11 5-12. Fusing Prowss .5-12 5-13. Paper Pickup/Feed System .5-13 5-14. Paper Reaching the &giatration Rollers .5-14 5-15. Main Drive Syatem ., .5-15 5-16. DC Controller Block Diagram .5-16 5-17. ~ 33440 Interface PCA Block Diagram .5-18 5-18. ~ 33449 Formatter Block Diagram .5-19 5-19. DC Power Distribution .5-21Tables
5-1. Drum Sensitivity Tab Settings .5-5 5-2, 5“f.INTRODUCTIONThis fnnctiond overview of the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers is designed to provide the service
representative with a general understanding of the processes which occur during printing. The diagram below (Fi~re 5-1) groups the four basic functional blocks discussed in this chapte~ ■ Section 5-2: Image Formation System.H Section 5-3: Paper Pickup/Feed System.
■ Section 5-4: Machine Control System (DC Controller PCA). ■ Section 5-5: Interface System. ■ Section 5-6: Power Distribution.For additiond details about how the printers function in various operational situations, refer also
to Chapter 7, “Troubleshooting.” To external device (host computer, etc) j ~————— ——— ———— ———t —————— __ISYSTEM INTERFACE Interface PCBI11; l— 1 , I Wdeo controller PCS 1! IllL1L–—_—–––––––_ –––– —_q_j Face up trav ~––/–––– ————— -———————— 1 ~_————— _L—–_— —–– _ PICK-UP/FEED CONTROL SYSTEM 1 [~ DeliverV SYSTEM ;/ / rollers 1- 1 h DC controller PCB 1/ Face down trav II 1/ ~————— ————————— J —— _— ——— ——— _AJ1/ ~/ ~—— —— _ ij–––_;~L–––– _—— _ ——— 1 IMAGE FORMATION / SYSTEM II
:t~I !! Mirror ~- ‘4- Smnning mirrortII————-—
1———I ——J —— Transfer ———— —————— ——————— ———— and 1 separation ~~ unit u— d u) Cassette I ~ Fixing assemblv I ———— —————————— ——— ———— ——— ——— —————— —— J Figure 5-1. Diagram of Functional Blocks for HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printers 5-3, ,.- 5=2sIMAGEFORMATIONSYSTEM mOverview
bser printing requires the interaction of several different areas of technolo~ (mechanid, electronics, optics, electrophotographics, etc.) which must be coordinated to produce a printed page. The first in the sequence of processes, image formation, centers around the photosensitive drum contained in the Electrophotographic (EP-S) Cartridge and consisti of four progressive stages ■ Cleaning. w Conditioning. I Writing. ■ Developing. MO additiond stages, performed outside the EP-S Cartridge, are: ■ Transferring. m Fusing. Most image formation system component which undergo wear or degradation (consumable components) are conveniently assembled in the replaceable EP-S Cartridge. Because this makes maintenance essentially an operator’s task, it ehminates the need for a service dl when these pa~ must be replaced. The EP-S Cartridge contains the photosensitive drum, Primary Corona, developing station, toner cavity, and cl~ning station. A cross-section of the EP-S Cartridge deting the image formation system and its relationship to other printer components is illustrated in Figure 5-2. @CONDITIONING Mir’o’ WR!T!NG
Primary Corona Wre Laaer Beam1 Primary tirona GrU Eraae Lamps ,.,r—-l.-l \ .-. /“’ \ .-— .Blade CLEANING ~ 1“ : DEVELOPING : ●J
Developing Cylinder 1, ;;:;”, ,,/”t k~ Photo- Sensitive ,, / Cartridga Fusing Roller Cleaner Drum \ 7FUSING
‘~.._ Upper Fusing Roller ..-K+’~-upRo”er Registration Rollers IuTRANSFERRING
f ‘\ Static:Charge Tranafar Corona Eliminator b. ~ -b Lower Fusing Roller Feed Guide Assembly Figure 5-2. Diagram of EP-S Cartridge Illustrating Image Formation System 5-4, Photosensitive Drum The photosensitive drum-the core of the image formation system-has special propetiies which allow an image to be formed on its surface and then transferred to paper. The drum is an efiruded aluminum cylinder which is coated with a non-toxic layer of organic photoconductive material (OPC). The aluminum base of the drum is electridly connected to ground. The OPC material has propetiies similar to a photodiode. It becomes electridly conductive (in one direction only) when exposed to light. Negative charges deposited on the surface of the drum conduct to the aluminum (zero potential) base of the drum when exposed to light. Areas of the drum not exposed to fight remain nonconductive and retain the initial charge. caution Do not expose the drum to direct sunlight or any other bright tight source; permanent damage to the drum could occur. [~ u Drum Sensitivity Because dl drums cannot be manufactured to the exact same sensitivity levels, they are tested at the factory and given a rating of high, medium, or low sensitivi~ (see Table 5-l). Depending on this rating, tibs are placed on the mrtridge which enable printer micro~tches which, in turn, control bser power output to adjust for the drum’s sensitivi~ level. These microswitches dso indicate whether or not the EP-S Cartridge is instiled. Table 5-1. Drum Sensitivity Tab Settings -. D= Sensitivity. Csms 1 CSENS 2 HighLLMediumLHLowHLCartridge not InstiledHHIL = Switch Activated I High-Voltage Power Supply Figure 5-3. Photosensitive Drum 5-5, / -. CLEANING: Stage One m During the first stage of the image formation process, the drum’s sufice is prepared to hold an image through a physid and electrid cleaning process. During printing, the drum is constantly rotating, mting several complete rotitions per printed page. Before forming the image for a given section of print, lefiover toner from the previous rotation of the drum must be removed. This is accomplished by a rubber cleaning blade which scrapes toner off the drum and into a debris cavity. A sweeper blade in the debris cavi~ rotates, weeping toner away from the area near the drum (see Figure 5-4). The drum is electrostatidly cleaned by the Erase bmus (see Figure 5-5). These five small lamps, lomted in the hinged Top Cover Assembly, Muminate the drum’s photosensitive material to neutdlze any electrid charges which may have previously been on the drum. The illumination of these lamps is controlled by the Machine Control System (DC Contro~er PCA). Cleaning bladeI
Sweeping Sweeper strip Figure 5-4. Drum Cleaning Station -/y$ &~,.. Photosensitive ,.. Layer . ..: Lamps Red .1 .. Filter .:: !:. ... 1 Aluminum.“.. Base Figure 5-5. Erase Lamp Effect 5-6 — —, CONDITIONING: Stage Two Mer the drum has been physidly and electridly cleaned, it must be conditioned. The conditioning process consists of the appliwtion of a uniform negative charge on the surface of the drum by the Primary Corona Assembly (see Figure 5-6) located inside the EP-S Cartridge. This – 6 W charge, applied to the corona wire by the High Voltage Power Supply Assembly, creates a corona eflect. This means that the air surrounding the wire is ionized and no longer acts as an insulator. Negative charges from the wire migrate to the surface of the drum. The Primary Corona grid (see Figure 5-6), positioned between the corona wire and the drum, reWlates the voltige applied to the drum’s surface, so that a uniform – 600 V charge is deposited. The corona grid is connected to a varistor in the High Voltage Power Supply Assembly which bleeds off any e~ra current which would raise the surface voltage above the desired level. Primary Corona Primary Grid Figure 5-6. Primary Corona Assembly 5-7, WRITING: Stage Three After rotating past the conditioning station, the drum has a uniform –600 V potential on its surface. At the writing station, a laser beam is used to discharge this potential in selected areas by focusing laser fight on selected portions of the photoconductive drum. This creates what is known as an electro~tic image. This image is later developed into a visible image, The following is an explanation of how laser light is controlled to acMeve the electrostatic image described above. Laser light is produced by a sm~ laser diode which is turned on and off by suppling or denying power. The fixed focus beam of the laser diode is directed onto a six-faced rotating polygon mirror (see Figure 5-7). As the mirror rotates, the beam reflected off the mirror sweeps in an arcing fashion. Through a set of mirrors and lenses, the swept beam is brought into focus to describe a horizonti line on the photosensitive drum. The beam reaches the drum through an opening in the top of the EP-S Cartridge. Because the beam is sweeping? the entire len@h of the drum can be covered by the beam; similarly, because the drum is rotating, the entire circumference can be covered. This sweeping of the drum and modulation of the beam allows exposure of dl desired surfaces on the drum (see Figure 5-8). This is similar to how the electron beam in a television set scans to form a video image on the screen. The speed of the Scanner Motor (which rotates the polygonal mirror) and the speed of the main motor (which rotites the drum) are synchronized so that each successive sweep of the beam is offset on the surface of the drum by 1/300 of an inch. The beam can aso be turned on and off at such a rate as to place an intermittent series of dots of light every 1/300 of an inch in the horizonti direction. Thls is how the printer achieves its 300 x 300-doti-per-square-inch resolution. ,’ (Note that one aspect of the HP 33449’s Resolution EnhancementTM feature Wows for more ● defined dot placement in the horizonti direction.) The Scanner Motor is controlled by the SCNCONT line from the DC Controller. This voltage level varies depending on the Scanner Motor speed feedback signals FG+ and FG– (see Figure 5-15 also). Before the beam reaches the drum at the beginning of each sweep, it is reflected off a smd mirror into an optid fiber cable. This momenti~ pulse of fight is sent down the optid fiber to the DC Controller PCA where it is converted to an electrid signal which, in turn, is used to synchronize the output of data for one sweep (smn line). This pulse– ~led the Beam Detect pulse– is dso used to diagnose problems with the laser or scanner motor. (See Figure 5-8.) After passing the writing stition, the drum’s surface has an invisible electrostatic latent image. The portions of the d~m not exposed to the laser are still at the –600 V potential (placed there by the Primary Corona) while those portions exposed to light have been discharged to approximately – 100 V. Note Because the HP 33440 and ~ 33449 printers are class I laser products, they are ,8 safe for office or dati processing use. The laser used in the pfinter is a solid state, b infrared, class In laser. & warning Although the infrared laser beam is invisible, eye damage may result if direct or indirect (reflected) eye contact with the laser beam should occur. Heed all CAUTIONS and WARNINGS when woking on the printer with covers removed or with the laser unit itself. ,- . ● 5-8, Direction of scan / - - / , / /‘.4, /\ /\ / Laser beam &/K Scanning mirror To external devicer1Interface PCA —— =D VDO VSTNC t + \ DC controller a BD 1 PO LDRV SCNCONT I fiber —k -1OOV CHARGE WHERE LASERSTRIKES
-600V CHARGE WHERE LASER DOES NOT STRIKE, DEVELOPING: Stage Four At the developing stition, the invisible electrostatic image is developed into a visible image on the drum when toner from a developer cylinder is transferred to discharged areas on the drum. The developer consists of a rotating metilic cyfinder, a freed magnet that runs the len~h of the cylinder, a toner mvity, and a toner-brush-height-control blade. The toner in the toner cavity is a powde~ substince made of black plastic resin bound to iron particles. The iron in the toner muses it to be atiracted to the magnet inside the cylinder. As the cylinder rotates, the bmsh-height-control blade hmits the amount of toner on the cytinder. The plastic toner particles acquire a negative surface charge by rubbing against the cylinder which is connected to a negative DC supply (see Figure 5-9). This electrostatic charge causes the toner particles to be attracted to the areas of the drum which have been exposed to laser light and repe~ed from the areas not exposed (see Figure 5-9). An AC potential is dso applied to the developer cytinder to farther assist toner patiicles to overcome the attraction of the magnet and to pull toner back to the cylinder from unexposed areas, thus improving densi@ and contrast. The DC bias of the developer cylinder wn be user-adjusted with the Print Densi@ control. This changes the attractive force between toner and drum, pulling more or less toner to the drum...:.:,... ,..., Blade “a Developing cylinder surface potent ial K \ E :. ‘“””.-.”.”” +V Drum surface potential 2 :..u +::::: Developing cylinder ‘* – (ex posed area)o ./ -Y:]-::.+.-..’- n }.100 - - -.—— ..- _ DC bias gI}:!..:.: ,..+ 0 % AC bias-600 - - -— IA (1600 Vp-P)-v \::::~face n .:. C Time (t) _ (unexpo=d area) 9 .#lDCbas~~ ~ ~ Figure 5-9. Developing an image — Note The charges making up the latent image shown in Figure 5-9 are negative but they are shown as positive in the illustration because they are less negative than ●i the charges on the toner. w— 5-10, ( HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL TRANSFER: Stage Five At the transfer station, the tiner image on the drum is transferred to the paper. A corona assembly is positioned behind the paper so that the paper, which is traveling at the same speed the drum’s surface is rotating, contati the drum. This corona produces positive charges which collect on the back of the paper. Because the positive charges on the paper are stronger, they pull the negatively charged toner particles off the drum (see Figure 5-10). As the paper and drum continue to advance, the small radius of the drum and the stiffness of the paper cause the paper to natutily peel away from the drum (see Figure 5-11). Separation is dso assisted by a high negative vol~e being apptied to a row of sharp meti teeth-the Stitic Charge Eliminator. This Static Charge Eliminator weakens the attractive forces between the negatively charged drum surface and positively charged paper. Without this assistance, thin papers could conceivably wrap around the drum. From the transfer station, the paper moves to the fusing station and the drum rotates back to the cleaning station to prepare it to receive the nefi section of print. Figure 5-10. Transfer of Toner Image Figure 5-11. Paper Separation 5-11, FUSING: Stage Six Untfl the paper reaches the fusing station, the toner is held on the paper ody by gravi@ and weak electrostatic forces. At the fusing station, toner is malted and forced into the paper by heat and pressure to produce a permanent image. The fusing station (see Figure 5-12) consisk of an upper non-stick ro~er that is hated from the inside by a high intensity quartz lamp and a lower sofi ro~er that Wows pressure to be apptied over a large contact area between the paper and the upper fusing ro~er. At this point the toner is melted and squeezed into the paper fibers. To keep the toner or paper from sticking to the Fusing RoUer, the roller is covered with a non-stick, Teflon-@e resin. A cleaning pad, which is in contact with the Fusing Ro~er, appties a thin coat of sificone ofl b the surface of the roller to dso help prevent sticking. The cleaner pad dso serves to wipe off any toner or debris that is transferred to the roller. The Fusing RoUer temperature is monitored by the Machine Control System via a thermistor. The Machine Control System maintins a temperature of 165° C (330° F) during standby mode and 180° C (355° F) during printing. A thermoprotector switih is dso located in the Fusing Assembly, adjacent to the thermistor. The thermoprotector shuti down (opens the power circuit b the fuser bulb) when the temperature is in ~cess of 210° C (410° F). If the fising system is shut down by overheating, an ERROR50 is displayed. E this occurs, the printer mu~ be powered off and the thermoprotector replaced. The printer mum remain powered off for at least seven to ten minutes or the ERROR50 condition will remain. Fused Toner \ ,Fusing roller cleaning pad \ area Pressure roller Figure 5-12= Fusing Process 5-12,Paper Path
The paper pickup and feed system is responsible for picking paper from the input paper tray, delivering it to the image formation system at precisely the right time, feeding it to the fusing station, and delivering it to the output tray. Figure 5-13 illustrates the ~ 33440~ 33449 paper path. The -sette-feed paper path begins when the Machine Control Sys@m (DC Controller PCA), &er receiving a print command, starts the Main Drive Motor. Approximately NO seconds later, the Paper Pickup Solenoid is enabled md the Paper Pickup Ro~er makes one rotation and feeds paper to the ReQstration RoUers. Since the Registration Rollers are not turning at this time, the front edge of the paper bows (see Figure 5-14). vMl Main motor I PaWr control PCA II I
SL301 roller P,ck.”p ,oller Feed Gui;e Assembly PS331 PS301 : Paper sensor (Pwr deliveq sen@r) PS302: Manual paper feed sensor Figure 5-f13. Paper Pickup/Feed system 5-13, The registration rollers align the leading edge of the paper with the leadlng edge of the image on the photosensitive drum. When the dlgnment is correct the Registration Clutch Solenoid is activated and the rollers turn and advance the paper toward the photosensitive drum. After the print image has been transferred to the paper at the transfer station, the paper is fed into the Fusing Assembly by the Registration and Feed Rollers. Registration Rollers Paper (Bowed) Pick-up Roller Transfer Coronaoo\ 0 ~o o ● UT-” Separation Pad PAPER TRAY Figure 5-14. Paper Reaching the Registration Rollers Manual Feed The timing of manual paper feed is identi~ to the timing for ~sette paper feed, except for the following points: 1, A different input paper sensor is used. ■ Cassette paper out senso~ PS301. ■ Manual feed paper sensofi PS302. 2. The initial warmup time for manual feed is longer. It is assumed that manual feed will be used for heavier media such as envelopes and heavier paper. Bemuse these heavier papers will absorb more heat, the extra warmup time allows dl components of the fusing system to reach the 180° C (355° F) temperature before paper movement begins, which is required for proper fusing of toner to these papers. Paper Jam Sensing The Paper Delivery Sensor (PS331) indimtes when paper reaches and clears the fusing station. PS331 detects a paper jam in any of the fo~owing conditions: ■ Paper does not r~ch the delivery sensor within the required time (delivery delay jam). ■ Paper does not cl-r the delivery sensor within the required time (delivery jam). ■ Paper is present at the delivery sensor when power is switched ON (paper was left inside the printer and the fuser cooled-ofi, if the fuser is hot it will eject the paper). 5-14,Main Drive
The Mtin Motor (Ml) and Scanner Motir (M3) provide the mechanid drives necessary for printing. The Main Motor is controlled via a driver by commands output from the DC Controller. The Main Motor, via gear trains, drives the folloting s Pickup Roller. ■ Registration Assembly. ■ Drum (tithln EP-S Cartridge). ■ Feed Rollers. ■ Fusing Assembly. N Detivery Rollers. L1nIIAindicalcs mecl]anical linkage indicates enable lines ——Ill
IIISCANNER DRIVE ,Ommand (SCNCONT) J IIIJFG + FG- Scann,”g mfrror Figure 5-15. Main Drive System 5-15, — 5H4.MACHINECONTROL SYSTEM The DC Contro~er PCA-the machine control system-is responsible for coordinating dl activities involved in the printing process. It drives the laser beam, coordinating dot patiern (video) data from the Interface/Formatier PCA tith paper size, drum sensitivity, and laser beam motion information. The machine control system dso controls and monitors paper motion, the high-voltage system, fuser temperature, erase lamps, and W motors. It dso shares machine status information tith the Interface/Formatter PCA so that proper diagnostic messages are displayed on the Control Panel (see Figure 5-16). A fist of the signals monitored or contro~ed by the DC Controller PCA is in Chap&r 7, Section 7-7. In summary, the folloting items are controlled by the machine control system: ■ Paper motion. ■ Paper size and availabilim. ■ Laser dfive. ■ High-voltage system. ■ Erase Lamps. ■ Fuser temperature. ■ Timing. ■ Smnner and M~n Motor drive. ■ Machine s~tus. ■ +24 V operation. mm nDcocntrollerPCAFomatterlInterfacePCAExternald-iceI II I -
Powr switih 1 Ac we,dole Figure 5-%6. DC controller Block Diagram 5-16 ..—, 5-5. BNTERFACEsYsTEb4 General For both the HP 33440 (“Interface PCX’) and HP 33449 (“Formatter PC#’), the Interface/Formatter PCA is responsible for the following Communicating with the host system, either through the standard serial or parallel ports or through the optional 1/0 interface, if instiled. Monitoring operator interface via the printer’s Control Panel and displaying printer status information to the operator. Communicating with the print engine (DC Controller PCA). Storing font information. Storing configuration information. Manipulating incoming data, such as conversion of ASCH character dati into a binary page image that the print engine may use for creating a laser image on the photoconductive drum. In addition, for the HP 33449 only, the Formatier PCA contains circuitry for Resolution EnhancementTM capable of modulating the DC Controller PCA’S laser drive circuitry to produce “smoothe&’ black-to-white boundaries. Optional mrtridges may dso be ins~ed in connectors on the Interface/Formatter PCA to provide additiond fonts for text printing or to overlay portions of machine code (ROM) for printer emulation. Proper communication betieen the Interface/Formatter PCA and the host system is established by conf~ration settings selected at the Control Panel. ASCII code and graphics data from the external device is then processed according to the Control Panel settings or printer commands and is converted to dot data. The dot data is used for modulating the laser. Descriptions of Blocks in the HP 33440 Interface PCA Diagram The HP 33440 Interface PCA Block Diagram is shown in Figure 5-17, CPU (Central Processing Unit) The CPU block contains a 16-bit microprocessor that executes programs stored in ROM to control the operation of the Interface PCA. ROM (Read-Only Memory) Besides storing microprocessor control programs, the ROM stores the dot patierns of internal character sets. Maximum ROM capacity is 1 Mbyte. NVRAM (Non-Volatile Random Access Memory) The ~ is a non-volatile random-access memory with a capacity of 32 bfies. Since its contents are not lost when power is switched off, it is used to store printing setup configuration information entered via the Control Panel and page count information. SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) The 4 ~yte SRAM is used as a stick area in the 16 Mbyte address space accessed by the microprocessor (CPU). 5-17, I Jfi. I P’On’rO’’”rH ‘“ria’in’”fia”’ I lT’mM’’O”wO’’l’l lfi~Mb~’m”)lI L-—. dcontrolP.ml
Figure 5-17. HP 33440 interface PCA Block Diagram ~ddress Controller The address contro~er is implemented as a single gate array circuit (GA1). Jumpers attached to the gate array enable the ROM address region to be changed. The ROM has a mtimum mpaci~ of 1 Mbyte and is used in four separate sedions. The address controller dso outputs address information enabfing amess h data in the Interface PCA’S DRAM (bmum mpaci@ of 512 ~ytes) and e~ansion DW (mAmum mpacity of 4 Mbytes). DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) The DRAM is a dynamic random access memory with a @mum mpaci@ of 512 ~@s. It stores printing and font information input from the efiernd device. It dso stores page formatting information and other parameters required by the internal microprocessor. The microprocessor subdivides the DRAM memory space as required. An e~ansion memory board a be added to increase the DRAM by 1, 2, or 4 Mb~es, depending upon the board purchased. Bit Shifter The bit shifter is used to offset or overlay printed characters, and to shifi data by 1 to 15 bits. fiming Controller The timing controller generates’timing signals needed when data is written to or read from DW. It dso generates DRAM refresh signals. 5-18, 1/0 Controller The 1/0 controller controls the timing of data input from on optional 1/0 PCA to the microprocessor via the parallel interface connector. It dso controls the timing of communication with the DC ControUer. Video Interface The video interface has tio 4-~~e scan buffer memories (SWS) through which printing information converted to dot dati is output continuously to the DC Controller. Font Cartridge Interface “Font mrtridges” are ROM cartridges which hold additiond dot pattern data for different fonts. The font cartridge interface buffers the main bus from the font cartridge connectors.Descriptions of Blocks in the HP 33449 Formatter PCA Diagram General
The Block Diagram of the HP 33449 Formatier PCA is shown in Figure 5-18. An explanation of the blocks within the diagram follows: mm Optional Dptiona[ ~ 68000 Standard Cartridge Cartridge 10MHz n CPU EPRBM J6HR RDM (Right) (Left) Serla(1/0 –L HE, J2I System Bus 1
1 II “ DptionaLV 1/0 Operator EngineInterface Expended Pane( NVRAM J1 1/0 J9 J8 (to DC Contro((er) Figure 5-18. HP 33449 Formatter Block Diagram 5-19, / -’ ASIC (Application Specific Integrated CMp) The AppUcation Specific Integrated Chip (ASIC) is a custom-built integrated chip designed to assist * the main microprocessor in formatting print image information. The ASIC has NO subsystems: the dynamic memory controuer and hardware assist logic, and the video direct memo~ access control. As the dynamic memory contro~er, the ASIC controls most DRAM access. The video direct memo~ portion of the ASIC prepares and provides serialized video dati that is to be used for the print engine’s laser subsystem. CPU (Central Processing Unit) This block contains a 16-bit microprocessor (Motorola 68000) that executes instructions stored in ROM to control operation of the Interface/Formatier PCA. The processor operates from a 9.83 ~Z clock. EPROM/ROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory/Read Only Memory) Besides storing the microprocessor control programs, the ROM (2 ~yte Read Only Memory) stores internal character set patierns. Early units will be shipped with six l-Mbit EPROMs and three 4-~it ROMs. Most units will have four 4-Mbit ROMs instiled. NVRAM (Non-Volatile RAM) The ~ is a non-volatfle random-access memory with a capacity of 1024 bits. Since its contents are not lost when power is switched off, it is used to store printing setup configuration information entered via the Control Panel and page count information. \ DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) ● The DRAM consists of 1024 ~ytes of memo~. The memory can be expanded by increments of 1 or 2 ~ytes up to a toti of 4 Mb@s by instifing accessory memory PCAS. This memory stores printing and font information input from the host system. The DRAM dso serves as a temporary storage area for print image (dot) data prior to the data being sent to the print engine to create an image on the photoconductive drum. Font Cartridge Interface “Font tiridges” are ROM cartridges which hold additiond dot pattern data for different fonts or contain ROM code to overlay internal ROM. The font cartridge interface buffers the main bus from the font cartridge connectors.Note For the HP 33449, functions described for the HP 33440 following the DRAM
& description are included under various headings above. 5-20, 5-6. POWER DISTRIBUTION Power distribution is illustrated in Fi~re 5-19. When the ON/OFF switch is set to ON, AC voltage is supplied to the DC Power Supply Assembly via the AC Power Module. Fuse F1 protecti the DC Power Supply Assembly from current surges. The DC Power Supply provides the following voltages: +5 Vdc and -5 Vdc + 24A Vdc and +24B Vdc The ~SET signal generated by the DC Power Supply Assembly results from any of the following conditions: ■ When the power is initially switched ON. ■ When the +5 Vdc power falls below the required level. ■ When AC power is momentarily interrupted. The +5 Vdc power supply is the first supply enabled and is the only voltage level required to ‘ti~e up” the main microprocessor on the DC Controller PCA. After the processor initializes itself, the processor generates the ~MOTE signal which enables the +24 Vdc regulators. ——— —_ ——_— ~– —————————————— DC POWERmPPLY/MAIN MOTOR DRIVER MODULEF- J50z FILTERING,RKTIFICATlON a REGULATION3 - ... A...5A ~:;:Ry::K;+24”. ,J- ~.. .1 y ~+’4’4 ;iii<:{~~~ I
‘-::w L_– IIZ1’1‘4~6 54327 JJ LLJJIll, 1,,. 76 543, ,] .PTPPRL ; .:”=,. , SEN:SOsERNSI OR Figure 5-19. Dc Power Distribution 5-21 —.,REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Contents
6. R~OV&ANDREPMC_~ 6-1.INTRODUCTION .6-5 General ., .6-5 Tools Required.6-5 Hardware Review .6-6 ComponentLomtionandIdentifimtion ., ., .6-7 6-2. COVERS,PANELS,ANDASSOCWTEDPARTS .6-11 General .6-11 MainBodyCovers : .6-11 HP33440Printer.6-11 HP33449Printer.6-12 HP33449FanGuide(SeridNumberPlate) .6-14 Control Panel ., .6-15 FrontSupportPlate .6-16 Miscellaneous Covers ., , .6-17 Upper and Lower Face-Up (Rear) Output Trapdoors .6-18 Cover Release Button .6-18 6-3. WN BODY COMPONENTS..6-19 OZONE FILTER MOUNT .6-19 UPPER COOLING FAN .6-20 AC PO~RMODULE .6-20 WNMOTOR AND DR~ ASSEMBLIES .6-21 Mtin Motor and Drive Assembly.6-21 57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drum Drive Shti .6-22 Feed Drive Assembly .6-23 DC PO~R SUPPLY ASSEMBLY..6-24 DC Power Supply Fuse .6-24 DC Power Supply Assembly .6-24 PWERCONTROL PCA .6-25 HIGH-VOLTAGE PO~R SUPPLY ASSEMBLY ., .6-26 LASER/SCANNING ASSEMBLY..6-27 FIBER OPTIC CABLE .6-27 COVER LATCH ASSEMBLY .6-28 Genera l, .6-28 Right and Left Cover Latch Hooks .6-28 Right and Lefi Hook Guides .6-28 6-1, - ..—* PAPER PICKUP/INPUT TRAY AREA .6-29 m Genera l .6-29 Paper Sensing Arm .6-29 Laser Shutier Arm .6-30 Feed Roller Assembly .6-31 Manual Feed Guide .6-32 Pressure Assembly .6-33 REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY .6-34 Genera l .6-34 Registration Assembly .6-34 Trantier Corona Roller Grounding Blo& ., .6-35 Separation Pad .6-36 TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY.6-37 TRANSFER AREA RESISTOR REPLACEMENT .6-37 FEED G~DEASSEMBLY .6-38 Feed Guide Grounding Spring Plate .6-39 FUSING ASSE~LY .,...6-40 Fusing Assembly .6-40 Efit Sensor PCA and Thermistor .6-40 Thermoprotector .6-40 Ht Sensor Arm .6-42 6-4. TOP COWR ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS .6-43 Genera l .6-43 ,-—., TOP COVER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL .6-44 m Method One .6-44 Method No .6-45 M~ORSHUTTER ASSEMBLY..6-46 -OR ASSEMBLY .6-47 ERASE WASSEMBLY .6-48 ERASE LAMP CONNECTOR ARM.6-49 DEL~RYAREA .6-49 Fuser Insulating Cover ...6-49 Defivery Assembly .6-50 Defivery Coupler Assembly .6-50 Static Eliminator .6-51 Deflector Pawls (Claws) .6-51 TOP COVER ~GE BRACKET PLATES .6-52 6-5. BOTTOM COWR COMPONENTS .6-53 BOTTOM COVER REMOVAL .6-53 LO~RCOOL~G FAN...6-53 ~TERFACE/FORMATTER PCA .6-54 DC CONTROLLER PCA .6-55 6-2, 6-1. Front View .6-7 6-2. Rear View .6-8 6-3. Interior Viewwith Covers Removed .6-9 6-4. Bottom View .6-9 6-5. Internal Printer Components (HP 33440 shown, but dl internal parts are essentially identid) .6-10 6-6. HP33440Main Body Covers Assembly ., .6-11 6-7. HP33449Main Body Covers...6-13 6-8. HP 33449 Front and Top Cover Panel Replacement .6-13 6-9. Fan Guide Remold .6-14 6-10. Control Panel Remold .6-15 6-11. Front Support Plate .6-16 6-12. Miscellaneous Covers .6-17 6-13. Face-Up Output Trap doors...6-18 6-14. Ozone Filter Mount .6-19 6-15. AC Power Module and Upper Cooling Fan .6-20 6-16. Main Motor and Drive Assembly.6-21 6-17. 57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drum Drive Shti .6-22 6-18. Feed Drive Assembly .6-23 6-19. DC Power Supply Assembly.,..6-24 6-20. Paper Control PCARemovd .6-25 6-21. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly ., .6-26 6-22. Laser/Scanning Assembly .6-27 6-23. Cover Latch Assembly .6-28 6-24. Paper Sensing Arm .6-29 6-25. Laser Shutter Arm .6-30 6-26. Feed Roller Assembly .6-31 6-27. Manual Feed Guide and Pressure Assembly .6-32 6-28. Main Body Block (Inverted) .6-33 6-29. Registration Assembly .6-34 6-30. Transfer Corona Roller Grounding Block .6-35 6-31. Separation Pad .6-36 6-32. Transfer Corona Assembly and Resistor Locations .6-37 6-33. Feed Guide Assembly, .’.6-38 6-34. Grounding Spring Plate .6-39 6-35. Fusing Assembly .6-41 6-36. Fusing Assembly Components .6-41 6-37. Efit Sensor Arm .6-42 6-38. Top Cover Section (HP33440 shown) .6-43 6-39. Top Cover Assembly Removal, Method One .6-44 6-40. Top Cover Assembly Removal, Method Two , . , .6-45 6-41. Shutter, Mirror, and Erase Lamp Assemblies .6-46 6-3, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE 6-42. Mirror Holder .6-47 6-43. Erase bmp Assembly .6-48 6-44. Fuser Insulating Cover Removal .6-49 6-45. Delive~ Assembly Removal .6-50 6-46. Static Eliminator .6-51 6-47. Deflector Pawls (Claws) .6-51 6-48. Hinge Plate Removal .6-52 6-49. Botiom Cover Component .6-53 6-50. Interface/Formatter PCA .6-54 6-51. DC Controller PCA .6-55 6-1. ~es of Fasteners .6-6, 6-1.INTRODUCTION General The service philosophy for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers centers on the modular-level replacement of electro-mechanid assemblies and some associated components as well as the assembly-level replacement of printed circuit assemblies (PCAS). No attempt should be made to identify component failures within these assemblies. The components and the procedures for their removal and replacement are essentially the same for both printers. Unless specifically noted, replacement is the reverse of removal. The procedures in this chapter atiempt to be as thorough as possible regarding the removal and replacement of specific assemblies with minimal removal of other components. Figures in Chapter 8, although not generally referenced, will dso be found to be useful. The service representative should use these procedures as a guide to build familiari~ with the replaceable components of both printers. In referring to the orientation of the various assemblies, the front of the printer is the Control Panel/Paper Tray end. caution Power-off the printer by disconnecting the power cord from the power source and remove the EP-S Cartridge before attempting to disassemble the printer. Also Wow time for the Fusing Assembly components to cool before handling. # Tools Required ■ Magnetic Phillips No. 2 screwdriver with minimum 4-inch shaft. ■ Needle-nose pliers. ■ Small flat-blade screwdriver. ■ Antistatic safeguards. Caution Most PCAS (Printed Circuit Assemblies) contain components that are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge. When you remove, instil, or handle any of these assemblies, be sure to use protective measures including static-free @ workstations and personal grounding devices such as the antistatic wrist strap and grounding mat included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 9300-0933). Follow dl recommended antistatic procedures. 6-5, Hardware Review In the removal procedures which follow in this chapter, numbers inside parentheses - (2) for e-pie - refer to the number of fasteners to be removed. Pay careful attention to the type of screw removed; always replace it in the same location. The folloting table presents usage guidelines for the principal screw types used in the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers. Table 6-1. Types of Fasteners Coated @lack) pan-head Fastening meti or plastic to meti Phlltips machine screw. or meti inserts. Plated (silver-colored) Fastening meti to meti.D#“ pan-head Phillips machine/ screw.
Coated (black) washer-head Fastening plastic or meti to meti Phillips machine screw. or a meti insert when a washer is required. Plated (silver-colored) Fastening meti to meti when washer-head Phtifips a washer is required. Aso used machine screw. as cover screws. e Coated (black) self-tapping Attaching plastic parts to a plastic0) Phillips screw for plastic. casting when self-tapping is .- required. 0 Plated (brass-colored) Phillips Atiching Fusing Assembly cover shoulder screw. and Fuser Insulating Covers.I A. IPlated (silver-colored) IFastening meti to meti where
w Phillips screw with ided ground or voltage contactcaptive star washer. is required. -k Long, brass-wlored screw lLaser/Scanning Assembly.with lock washer and Iflat washer. Caution Use of a pozidrive screwdriver may strip the screw head. The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers use only No. 2 Phillips screws. Use the proper screwdriver when working with these fasteners. To retain RFI certification, all screws must be @ replaced in their original locations and tightening snugly. 6-6, Component Location and Identification Since the location of major external components is similar for both printers, only the HP 33440 is shown here. For component location and identification information using HP 33449 illustrations, see Chapter 1, Section 1-6. Figure 6-f. Front View 1. Control Panel 6. Top Cover Assembly (Hinged) 2. Cartridge Slots 7. Top Cover Release Button 3. Paper Tray (Letter) 8. Paper Tray Slot 4. Manual Feed Guides 9. Expansion Memory Slot(s) (Under cover: 5. Face-Down Output Tray 1 on HP 33440, 2 on HP 33449) 6-7, iIwI11111111~111111~111 i=A‘2 “
Figure 6-2. Rear View 1. Serial and Parallel 1/0 Ports 6. Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray (Open) 2. Optional 1/0 Slot 7. Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray Latch 3. Power Connector (Pressure-release latch on HP 33449) 4. Power Switch 8. Test Print Button (Under cover 5. Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray (Closed) on HP 33449) 6-8, Beam to Drum AC Power Mirror (Behind MOI Ile Shutter) 1 Upper tioiing DC Power Fan Ozone Supply Assembly Filter Mount Registration I Assembly — ~\ I \ ‘~ pport 111II1I 11 Erase imps tit Sensor Feed Guide PCA (Behind J ‘7n~- Assembly tiver) tirona HigWoltage Assembly Power Supply Assembly Figure 6-3. interior View with Covers Removed Interface/FormatterPCA
::p’’er~ Cartridae Slots Lower tio Fan Thermistor Bypass Switch DC Power supply Assembly Figure 6-4. Bottom View 6-9, Figure 6-5. internal Printer Components (HP 33440 shown, but all internal parts are essentially identical) 1. Delivery Assembly 11.Registration Rollers 2. Face-Down Tray 12. Transfer Corona Roller 3. Erase Lamp Assembly 13. Transfer Corona Assembly 4. Primary Corona 14. Photosensitive EP Drum 5. Beam-to-Drum Mirror 15. EP Drum Protective Shield 6. Laser/Saning Assembly 16. Feed Guide Assembly 7. Main Body Covers 17. Lower Main Body 8. Paper Tray 18. Upper Fusing Roller 9. Separation Pad 19. Lower Pressure Roller 10. Feed Roller Assembly 20.Face-Up Output Tray (Closed) 6-10, 6-2C=OVERS,PANELS,AND ASSOCIATEDPARTS General This section describes removal of the Main Body Covers and related parts which allow access to the Main Body component described in Section 6-3. Access to component within the hinged Top Cover Assembly or enmsed within the bottom cover(s) are described later in this section. Main Body Covers warning Remove the EP-S Cartridge and Paper Tray and unplug the printer from its power source before proceeding with any removal procedures. u HP 33440 Printer 1. Remove the power cord from the printer’s receptacle, the paper tray, and any font cartridges. 2. Remove screws (8) securing the Main Body Covers Assembly (see Figure 6-6). 3. Remove the cover by lifting the entire assembly slightiy and rotating the rear of the cover up and toward the Control Panel. Use caution to avoid damage to the Control Panel and cables. 4. Disconnect the Control Panel connector by pushing tie plaAic latches ou~ard, then unseating the connector. 5. The Main Body Covers Assembly maybe further disassembled if required. Figure 6-6. HP 33440 Main Body Covers Assembly 6-11, HP 33449 Printer Itis recommended that the four interlocking cover panels that form the HP 33449 Main Body Covers be removed one at a time as described below (see Figure 6-7). Structural damage can occur if the assembly is removed as a unit. Caution Since the printer’s model and serial number are permanently attached to the Fan Guide portion of the right side cover panel, be sure to put the panel back on the printer from which it was removed. If the right side cover panel must be replaced, @ the Fan Guide panel containing the model and serial number must be transferred to the new right side cover panel. 1. Remove the power cord from the printer’s receptacle. 2. To remove the top cover panel of the Main Body Covers, open the hinged Top Cover Assembly and remove the screws (3) securing the top cover panel, then push in on the right side cover panel at the points shown in Figure 6-7. Rotate the rear of the top cover panel to vertid before lifilng it off. 3. Remove the right side cover panel by removing the screws (2) – one at the rear nefi to the Power Switch and one attaching it to the front cover panel - and Ifilng it vertidly out of the printer. Note that the Fan Guide panel (Power Switch area) which contins the model and serial number plate can be detached from the right side cover panel (see following). 4. Remove the lefi side cover panel by removing the screws (3) – MO attaching it to the base plate and one attaching it to the front cover panel - and lifing it vertidly out of the printer. Be careful to keep the front cover panel from falling. (Hinti Leave the paper tray instiled to hold /z. the front cover panel in place.) 5. Detach the Control Panel Cable connector by pushing the plastic latches outward, then ● unseating the connector. 6. Remove the front cover panel. Use caution to avoid damage to the Control Panel. When replacing the front cover panel, its lower lip must slip under the plastic rim of the base cover panel. The three tibs on the front edge of the top cover panel must fit into the slots on the front cover panel before rotating the top cover panel into place (see Figure 6-8). 6-12, Left Side Panel Sclrew w Frotit Panel Right S;de Panel Figure 6-7. HP 33449 Main Body Covers Top Panel Lip PFrontpane’ Figure 6-8. HP 33449 Front and Top Cover Panel Replacement, HP 33449 Fan Guide (Serial Number Plate) Since the HP 33449’s model and serial number label is affiied to the right cover panel assembly, it W need to be moved to the new cover panel assembly in the event the original panel is damaged. To perform this, refer to Figure 6-9 and proceed as follows 1. Remove the top cover panel (3), then the right cover panel (2) of the Main Body Covers. 2. Remove the black self-tapping screws (2) securing the Fan Guide to the right cover panel. 3. Lifi the Fan Guide slightiy and slide it out of it positioning pin retainers on the right cover panel. Since the Fan Guide is held in position with self-tapping screws, be mreful not to create a new set of threads in the plastic when reinserting the screws. Fan Ngh~ Cover Panel Figure 6-9. Fan Guide Removal 6-14, Control Panel 1. Remove the Main Body Covers. 2. Remove the screws (4) securing the Control Panel to the front cover panel (see Fi~re 6-10). HP 3W9 only When replacing the Control Panel, be sure the keys do not bind on the front cover panel surfaces. ‘crews~ 6-15,Front Support Plate
The Front Support Plate (shown in FiWre 6-11) must be removed before most of the components at the front end of the printer can be accessed. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers. 2. Disconnect the ground wire screw (1) and mble restraint connected to the plate. 3. Remove the screws (6) securing the plate to the printer. 4. Carefully lift the plate slightly and to the right to avoid snagging the Laser/Scanning Assembly wbles. Be pdicularly careful of the fiber optic cable. Be sure to replace the cable restraint as shown in Figure 6-11 to ensure mbles are properly routed. Front support b Plate Screw (O‘n%S..ale) -. ”.. Ground Wre Screw Figure 6-11. Front Support Plate 6-16 —, Miscellaneous Covers Mo protective covers, the Etit Sensor PCA Cover (1) and the Main Motor Drive Gears Cover (l), lomted inside the printers (see Fignre 6-12) can be removed to facilitate access to other components. Note the position of each of these covers and replace them when servicing is complete. — — r1 Drive Gear tiver Figure 6-12. Miscellaneous Covers 6-17, Upper and Lower Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray Doors The upper and lower Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray doors can be removed by depressing their sides and litilng the hinge pins out of their slots (see Figure 6-13). It may be necessary to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to aid in releasing the doors. Use caution: too much pressure may cause damage. Screwdriver Figure 6-13. Face-Up Output Tray Doors Cover Release Button The Top Cover Assembly Release Button, amched to the Main Body Covers’ top cover panel, mn be replaced on the HP 33440 by detiching the spring and tifting the button out. For the HP 33449, the latch bution mn be removed by squeezing the mounting arms together and lifiing it out. 6-18, 6-3.MAiNBODYCOMPONENTS OZONE FILTER MOUNT The Ozone Filter is contained in the Ozone Filter Mount shown in FiWre 6-14. The entire AC Power Module does not need to be removed to remove the Ozone Filter, but the fan duct may need to be removed in the HP 33440 (see note below). On the HP 33449 and later or modified models of the HP 33440, follow the directions on the Ozone Filter Access Door for filter removal. To remove the Ozone Fflter Mount in both printers: 1. Remove the Main Body Covers. 2. Remove the screws (2) securing the filter mount and lift straight out. 3. Slide the filter out of its mount. Note A user-replaceable Ozone Filter is standard in the HP 33449 and mn be intiled o as an o.~tion in the HP 33440. See Service Note 33440-7. warning When replacing the Ozone Filter Mount, ensure that the circuit breaker reset B button is positioned in the center of the cover access hole. Failure to position the Ozone Filter Mount properly may cause a safety issue. @ Ozone,filter I — %rews 6-19,UPPER COOLING FAN
1.Remove the Ozone Filter Mount as described above. 2. To remove the Upper Cooling Fan, which rests on the AC Power Module (see Figure 6-15), remove the connector and the screws (3) that secure it to the module. Ensure the Upper Cooling Fan wires are routed properly before securing the Ozone Filter Mount.AC POWER MODULE
Warning Disconnect the Power Cord from the printer prior to servicing the AC Power Module. Also allow time for the Fusing Assembly to cool before attempting to service this portion of the printer. @ The AC Power Module, located below the Upper Cooling Fan, is shown in Figure 6-15. The Circuit Bre&er is located at the frontmost end of the AC Power Module beneath the Ozone Filter Mount. 1. Disconnect the Power Cod from the Printer. 2. Remove the Main Body Covers. 3. Remove the Fusing Assembly (4) and the Ozone Filter Mount (2). 4. Remove the sflver-colored screws (4) that secure the AC Power Module to the printer base plate, and remove the module from the printer, being mreti not to damage the large pin connectors attaching the module to the base connectors. Caution To prevent damage to the unit ensure that the large pin connectors are properly aligned when reinstiling the AC Power Module. Mso ensure the screw with the o captive star washer is properly reinstiled at the rear of the printer. @ AC Power Module Screw Fan Screw AC Power Module Screw ~ I Fan Screw Figure 6-15. AC Power Module and Upper Cooling Fan 6-20, MAIN MOTOR AND DRIVE ASSEMBLIES The location of the Main Motor and Drive Assemblies is shown in Figure 6-16. The disassembly procedures described below (Main Motor, 57- and 19-Tooth Gears, and Feed Drive Assembly) need to be performed in sequential order. Main Motor and Drive Assembly 1. Remove the Main Body Covers and Front Support Plate. 2. Remove the plastic Gear Cover (1) (option~ unit can be removed with Gear Cover attached). 3. Remove the Ozone Filter Mount, Fusing Assembly, and AC Power Module. 4. Disconnect the Main Motor connector from the DC Power Supply Assembly and unfasten the Fiber Optic Cable from its retining clip. Then remove the DC Power Supply Assembly (3). 5. Remove the screws (5) that secure the Main Motor and Drive Assembly to the printer frame and remove the assembly. 6. Remove the screws (4) that connect the motor to the Drive Assembly and separate the uniti. Do not attempt to replace individual gears; the entire Drive Assembly shotid be replaced if any part becomes damaged. o I q/ me–-” I 1 / I I 19-Tooth GearmI— ~Drive “’’””’Y Motor Main Motor Connector Figure 6-16. Main Motor and Drive Assembly 6-21, 57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drum Drive Shaft Before the 57- and 19-Tooth Gears Ooeated at the ends of the Drum Drive Shaft) can be removed (see Fi~re 6-17), seved adjacent assemblies must be removed. 1. After removing the Main Motor Assembly (above), remove the High-Voltage Power Supply &sembly, Registration Assembly, and Trantier Corona Assembly. 2. Use neede-nose pliers or a small flat-blade screwdriver to remove the C-clip from the lefi finside) end of the (drum drive) gear shaft. 3. Pun the bearing off the lefi end of the shti. 4. Pull the shti out the right side opening, leting the gears drop off the sM. Since the gears and shti are keyed, they may have to be rotitid to remove the shti. When replacing the gears, note that the 19-Tooth Gear can only be instiled in one direction. The 57-Tooth Gear can be intied on the shti either way. ) s Hole e Figure 6-f17. 57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drum Drive Shaft 6-22, Feed Drive Assembly The Feed Drive Assembly is shown in Figure 6-18. 1. Remove the Main Motor and Drive Assembly and the 57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drive Shti as described above. 2. Remove the right side Feed Roller Assembly mounting screw (1) and mrefilly push the right end of the assembly out of the way to access the front-most Feed Drive Assembly mounting screw. 3. Remove the screws (3) securing the Feed Drive Assembly and Mtiout. 1 L Paper Control PCA ConnectorDC Power Supply Connector Figure 6-18. Feed Drive Assembly 6-23, DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY The DC Power Supply Assembly contains the Main Motor driver circuitry as well as the DC Power Supply fuse. The Paper Control PCA atiches to it. DC Power Supply Fuse 1. Remove the Main Body Covers and Front Support Plate. 2. Remove the DC Power Supply Fuse (located in the lower left front corner of the DC Power Supply Assembly (see Figure 6-19). Be sure to replace this fuse with one of the proper value. DC Power Supply Assembly caution Since’ the Paper Sensing Arm mn be easily damaged, take me when removing the DC Power Supply. Also remove the Fiber Optic Cable from its retaining clip to ,’. , ~.~. prevent damage to the cable. Remove the Main Motor connector as well.# 1. Remove the Main Body Covers and Front Support Plate. 2. Remove the screws (3) securing the DC Power Supply Assembly, disconnect the Main Motor connector, and remove the Fiber Optic Cable from its retaining clip. 3. Lift the assembly straight up and out, taking mre not to damage”the Paper Sensing Arm. This may require a firm lifting action combined Wth a front-to-back rotting action bemuse of the three large pin connectors which secure the assembly to the base plate. 4. Remove screws (6) to separate the DC Power Supply Assembly from the Paper Control PCA. Use caution when replacing the assembly to ensure the connectors are properly aligned before securing it to the base plate. Be sure to instil the mounting screw with star washer at its proper location at the rear of the assembly (see FiWre 6-19). P > Figure 6-29. DC Power Supply Assembly 6-24, e PAPER CONTROL PCA Fi~re 6-20 shows the lomtion of the Paper Control PCA. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply Assembly. 2. Remove the Paper Control PCA cover (l). 3. Remove the screws (6) that secure the Paper Control PCA to the DC Power Supply Assembly (see Fi~re 6-20).I Sc[ew Sc;ew Screw I Paper ControlPCA CoverI I Paper ~ntrolPCA 1
Screw Screw 6-25, ,= HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY ● The High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) and the ~S Connector must be removed and replaced as a unit. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers and the Front Support Plate. 2. Remove the screws (2) that secure the High-Voltage Power Supply and the screws (2) that secure the High-Voltage Power Supply Connector, and remove the assembly from the printer (seeFigure 6-21). men reintiing, ensure that the High-Voltage Contact coil springs, located on the underside of the HVPS Connector, are not damaged or con~inated and that the connector pins on the ~S are properly &gned before seating the assembly. K contacts are dirty, clean them with a cotton swab and isopropyl alcohol. g;~~ I Screw I HVPS Connector High-Voltage Power Supply Figure 6-21. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly 6-26, LASER/SCANNING ASSEMBLY The Laser/Scanning Assembly (Figure 6-22) is etiemely fragile and should be handled carefully. Be particularly careful when handing the Fiber Optic Cable. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers. (Only the top cover panel of the Main Body Covers needs to be removed on the ~ 33449). 2. Remove the screw (1) on the Fiber Optic Cable connection cover, open the cover, and remove the cable. (Be sure to observe the routing of this wble for exact replacement.) 3. Disconnect cables J401 and J451 on the Laser/Scanning PCA and Laser Driver PCA. 4. Remove the screws (4) that secure the Laser/Scanning Assembly to the printer. 5. Carefully lift the assembly off the frame. Caution Some printers have meti shims (plates) located under one or both ends Oefi or right) of the laser unit. These shims must not be removed or altered or the printer may require factory retignment. (See Figure 8-12, Item 41, for shim location.) FIBER OPTIC CABLE To replace the Fiber Optic Cable, it must be disconnected from both the Laser/Scanning Assembly and the DC Controller PCA. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers. (Only the top cover panel of the Main Body Covers needs to be removed on the HP 33449). 2. To disconnect the Fiber Optic Cable from the Laser/Scanning Assembly, remove screw (1) securing the small door (see Figure 6-22), open the door, and slip the cable out of the retainer, 3. To remove it from the DC Controller PCA, remove the Bottom Cover (see Section 6-5) and disconnect the cable. To prevent damage when reinstiling the cable, be sure it is routed properly with no sharp bends. Figure 6-22. Laser/Scanning Assembly 6-27, COVER LATCH ASSEMBLY General The DC Power Supply Assembly and High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly must be removed to access the Hooks and Guides (see Figure 6-23). Note that the Right and Lefi Cover Latch Hook assemblies are not interchangeable. The Cover Release Button is discussed in Section 6-2. Right and Left Cover Latch Hooks 1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, DC Power Supply Assembly, and High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. 2. Remove the screw (1) and plate that secures the Right Hook and the screw (1) that secures the Left Hook. 3. Pull the hooks &ndsprings off the shti, being mrefil not to lose the springs. To replace the hooks and springs, slide the spring onto the sh&, slide the hook onto the shti, secure one end of the spring in its retaining position, and push the hook securely into position. Then move the other end of the spring into its retaining position, as if closing a safety pin. Note that thr right and lefi hook springs are different. Right and Left Hook Guides 1. Remove the Main Body Covers. 2. Remove the Right and Lefi Cover Latch Hooks according to the above procedure as needed. 3. Remove the screw (1) that secures each Hook Guide. 4. Lifi and slide the Hook Guides off the shti. Note that the smaller diameter coil spring is instiled on the Lefi Hook Guide. Len Latch r Right HookGuide rHook H‘ghot Latchok~w Figure 6-23. Cover La!eb Assembly 6-28, PAPER PICKUP/lNPUT TRAY AREA General To access assemblies in the paper pickup/input tray area, the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply Assembly must first be removed. Other assemblies, as noted, must dso be removed for particular items. Paper Sensing Arm Care must be taken not to damage the Paper Sensing Arm (see Figure 6-24) and Fiber Optic Cable when removing the DC Power Supply Assembly. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply Assembly. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the Paper Sensing Arm bracket to the Main Body Assembly (see Figure 6-24 for location). 3. Slide the entire Paper Sensing Arm out the right side of the printer. Paper Sensing Arm YY/ Figure 6-24. Paper Sensing Arm 6-29, Laser Shutter Arm The Laser Shutier Arm (Figure 6-25) engages a plastic tab on the underside of the Laser/Swnning a Assembly when an EP-S Cartridge is ins~led and Wows the laser beam to etit the Laser/Smnning Assembly. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply. 2. Remove the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly and the Laser/Smnning Assembly. 3. Remove the Right and Left Cover Latch Hooks. 4. Remove either the Right or Lefi Hook Guide. 5. Remove the meti plate from under the Laser Shutter Arm (l). 6. Slide the shaft with the Laser Shutier Arm out the side of the printer. LaserlScanning Assembly Laser Shutter (Removed) Asembly I Shutter Plate Screw —d~l I —\\\ — I — IllII1uFigure 6-25. Laser Shutter Arm 6-30, Feed Roller Assembly 1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply. 2. Remove the High-VoItage Power Supply Assembly. 3. Remove the screws (2) that secure each end of the Feed Roller Assembly (see Figure 6-26). 4. Lift slightiy and slide the assembly through the right side opening, being careful not to damage the Paper Sensing Arm. When reinstiling the assembly, be careful not to deform the lefi side grounding spring. Do not attempt to replace any parts on the shaft. The entire assembly must be replaced as a unit. Note Due to wear characteristics, the Separation Pad (see Registration Assembly section below) and the Feed Roller Assembly should be replaced at the same time. d <\\l ‘%kx-~ Screws(One on EachEnd of Shaft)_- / Figure 6-26. Feed Roller Assembly 6-31, Manual Feed Guide 1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply. 2. Remove the Paper Sensing Arm Assembly (1) and Laser/Smnning Assembly (4). 3. Remove the Feed Roller Assembly (see above). 4. Remove the screw (1) securing the Manual Feed Guide (see Figure 6-27) and slip the guide out of the printer, Cassette Guide (On Each Side) Pressure Assembly Figure 6-27. Manual Feed Guide and Pressure Assembly 6-32, Pressure Assembly The Pressure Assembly (see Figure 6-27) is a~ched to the bottom of the Main Body Assembly. To access it everything in the top printer cavity acept the hinges, Feed Guide Assembly, and any components connected to the Main Body Block (plastic resting) must first be removed. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, Fusing Assembly, DC Power Supply Assembly, the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly, AC Power Module, Registration Assembly, and Main Motor and Drive Assembly. 2. Remove the screws (8) securing the Main Body Block and the 57- and 19-Tooth Gear Support Bracket (2) to the Base Plate. 3, On the botiom of the Main Body Block (see FiWre 6-28), remove the screws (2) that secure the Pressure Assembly shaft and cassette guides, and remove the assembly. Note When reinstiling the Main Body Assembly, ensure that the Feed Guide ,! grounding spring plate fih under the grounding tib on the Feed Guide Assembly (see Figure 6-34). Mso be sure the Main Body Block fits in its guide pins before v screws are tightened. Screw Figure 6-28. Main Body Block (Inverted) 6-33, REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY General The Registration Assembly mn be removed tithout removing the DC Power Supply. When replacing, the esape (drive) gear at the right end of the assembly must stide under the solenoid on the Paper Control PCA. The DC Power Supply may need to be removed h do this. Registration Assembly Noie Prior to removing the Registration Assembly, take mre to note the position of the brass grounding blo& lomted at the lefi front end of the assembly in order to replace it properly (see “Caution” below). 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and dso remove the paper tray. 2. Remove the screws (2) securing the rear of the assembly and the screws (2) securing the Transfer Guide Plate and the front of the assembly. 3. Lifi the Registration Assembly (see Figure 6-29) up and out. When reinviting the Registration Assembly, ensure that the Transfer Corona Roller Grounding Block is properly positioned (see following page). A *ew Transfer Corona Roller ‘rew AA] _= ., -,,1, Transfer Guide Figure 6-29. Registration Assembiy 6-34 —— — _—, Transfer Corona Roller Grounding Block men replacing the Re@stration Assembly, be sure to rotate the brass grounding block on the end of the Transfer Corona Roller to its fill counterclockwise position (the “3:00 O’C1OCK’position as tiewed from the assembly’s lefi end) and position it properly on top of the grounding plate as shown in Figure 6-30. caution Failure to position this block properly may result in intermittent hardware failure indimtions. Registration Transfer Corona Roller RollersI
Grounding BlockI (LE~ SIDE VIEW)
Gro~nding Spring Plate Figure 6-30. Transfer Corona Roller Grounding Block 6-35, Separation Pad Note Because of wear characteristics, the Separation Pad should be replaced at the same time that the Feed Roller Assembly is replaced. The pad is located at the d Paper Tray end of the Registration Assembly (see FiWre 6-31). The cork on aworn pad will have a shiny or glwed appearance; the plastic edges will dso show signs of wear. 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove paper tray. 2. Remove the Registration Assembly (4) as described above. 3. Remove the screws (2) on the underside of the Registration Assembly securing the Separation Pad. Pick-up Roller Paper IFRONT
●Y Registration PAPER TRAYAssemblySeparation Pad Screws
Transfer Corona II Assembly Figure 6-31. Separation Pad 6-36, TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY The Registration Assembly and High-Voltige Power Supply Assembly must be removed before the Transfer Corona Assembly can be removed. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, Registration Assembly, and High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. 2. Remove the screws (2) at the ends of the Transfer Corona Assembly (see Figure 6-32), and remove it from the printer. Caution Do not remove the screws securing the nylon filament. Coronas mnnot be restrung, and the entire corona will have to be replaced if the wires are disturbed. @ TRANSFER AREA RESISTOR REPLACEMENT The two 15-Mohm and one l-Kohm resistors (see Figure 6-32), located toward the front of the printer just beyond the Transfer Corona Assembly, can be accessed by removing the Registration Assembly, High-Voltige Power Supply Assembly, and Transfer Corona Assembly. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, Registration Assembly, High-Voltige Power Supply Assembly, and Transfer Corona Assembly. 2, Remove the screws (2) securing the resifiors to be replaced, and remove them from the printer. ew ~“’istor(l-Koh”) Resistor (15-Mohm) \ Resistor (15-Mohm) Figure 6-32. Transfer Corona Assembly and Resistor Locations 6-37, FEED GUIDE ASSEMBLY 1. ,Open the Top Cover Assembly. 2. Remove the Gear Cover on the right side of the Feed Guide Assembly. 3. Remove the Main Motor Drive Assembly gear cover. 4. Remove the screws (4) securing the Feed Guide Assembly (see Figure 6-33) and ~ it out of the printer. For replacement the Fusing Assembly must be removed in order to position the Feed Guide Assembly ground tib on top of the ground spring plate as shown in Figure 6-34. The Feed Guide Assembly must dso fit over the two Wide pins adjacent to the ~o screws nearest the front of the printer. r G-esr tiverS.c-r.-e.w. — — .*re-w -Ar —- !
Feed Guide -mbly } II6/ I / Figure 6-33. Feed Guide Assembly 6-38, Feed Guide Grounding Spring Plate The Feed Guide Assembly has a grounding tab that must sit on a grounding spring plate lomted beneath the Trantier Corona Assembly (see Figure 6-34). Care must be Men to ensure that the grounding spring plate fits under the grounding tab on the Feed Guide Assembly whenever it is reinstied. Tab Roller Feed Guide Assembly Feed Guide Grounding Spring Plate Figure 6-34. Grounding springPlate 6-39, FUSING ASSEMBLY Fusing Assembly 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the sflver-colored screws (4) that secure the Fusing Assembly (see Figure 6-35). Be sure to note the location of the screw with the star washer. 2. Lifi the assembly straight up and out, using care to unseat the connectors on both ends simultaneously. Be sure to replace the screw with the star washer in its correct lomtion. Exit Sensor PCA and Thermistor The Thermistor is attached to the Exit Sensor PCA. Follow the instructions below to remove these assemblies. 1. Remove the Fusing Assembly (see above). 2. Remove the Exit Sensor PCA cover (1) (see Figure 6-35). 3. Remove the screw (1) securing the right side Fusing Assembly cover (see Figure 6-35), and slide the cover up and out (the plastic cover will flex around the lever arm on the assembly). 4. Remove the electrid lug connector screws at the lefi and right ends of the assembly. 5. Remove the screws (2) securing the Fusing Assembly front cover to the assembly and, to avoid damage to the Thermistor spring mount, mrefnlly move the cover slightly away from the Fusing Assembly. Be careful not to lose the wavy washers. 6. Remove the screw (1) securing the Thermistor and fift it off its mount (see Figure 6-36). 7. Remove the screws (2) securing the Exit Sensor PCA, carefily remove it from its two positioning tabs (see Figure 6-36), and remove it and the Thermistor from the Fusing Assembly. Upon reins~ation, refer to Figure 6-36 for proper routing of the Thermistor cable. Caution When replacing the brass-colored screws, be carefil not to strip them; they should be snug but not overly torqued. o Thermoprotector 1. Complete steps 1-6 of the removal procedure for the Exit Sensor PCA and Thermistor described above. 2. Remove the screws (2) that secure the Thermoprotector (see Figure 6-36) and lift it out. 6-40, Exit Sensor PCA — Screw Fusing Assembly 1 1, ,1 1 ! IiilII!’_-‘! ! ! 3III. Scr!w ~+~~ Fusing Assembly Cover Figure 6-35. Fusing Assembly Top Cover of Assembly (Open) 1 - ‘us’”gR“”er Mght Side w:: Assembly- ,’ ‘ h~screw(Lugconnector) k Thermistor CableCleaning Pad—~~l ThermistorThermoprot~tor.“~r\ Front Cover )- Screw (Lug Connector)I
Exit Senso~ PCA Cover Exit Sensoi PCA Figure 6-36. Fusing Assembly Components 6-41, ., Exit Sensor Arm . 1. Remove the Fusing Assembly (4). ● 2. Remove the Etit Sensor PCA cover (1) and the screws (2) securing the Ht Sensor PCA to the Fusing Assembly. 3. Remove the brass-colored screws (2) securing the ~t Shutter Arm Assembly Oocated on the lower ba~ side of the Fusing Assembly), remove the assembly from the retaining pins, and care~y pop the Etit Sensor Arm off the assembly. 4. Pun the Ht Sensor Arm (~ag) out the side of the unit. — caution When rephcing the brass-coIored screws, be carefnl not to strip them, they should be snug but not hig~y torqued. Exit Sensor Arm Figure 6-37. Exit Sensor Arm 6-42, ~-~. ~0~ ~0~~~ ~~~~~~~Y COMPONENTS General The Top Cover Assembly (see Fignre 6-38), which is essentially the same for both printers, is the hinged tid that opens when the Top Cover Release Button is pressed. It houses the EP-S Cartridge and contains the Wrror, Shutter, Erase Lamp, and Detivery Assemblies. Note Ml Top Cover Assemblies an be replaced without separating the Top Cover Assembly from the rest of the printer, except for the Delivery Assembly, Static Eliminator, the Hinge Bracket Plates, and the Hinge Assemblies. Static EliminatorI
Delivery semblyI r~~~p
Defletior Pawl %Sembly IEP-S Cartridge Figure 6-38. Top Cover Section (HP 33440 shown) 6-43, TOP COVER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL ● Two methods are possible for removing the Top Cover Assembly Method One should be used if the Hinge Assemblies or Hinge Bracket Plates (see Figure 6-39-and Figure 6-40) must be replaced; Method Two should be used in dl other cases. Method One: 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-SCartridge. 2. Remove the Hinge Security Plates (one screw on each hinge plate) and separate’the NO coil springs on the left side (see Fi~re 6-39). Swing the Hinge Springs out of the way. 3. Remove the Hinge Bracket Plate screws (4 - two through each Hinge Bracket Plate) where they attach to the Top Cover Assembly, supporting the Top Cover Assembly as you do so. 4. Separate the Top Cover Assembly from the Hinge Bracket Plates. Scr&ws (2) Hi;ge Inside Hinge Security Plate Bracket Ptite Figure 6-39. Top Cover Assembly Removal, Method One 6-44, Method Two: Additiond required tool: short (stubby) No. 2 Phillips magnetic screwdriver. 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the Fusing Assembly. 2. While supporting the Top Cover Assembly (opened 45°) from the rear, remove the hinge mounting screws (2 each) from the Hinge Assemblies where they attach to the Main Body Base Plate. 3. Liti the Top Cover Assembly from the Printer. Hint One of the ~o screws in each of the Hinge Assemblies can be removed and replaced with the Top Cover Assembly fully opened. ,$ v Figure 6-40. Top Cover Assembly Removal, Method Two 6-45, MIRROR SHUTTER ASSEMBLY The Mirror Shutier Assembly (Figure 6-41) is lomted above the Erase hp Assembly near the top of the opened Top Cover &sembly. 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 2. Remove the Mirror Shutir Assembly mounting screws (3) shown in Figure 6-41. 3. TWe care not to touch or otherwise damage the mirror when removing the Mirror Shutier Assembly. caution men handling the Mirror Assembly, be wrefrd not to touch the mirror’s surface or allow it to be scratched (it is a “first-surface” mirror). If the mirror must be cleaned, use a so% dean, damp, lint-free wipe with a cleaning fluid approved for camera lenses. See Chapter 4, Section 4-4, “Cleaning the Printer.” Figure 6-41. Shutter, Mirror, and Erase Lamp Assemblies 6-46, \ MIRROR ASSEMBLY 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 2. Remove the Mirror Shutier Assembly (3) or slide the shutier to the right past the lever and swing it up and out of the way. 3. Note the orientation of the Mirror Assembly so it may be returned to the same position (possibly mark the top of the mirror frame or note the lomtion of the formed part number). 4. Loosen the plastic frame (the EP-S Cartridge Guide) holding the Mirror and Erase Lamp assemblies by removing the large upper screws (4 of 5) that secure the EP-S Cartridge Guide Frame (see Figure 6-41) to the Top Cover Assembly. 5. Stide the Mirror Assembly stightiy to the right and lift it out the left side of the frame. 6. Ensure that the Mirror Assembly is returned to the printer in the correct orientation. The assembly hasa6mm slot on the left and an 8 mm slot on the right as shown in Figure 6-42. If the mirror must be cleaned, use a so% dean, damp, fint-free wipe with a lens cleaning fluid approved for camera lenses. See Chapter 4, Section 4-4, “Cleaning the Printer.” Note: When returning the mirror to the cartridge guide, be sure to orient it as shown below. ~ 6mm+~~— 1+8.. Lefi Mirror Holder Right : Figure 6-42. Mirror Holder 6-47, /ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY
a The Erase bmp Asembly (see Figure 6-41) contains the Erase bmp PCA and surrounding sheet meti. 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 2. Remove the connector cover (1) on the Erase hmp Assembly (see Figure 6-41). 3. Remove the screws (2) securing the PCA to the Erase hp Connector Arm (see Figure 6-43). 4. Remove the screws (2) on the top face of the Erase kp Assembly. 5. ~ out the Erase bmp Assembly. Erase Lamp Assembly Mounting Screws I Erase Lamp connector ‘rm~ \’Figure 6-43. Erase Lamp Assembly
6-48, ERASE LAMP CONNECTOR ARM The Erase Lamp Connector Arm (see Figure 6-41) supplies power to the lamps from the Efit Sensor PCA lomted on the Fusing Assembly. 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge, 2. HP 33440 only Remove the Fusing Assembly and the black plastic Fuser Insulating Cover in the Top Cover Assembly (see “Fuser Insulating Cover” below). 3. Remove the connector cover (1) on the Erase Lamp Assembly (see Figure 6-41). 4. Remove the screws (2) securing the Erase Lamp Connector Arm to the Erase Lamp Assembly (see Figure 6-43). 5. Remove the screws (2 for HP 33440, 1 for HP 33449) securing the connector arm to the Top Cover Assembly. 6. Drop the connector out. DELIVERY AREA The Delivery Assembly (Figure 6-45) guides printed paper to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. Note that removal of the Delivery Assembly itself or the Output Stitic Eliminator will require separating the Top Cover Assembly from the printer. Fuser insulating Cover 1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 2. Remove the Fusing Assembly. (Mternatively, the Top Cover Assembly can be removed instead.) 3. Remove the black-plastic Fuser Insulating Cover screws (the 2 smaller brass-colored pan-head screws tith washers) (see Figure 6-44). 4. Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver between the cover and the EP-S Cartridge Guide frame as shown in Figure 6-44, prying the plastic clips away from the cover to release it. Delivery Coupler Assembly Figure 6-44. Fuser Insulating Cover Removal 6-49, Detivery Assembly 1. Remove the hinged Top Cover &sembly from the printer. 2. Remove the black pltic Fuser Initiating Cover covering the Detivery Asembly (see above). 3. Remove the Erase Lamp &sembly cover (1) and mnnector screws (2). 4. Remove the Erase Lamp Connedor b. 5. With the Top Cover &sembly resting upside down on the work are% remove the screws (5) securing the EP-S Cartridge Guide and remove the Guide from the Top Cover Asembly. (Wfie disturbance to the Top Cover Asembly to prevent damage to the Wrror Asembly.) 6. Remove the Lower Detivery Cover screws (2, bla&) and Defivery &sembly mounting screws (4) (see Figure 6-45). 7. Lift the Detivery &sembly, with the Lower Dehvery Cover, free of the Top Cover &sembly. 8. Detach the Lower Defivery Cover from the Detivery Asembly by removing the brass-colored screws (2). 9. Separate the Detive~ Coupler hsembly from Detivery &sembly. When reintifing the Defivery &sembly, position the Dehvery Coupler &sembly as shown in Figure 6-4. When reinting the Cartridge Guide, be sure to position the ~rror &sembly mounting slots properly (see Figure 6-42). DeliveryCouplerAssembly 1. Open the Top Cover &sembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 2. Remove the Fusing &sembly and Fuser Initiating Cover as described above. 3. Remove the Detivery Coupler Asembly mounting screw (1) and lift it out (see Fl~re 6-45). Figure 6-45. Delivery Assembly Removal 6-50, Static Eliminator The Static Eliminator (see Figure 6-46) is the fine fiber brush located where the paper etits to the Top (Face-Down) Output Tray. 1. Remove the Top Cover Assembly and the Delivery Assembly (see above). 2. Remove the screws (2) securing the Static Eliminator. Deflector Pawls (Claws) 1. With the Top Cover Assembly filly open, pry the right end of the Deflector Pawls (Claws) sh& out of its retaining ctip (see Figure 6-47). 2. Slide the assembly to the right out of its retainer. When reinstiling the Deflector Pawls, ensure that the spring is positioned properly and that it is not damaged (see Figure 6-47). Figure 6-47. Deflector Pawis (Claws) 6-51, TOP COVER HINGE BRACKET PLATES 1. Remove the Top Cover Assembly from the printer. 2. If the Hinge Assemblies are still attached to the Top Cover Assembly (see Figure 6-39), remove them (4 screws, 2 on each Hinge Assembly). 3. Remove the Delivery Assembly. 4. Remove the remaining screws (2 each) securing the Hinge Bracket Plates to the Top Cover Assembly and lift them out of the printer. When reinstiling, note that the Hinge Plate with the coil spring must mount on the left side of the Top Cover Assembly as viewed from the front of the printer. Top Cover Assembly LE~ RIGHT Screw ew ew Screw Figure 6-48. Hinge Plate Removal 6-52, G-S. BOTTOMCOVERCOMPONENTS BOTTOM COVER REMOVAL The Bottom Cover (see Figure 6-49) encases the components lomted on the underside of the printer. The Botiom Cover must be removed to replace the Lower Cooling Fan, Interface/Formatter PCA, DC Controller PCA, and some cable assemblies. caution Before turning the printer over, the EP-S Cartridge must be removed as well as any other brackets or fasteners that are not secured. When turning the printer over, use efireme care not to bend or otherwise damage the upper body frame and component. MSOremove any accessory memory 1/0 PCAS and font cartridges at this time, using proper ESD procedures. For HP 33449 only With the printer tu~ed over, remove the screws (4) securing the outer Bottom Cover. Lift the rear of the cover until the cover is vertiti and remove it from the printer. For both printem Remove the screws (g) securing the inner cover and lift it off. Note that on the HP 33440, one screw is accessed through a slot in the Font Cartridge Cover. LOWER COOLING FAN 1. Remove the Botiom Cover(s). 2. Detach the connector from the DC Controller PCA (see Figure 6-50), remove the screws (4) securing the fan, and lift the fan out of the printer. p:pnt’oll)e&’falcyma’ter %:,4/ A ‘nRf/ Thermis Bypass DC Power Uppe supply Fan Assembly Figure 6-49. Bottom cower components 6-53, lNTERFACE/FORMA~ER PCA a The Interface (~ 38440)@ormatier (~ 38449) PCA is located on the underside of the printer, as shown in Figure 6-49. caution Since most PCAS contain components that are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge, be sure to use protective measures when removing, in~ng, or handfing any of these assembhes. These measures include static-free workstations @ and personal grounding devices such as the anti-tic wrist strap and grounding mat included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (~ 9300-0933). 1. Remove any accessory PCAS (e~ansion memory boards and optional 1/0), font cartridges, and the Bottom Cover(s). 2. Disconnect connector J8 (connects to the Control Panel). 3. Remove the Voltage Connector star washer screws (2) (see Figure 6-50) and the screws (4) securing the PCA (2 at the front, 1 at the long edge, and 1 in the center of the board). 4. Remove the screws (2) connecting the 1/0 Connectir Plate to the printer’s base plate; 5. fimove the PCA and the a~ched meti plate by Ming the rear of the board by the 1/0 Connector plate) 4 to 6 inches (10 to 15 centimekrs) and then pu~ng it out of &e printer. This @ mow the two cartridge connectors to slide out of their plastic frame and will disconnect the DC Controller connector. men reintiling the Interfaceflormatter PCA, ensure that the PCA is Jlgned with the plastic positioning pins and that the 1/0 Connector plate does not pinch the cable assembly running between the DC Controller and the Fusing Assembly. On& when tk board assembly is positioned properly should the DC Controller connector be seated and the screws (8) be replaced. Note If the Interface PCA is replaced, the page count should be set to its previous value. # Refer to “Setting the Page Count” in Chapter 3, Section 3-7, for instructions.Q
Voltage Connector &rews (Star Washer) A I ~screws Lower Cooling /1 Intetiacel Fan Screws (4 Formatter PCA / / m -. II f bnnector J8 Figure 6-50. Interface/Formatter PCA 6-54, DC CONTROLLER PCA The DC Controller PCA is lomted on the underside of the printer as shown in Figure 6-49. See notes and mutions for this section. caution Most PCAs (Printed Circuit Assemblies) contin components that are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge. When you remove, intil, or handle any of these assemblies, be sure to use protective measures including stitic-free workstations and personal grounding devices such as the antistatic wrist strap and grounding mat included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 9300-0933). Follow dl recommended antistatic procedures. 1. Remove any accessory PCAS (=pansion memory boards and optional 1/0), font cartridges, and the Bottom Cover(s). 2. Remove the Interface/Formatir PCA (see above). 3. Disconnect connectors J202, J203, J206, J207, J208, J211, and the Fiber Optic Cable from the DC Controller PCA. 4. Loosen the screw (1) and remove the Thermistor Bypass Switch Actuator Plate from its plastic -nchion Oocated nefi to the Lower Cooling Fan). 5. Remove the screws (4) that secure the four corners of the DC Contro~er PCA. 6. Remove the long black screws (2) from each of the two large connectors on the DC Controller PCA. 7. Lifi out the PCA, taking care not to damage it when disconnecting the two large connectors. The PCA should be carefnlly rocked back and forth to loosen the connectors. When reins~ng the DC Controller PCA, be sure the connector pins are properly fllgned and that no cables (particularly the Fiber Optic Cable) will be pinched before pressing the board into place. (Hinti Pushing down on the top of the connectors is the best way h reseat the board.) Mso ensure jumper J209 is in place or intermittent hardware failure indications may result.S=) ScrewConnector~lnnn- Screw
DC Controller PCA ~ ~ - u ] 6-55,TROUBLESHOOTING
contents 7. ~O~LESHOOmNG 7-1. INTRODUCTION .7-5 7-2. PRE-TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES .7-6 Preliminary Operating Checks .7-6 Pre-Troubleshooting Check List .7-6 7-3. WN FLOWCHART .7-8 Flowchati 7-1. Main Troubleshooting Sequence .7-9 Flowchart 7-2. Power-Up Sequence .7-1o Flowchart 7-3. Paper Movement Sequence .7-11. Possible Paper Movement Sequence Problems Table .7-12 7-4. PRINTER MESSAGE TROUBLESHOOTING .7-13 Message Summary Table .7-13 Blank Display .7-20 ~ DC Voltage Functional Check .7-21 AC Power Functional Check .7-22 “02 WARMING UP” (continuous) Message .7-23 “11 PAPER OUT” Message “PC/EC LO~” Message .7-23 Paper Out Sensor (PS301) Functional Check .7-25 Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) Functional Check .7-25 Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, SW203) Functional Check 7-26 “12 PR~TER OPEN” Message .7-27 +24B Vdc Functional Check .7-28 “13 PAPER JAM” Message .7-29 Paper Jam Detection .7-31 Paper Feed Area Checks .7-32 Main Motor (Ml) Functional Check .7-33 Paper Tray Checks ., .7-34 Paper Feed Mechanid Checks .7-35 SL301 Functional Check .7-36 Feed Roller Assembly Functional Check .7-37 Registration/Transfer Area Checks .7-38 SL302 Functional Check .7-39 Etit Area Checks.7-40 Paper Efit Sensor (PS331) Functional Check .7-42 ., 7-1 .bc., “14NOEPCART’’M essage.7-44 . Drum Sensitivi~ Stitches (SW301 and SW302) Functional Check .7-45 “16TONERLOW’M essage.7-46 Toner Low Functional Check...7-46 “41ERROR’Message .7-48 “50SERWCE’’F userMdfunction .7-48 Thermistor Functional Check .7-50 Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Functional Check .7-51 “51ERROR’Message .7-52 Laser Power Verifimtion .7-54 “52ERROR’S mnnerMaIfunction ., .7-56 Smnner Motor Functional Check..’.7-56 7-5. IMAGE FORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING .7-57 Introduction .7-57 Image Development (Half Self Test) Functional Check .7-70 Drum Rotation Functional Check .7-70 Beam-to-Drum Mirror Assembly Functional Check .7-71 EP-S Cartridge Guide Functional Check .7-71 High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly .7-72 Primary Corona Functional Check .7-75 Developer AC Bias Functional Check .7-75 Developer DC Bias Functional Check .7-76 Transfer Corona .7-77 “ ‘- ‘- Transfer Corona Functional Check .7-77 m Erase Lamp Functional Check.7-78 Image Quali@ Check .7-78 Paper Overview .7-79 Paper Curl .7-80 Density Check .7-81 Registration Check .7-82 Skew Tolerance .7-83 Procedure .7-83 Fusing Check .7-83 7-6. INTERFACE TROUBLESHOOTING .7-84 Communications Check .7-84 Test Message .7-84 AUTOE~C.BAT Standard Configuration Test ., 7-84 7-7. TROUBLESHOOTING MDS.7-87 Repetitive Defect Ruler, HP 33440 and HP 33449 .7-87 Connector Location Diagrams..7-88 Printer Wiring Diagram, HP 33440 and HP 33449 .7-92 DC Controller Signal Listing Chti, HP 33440 and HP 33449 .7-94 Signal Timing Chart, HP 33440 and HP 33449., .7-100 -:-..- 7-1. Pre-Troubleshooting Check List .7-7 e . ‘“ 7-2. J210 Location, .7-21 7-3. Fuse FI Location .7-22 -.—, 7-4. Paper Sensing Arm .7-24 7-5, Tray Size Sensing Microswitches Locations .7-26 7-6. Defeating the Top Cover Assembly Microtitch .7-28 7-7. J210Test Connector Test Point .7-28 7-8. Paper Pathvs Paper Sensors .7-29 7-9. Paper Tray .7-34 7-10. Feed Roller Assembly Operation .7-35 7-11. Paper Positioned in the Registration Rollers .7-35 7-12. Paper Pickup Solenoid (SL301) Location .7-36 7-13. Feed Roller Wear .7-37 7-14. Registration Assembly .7-38 7-15. Paper Etit Area .7-40 7-16. Paper Etit Sensor Check .7-42 7-17. EP-S Cartridge Sensitivity Switches .7-44 7-18. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly Connector .7-47 7-19. EP-SCartridge (Botiom view)..7-47 7-20, Fuser Circuit Breaker Reset...7-49 7-21, Thermistor Resistance at J332.7-50 7-22. Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Check .., . 7-51 7-23. Instiling Laser Power Checker Tool .7-55 7-24. Image Defect Summary .7-58 7-25. Image Defect Summary (Continued) .7-59 7-26. Beam-to-Drum Mirror Assembly , .7-71 7-27. EP-SCartridge (Bottom view)..7-73 7-28. High-Voltage Power Supply Connector .7-73 7-29. EP-SCartridge (End view)...7-75 7-30. J210 Test Points .7-76 7-31. Registration Specifications .7-82 7-32. Repetitive Defect Rtier .7-87 7-33. Printer Base Connectors (Top view) .7-88 7-34. Printer Base Connectors (Bottom view) , .7-88 7-35. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly (Top view) .7-89 7-36. MtSensor PCA (Component side).7-89 7-37. Paper Control PCA (Component side) .7-90 7-38. DC Controller PCA .7-91 7-39. Interface/Formatier PCA .7-91 7-40. HP 33440/HP 33449 Printer Wiring Diagram (1 of 2) .7-92 7-41. HP 33440/HP 33449 Signal Timing Chart .7-1oo 7-1. Major Printer Functions .7-8 7-2. Printer Messages .7-13 7-3. Blank Display .7-20 7-4. 02 WARMING UP(continuous) Checks .7-23 7-5. “11 PAPER OUT” or “PC/EC LOAD” Message Checks .7-24 7-6. Configuration of Tray Size Sensing Switches .7-26 7-7. “12PRINTERO PEN’’Checks.7-27 7-8. “13PAPERJAM’’C hacks...7-31 7-3, 7-9. Paper Feed Area Checks .7-32 7-10. Main Motor Checks .7-33 7-11. Paper Tray Checks .7-34 7-12. SL301 Checks .7-36 7-13. Paper Feed Mechanical Checks .7-37 7-14. Registration/Transfer Area Checks .., .7-39 7-15. Etit Area Checks ., .7-41 7-16. Paper Efit Sensor (PS331) Check .7-42 7-17. “14 NO EP C~T” Checks .7-45 7-18. “16 TONER LOW’ Checks .7-46 7-19. “50 SERWCE” Fuser Malfunction Checks .., .7-49 7-20. “41 ERROR’ Checks .7-53 7-21. “51 ERROR’ Beam Detect Checks .7-54 7-22, Scanner Malfunction Checks .7-56 7-23. Black Pages .7-60 7-24. Very Faint Print .7-60 7-25. SpecMed Print .7-61 7-26. Vertid White Streaks .7-61 7-27. Right-Hand Tefi Missing/Distorted .7-62 7-28. Faulty Registration .7-62 7-29. Random Horizonti Black Lines .7-63 7-30. Slightiy Faint Print .7-63 7-31. Suede Print .7-64 7-32. Smeared Print/Improper Fusing .7-64 7-33. Distorted Print.7-65 7-34. Repetitive Defects .7-65 7-35. Black Pages with Horizontal White Stripes .7-66 7-36. Image Skew .7-66 7-37. Improperly Sized Image .7-67 7-38. Vetiid Dark Streaks .7-67 7-39. Character Voids .7-67 7-40. Background .7-68 7-41. Smudged Band with Overprint .7-68 7-42, Black Stripe on Right Side of Page .7-68 7-43. White or Blank Pages .,.7-69 7-44. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly Summa~ .7-72 7-45. High-Voltage System Checks , .7-74 7-46. Transfer Corona Checks .7-77 7-47. Paper Checks .7-79 7-48. Paper Curl .7-80 7-49. Density Check Factors .7-81 7-50. Registration Specifimtions .7-82 7-51. Communimtions Checks .7-85 7-52. LED 201 and SW201, 202, 203, and 205.7-94 7-53. Signal Listing .7-94 7-4, 7-f. INTRODUCTION This chapter was designed to provide the information necessary to quicMy identifi the cause of an HP 33440 or HP 33449 printer failure. Chapter organization is based upon three predominant sources of symptoms: Control Panel display messages. Print quality problems. Host/printer communication problems. A series of flowcharts have been included to provide support personnel with a logid sequence of steps to verify proper printer operation. If a failure should be discovered through the verification procedure, the engineer can quickly find the appropriate section of Chapter 7 to identify the faulty component or assembly. Once a defective printer component is identified as the cause of the failure, service personnel should reference Chapter 6 (“Removal and Replacement”) to effect the repair. If the cause is not an internal printer component, this chapter should provide the information necessary to resolve the problem or, at a minimum, reference another appropriate section of the manual. Section 7-2, “Pre-Troubleshooting Procedures,” provides a preliminary checMist designed to assist the service representative in determining– over the telephone if possible– if a service call is necessary. Section 7-3, “Main Flowchart,” provides sever~ flowcharts which give a step-by-step sequence of actions to take to verify proper printer operation. Section 7-4, “Printer Message Troubleshooting,’> lists Control Panel messages, their causes, and the appropriate actions to take to respond to them. Section 7-5, “Image Formation Troubleshooting,” describes typical image formation and print quality problems and the steps to take to correct them. Section 7-6, “Interface Troubleshooting,” describes interface problems be~een the printer and its host system and the actions to take to correct these problems. Section 7-7, “Troubleshooting Aids,” provides additional troubleshooting material, including a print image repetitive defect ruler, connection diagrams, the main wiring diagram, followed by a listing and brief description of the signals illustrated in the diagram, and a signal timing chart. 7-5, .- 7“2. PRE”TROUBLESHOQTING PROCEDURES Preliminary Operating Checks Prior to troubleshooting a specific printer problem, the service representative should ensure that 1. The printer is instiled on a solid, level surface (refer to Chapter 3, Section 3-2, of this manual). 2. The line voltage providing power to the printer does not vary more than 10% from the nominal rated value as specified on the Power Wting label. 3. The operating environment for the printer is within the temperature and humidity specifimtions listed in Chapter 1, Section 1-3, of this manual. 4. The printer is operated in a well-ventilated area. 5. The printer is not located in a hot or humid area (near water taps, boilers, or humidifiers), a cold area, near open flames, or in a dusty situation. 6. The printer is never exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials. 7. The printer is not exposed to direct sunlight at any time during the day. 8. The customer is using media as specified in Chapter 2, Sections 2-4 through 2-6, of this manual. 9. The customer is not using a refilled EP-S Cartridge and has removed the EP-S Catiridge shipping seal. -_ Nate The printer’s scanner motor and main motor start when the printer is switched a on and every time the printer receives a print job. This explains the motor noise ~~ “:+~~ heard at these times. Mso, about every 30 minutes the Main Motor rotates the8 Fusing Roller to make it last longer. This is a normal part of printer operation. Pre-Troubleshooting Check List The “Pre-Troubleshooting Check List” on the following page is designed to help resolve user-responsible problems before they become service dls. Hint Photocopy the “Pre-Troubleshooting Check List” and place it near your telephone R for quick reference. 7-6,PRE-TROUBLESHOOTING CHECK LIST
Blank Display Partial Pages ● Veri& that power cord is firmly connected to both the printer and ● Set AUTO COW = OFF in Configuration Menu and its power source. Remove any Optional 1/0 or memo~ PCAS. troubleshoot error message. If no message, probable cause is an application and/or printer setup problem. Slow Printer ● The optimal eight-page-per-minute specification does not take Communication Problems into account data transfer time between the host and printer or ● If tied to an MS-DOS ~tem, ensure the AUTOEXEC.BAT file the time required by the printer to format more complex data properly reflects UO configuration, via the MODE and COM such as HP-GL/2 commands and scalable fonts. A complex page commands, and reboot. may take up to several minutes to format before printing. The ● Veri& that a cable known to be good is securely installed between WY indicator should flash while formatting. the host and printer -10’ max. for parallel, SO’max. for RS-232, ● A Print Fonts routine involving scalable fonts (HP 33449only) ● Verify that both the host ~tem and printer’Control Panel will typically cause delays of up to 30 seconds between pages. configurations match. ● Because the HP 33449self test involves font scaling and HP-GU2 . Check that the application’s printer configuration file has not graphics, it will not run continuously at eight ppm. been improperly modified or inadvertently purged. Shoti EP-S Cartridge Life 02 WARMUP (Continuous) ● A new Hewlett-Packard EP-S Cartridge is rated for 4,000 letter- ● Can be caused by host interface or cabling problems, or improper sized pages with average coverage (i.e., a double-spaced page) of use of the printer’s interface ports. Remove 1/0 cables and five percent toner per page. Fores, graphics, and/or a density power cycle the printer. dial setting less than “5”will yield fewer pages. ● Paper with high surface abrasion (typical of a good writing or 13 PAPER JAM Indications general purpose bond paper) can prematurely wear the surface of . If media visiblyjams, it maybe unsuitable for the hserJet the EP dmm. Recommend a good quality xerographic bond paper. printer. Try a reputable xerographic bond paper or other suitable media per Chapter 2 herein or Appendix D of the User’s Manual. Font Cartridge Not Recognized . If using envelopes, ensure they meet specifications in Section 2-5 ● Reinstall cartridge - push until it “clicks.” of this manual or Appendix D of User’s Manual. Do not shuffle Print Quality Problems envelopes prior to Io;ding in the input tray. ● Thoroughly clean the printer (see User’s Manual). ● Printer may require operator cleaning. (See User’s Manual.) ● Avoid poor quality or non xerographic paper and improper paper ● If all looks well but jam indication occurs just prior to delive~, storage practices, Recommend use of high quality xerographic host application and/or printer setup is probably at fault. Can bond paper and proper storage per the User’s Manual. occur if unexpected media size is placed in Manual Feed tray. Black Pages (Undefined Border) ERROR 20 (Memory Overflow) ● Broken Primary Corona wire - replace the EP3 Cartridge. ● Insufficient printer user memoq is avaiIable to format the cur- Dark Streaks (or Lines) Down the Page rent page. Additional user memory may be freed up by removingany soft fonts or macros. User may need to purchase additional ● C1eanthe Primary Corona wire with felt end of cleaning tool. memo~. ● Check the Fuser Cleaning Pad. If marks correspond to streaks, it may need replacement. Check any pre-printed forms for cor- ERROR 21 (Print Overrun) responding images. ● The current page is too complex to be printed in its entirety. On the HP 33440, the only solution is to simplify the page. With the Light Areas of Print (Blotches or tines/Streaks HP 33449,accexory memory can be purchased and PAGE Down the Page) PROTE~ on the Configuration Menu) enabled. ● Toner running 10W. Gently rock the EP-S Qrtridge around its ERROR 22 (1/O Configuration Error) long axis to resolve temporarily. May require a new EP-S ● Because printer and host are not handshaking properly, the Cartridge immediately. pnntets UO buffer has overrun. Verify cabling per Appendix D, ● Clean tbe Transfer brona housing and wire. and the host’s interface/configuration and the printer’s bntrol ● Improper paper storage and some ‘@es of paper will exhibit this Panel configuration. problem. Recommend usage of high quality xerographic bond ERROR 40 (Data Transfer Error) paper and proper storage techniques. ● Printer is receiving data in an unrecognizable format, a common Smeared Print result of having powered down the host with the printer online. ● Paper with a surface texture that is too smooth will exhibit this Nso caused by nonmatching baud rates or host configuration problem. other than an 8-bit-1 start/stop bit – no parity ASCII character. Gray Background Unexpected Results - No Failure Indication With envelopes and thick media, set the Print Density dial to a ● Most unexpected problems can be attributed to the host applica-● lower (darker) setting. tion or its use. The Personal Peripherals &ist Line is available free of charge to help the user through these problems at ● Clean the Primary Corona wire with felt end of cleaning tool. (208) 323-2551. Note that this is a toll call. 7-7, 7-3. MAIN FLOWCHART W troubleshooting shotid begin with Flowchart 7-1 which can be used to veri~ the major printer functions described in the table below Table 7-1. Major Printer Functions Power Up. The powering up of the printer to the ready state following Self TesL and the distribution of DC voltages. Paper Movement. The printer’s ability to successfully move media from the input tray to either the Face-Up or Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. Image Formation, The printer’s ability to successfully generate a print image and transfer this image to various print media. \Communications. \The printer’s abili@ to successfully communicate with its host system. I The service representative shotid work through the main flowchart sequentially, function by function, until dl of the printer’s major functions have been verified. ~owchart 7-2 (Power-Up Sequence) and Flowchti 7-3 (Paper Movement Sequence) should be used in conjunction with Flowchart 7-1. If a malfunction is encountered, the service person should branch to the specified section. m.— 7-8 — —_, See SectIon 7-2,QNo PrintImage UK? ,!,Yes
No/Don’t know No Pr[nt Yes v Image QK? 1 - “Ss .,-, . , “. Yes * I I See Section 7-5. I Printer OKI I Flowchart 7-1. Main Troubleshooting Sequence 7-9, StartFPower Off andOn Printer
Yes , \ See Table 7-2.I
eYesPower-upsequencecomp[ete Flowchart 7-2. Power-up Sequence 7-1o, No/Don’t knowI
Re-testing using nedia per Chapter21Message. ‘& v Operatlona( Check’I No
No II Yes Perform Ualn Troubleshooting v sequence F[owchart 7-1. I Begin with Table 7-9, PaDer Feed Area Checks 1- 1 See Tab[e 7-9, Paper Feed Area Checks See Tab(e 7-14, Reglstratlon/Transfer Area ChecksFlowchart 7-3. Paper Movement SeqUence
7-11, oCont. Fusing Assemb(y? See Tab(e 7-15, Exit Area ChecksI See tab~e be~ow. I
Flowchart 7-3. Paper Movement Sequence (Continued) Possible Paper Movement Sequence Problems , =.,,.-r.,,.- ,-:- $* ...-. ..,,-?-,..-,%-=-,-=:- =’—,-~~-=-s,* .“-.-’L-=-—.7“ -~=’-~—.7.=- - -fi,;,, -~,-—“-~-=-2f-==- ~*=7-“= ~>—,~‘:-=-~-—-=:—=.-:=,-,=,E=-L=* ;;#; -=- . ? ,*~,,=~=,,?—=7,. ~.. ,-.-,-,*-.-~.“-=~-,~-—-~<$.-~,=:_e.~:. ~- -6~.-a.@5::”3B.E-:-~”’a-~’,~e-~s@:-~*-==.,:=$7.-$?7’~s,,:=*=.-S-g,=.-.-$,=.-$,,,,~:=;’-*~?=.:=f_=-_.f-%F-==.,=$-$:_$~g~;;j$~ f~$&qs@-?sN,-=Y-.$-e-$.=s~w.E~#”F;F:93@s$~EsEg&?z’ :s$e %g“–~=z- 1.Wrong size (length) media being used. Replace with correct size media. 2. Tray size sensing titches/tabs defective. See “Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, SW203) Functional Check” in the following section. 3. Mechanical problem with Exit Sensor Flag. See Table 7-15, “Exit Area Checks,” in the following section. 4. Electtid problem with PS331. See Table 7-16, “Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Functional Check,” in the following section. 5. Delivery jam. See Table 7-15, “Exit Area Checks,” in the following section. 7-12, Message Summary Table Table 7-2, “Printer Messages,“ is a list of dl status, attendance, error, and service messages affecting the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers. HP 33449-specific messages are overprinted in color. When tio items appear in the “MESSAGE” column, the first is the HP 33440 display message and the second is the HP 33449 display message. This list identifies the action required to correct the situation identified by the message. Table 7-2. Printer Messages ::- S~A~O.N :-DESCRIBED AND/OR- AC~ON REQURED Refer to “Blank Display” section. (Table 7-3) 00 READY Proceed; printer is ready to use. 02 WARMING UP Wait until printer signals ready. 02 WARMING UP Refer to “02 WARMING UP(continuous) Message” section. (Table 7-4) (Continuously) 04 SELF TEST Continuous Self Test printing. 05 SELF TEST Self Test in progress. 06 PRINTING TEST Self Test printing. 06 FONT PRINTOUT Printing sample characters from available fonts. 07 RESET Returns all printer settings to Printing Menu setiings and clears buffered pages, temporary SORfonts, and macros. 08 COLD RESET Returns both Configuration and Printing Menu selections to the factory settings. See Chapter 3, Section 3-3. 09 MENU RESET Returns all Printing Menu items to factory setiings and clears buffered pages, temporary soft fonts, and macros. See Chapter 3, Section 3-3. Press and hold ~=~ (u.qtil,07 .RESETappears) to confirm the accepknce of Ptinting Menu selections (ternpor@ fonts, macros an-dbfiffered da% ‘All be deleted],‘-orpress-[~j or (~j (nochanges to any -selections~ll-be made at”tfis time). See ~ ~.ha.p. t..er3,-Sections 3.3 ‘and 3-4;- ~ 11 PAPER OUT Add media to the input tray. If problem continues, refer to the “11 (HP 3344o Only) PAPER OUTMessage” section. (Table 7-5) 12 PRINTER OPEN Close the Top Cover Assembly. If problem continues, refer to the “12 PRINTEROPENMessage” section. (Table 7-7) 13 PAPER JAM Open printer, clear any paper tithin the printer, and press [-] or (~) to reprint the page. If problem persists, refer to “13 PAPERJAMMessage” section. (Table 7-8) 14 NO EP CRT Instil an EP-S Cartridge. If problem continues, refer to the ‘(14 NO EPCARTMessage” section. (Table 7-17) 7-13, Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) 15ENGINE TEST Engine test with printout produced by pressing the Test Print button. 16 TONER LOW Replace EP-S Cartridge. If problem continues, refer to. “16 TONER LOWMessage” section. (Table 7-18) 20 ERROR Indimtes a memory ovefiow, too much data is being sent to the printer and the printer has ~~n out of memory. Pressing the ~-j key muses the printer to print only the information it has received. If the error persists, it may be necessa~ to simplify the print job (i.e., fewer fonts and less graphics information) or have the customer purchase additiond memo~. Indimtes that the information being sent to the printer is too complex for the printer (i.e., the formatting capabilities of the printer can not keep up with the formatting instructions being sent to it by the computer). H the error persists, it maybe necessary to simplify the job (i.e., reduce the number of characters or different fonts used, reduce the number of pixels addressed or cursor repositions, or reduce addressing the same ptiel location multiple times). With the HP 33449, this problem can dso be resolved by adding at least one additiond memory PCA and setting PAGEPROTEC[LTT=R, LGLor A4]. Indicates that the host computer and the printer are not communicating properly (i.e., the printer and computer baud rates may not match or the handshake protocol may be incompatible). Refer to Section 7-6, “Interface Troubleshooting.” Note: The printer supports the XONfiOFF (DC1/DC3) and DTR (Data Terminal Ready) handshake protocols. Both signals are sent from the printer during data transmission. The Enquire/Acknowledge (En@Ack) protocol is not supported by this printer. 40 ERROR Indicates that an error occurred during the transfer of data from the computer to the printer. Refer to Section 7-6, “Interface Troubleshooting,” for help. Note: This error occurs if the computer is powered down while the printer is on line or when attempting to use baud rates which do not match, 1-14 —.. —, Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) *SAGE . SWA~ON DESCR~ED AND/OR AC~ON REQ~RED 41 ERROR Indicates that a temporary error occurred in the printed page (see Table 7-20). If this error occurs, press the (-] key and the printer will repeat the page. Refer to Table 7-20 (“41 ERROR Checks”) in the “5 I ERRORMessage” section if the error persists. Note: This error most frequently occurs when a Beam Detect Error occurs. If the printer mnnot correct the error condition after tio seconds, a Beam Detect Mfinction (5i ERRORw) ill occur. Indimtes a communications problem has occurred between the Interface/Formatier PCA and the optional interface. Press the [-] key to resume printing. Reseat the Optional 1/0 PCA. If the error persists, refer to the documentation for the optional interface. 43 ERROR Indicates a communications problem has occurred be~een the Interface/Formatter PCA and the optional interface. If the error persists, refer to the documentation for the Optional 1/0 PCA. 50 SERWCE Power off the printer for a minimum of 10 minutes. If the problem continues, refer to the “50 SERVICEFuser Malfunction” section. (Table 7-19) 51 ERROR Indicates loss of laser beam for over 2 seconds. Refer to the “51 ERRORMessage” section. (Table 7-21) 52 ERROR Indicates smnner motor unable to maintain proper speed. Refer to the “52 ERRORSmnner Malfunction” section. (Table 7-22) 53 ERROR The 53 ERRORindimtes that the optional memory instiled in (HP 33440 O~y) the printer is NOT compatible with the Interface PCA. Use HP memory only. 7-15 —, Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) ~SSAGE S~A~”ON DESCRIBED AND/OR”. AC.fi6~: RE.QtiE~ j5 ERROR [ndi@tes a communications problem between the DC Controller PCA and the Interface/Formatter PCA. Undefined stitus has been exchanged between the two PCA’S or a status request has gone unanswered. Perform the Test Print operation to veri~ DC Controller functiondi@. If the message persists, check for any cable damage. If the message still persists, perform the following: 1. Ensure J209 jumper is in place on the DC Controller. 2. Verify proper DC voltages per Figure 7-2, “J21O Location.” 3. Replace the Interface/Formatter PCA.* 4. Replace the DC Controller PCA.* *HP 33440AB/AU only In some cases, both the DC Controller and Interface PCA will need to be replaced together. (See also Service Note 33440AB/AU-09.) j7-1 ERRORUNIT HP 33449 Only) j7-2 ERRORUNIT HP 33449 Only) 31 SERWCE Indicates a checksum error was detected during Self Test in the Interface/Formatter PCA ‘s program ROM. If the message persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 32 SERWCE Indicates a checksum error was detected in the Interface/Formatter PCA’S internal font ROM. If the message persisti, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 33 SERWCE Indimtes an error was detected in either the Interface/Formatier PCA’S Dynamic RAM or an Optional Memory PCA (if instiled). Remove any Optional Memory PCAS (if installed) and retest for the error. If the error message persisk, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 54 SERWCE Indicates a laser scan buffer error. Attempt to clear the error by power cycling the printer. If the error persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 55 SERWCE Indicates a dynamic RAM controller error. Atiempt to clear the error by power cycling the printer. If the error persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 57 SERWCE Indicates a miscellaneous hardware or address error on the Interface/Formatter PCA. Verify that dl cables, font cartridges, and accessories are seated. If the error persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 7-16 —., Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) ~SSAGE S~A~ON DESCRIBED AND/OR AC~ON REQ~RED 68 ERROR Indiwtes a recoverable error has been detected in ~ (HP 33,449 Only) (Non-Volatile M). Press c-j to clear, then verify the Control Panel menu settings: one or more menu items have been reset to their fatiory default settings during error recovery. If this condition persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA, 68 SERWCE Indicates a ~ (Non-Volatfie W) failure has occurred (HP 33440 and HP 33449) requiring replacement of the Interface/Formatter PCA. The printer mn be operated without ~ until that time. Press (~j 68 READY/SERWCE to clear the display. All Control Panel values are set to their factory (HP 33449 Only) default settings. The 00 READYmessage becomes 68 READY/SERVICE to remind the user of the problem. 69 SERWCE Indimtes a timeout error has occurred between the Interface/Formatter PCA and the Optional 1/0 PCA. Refer to the 1/0 Interface documentation. Remove the Optional 1/0 PCA and retest. If the message persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 70 ERROR The firmware mrtridge was not designed for this printer. Turn the (HP 33449 Only) printer OFF, then back ON. If the error persisti, verify with the mrtridge vendor whether the wrtridge was specifidly designed for this printer. 71 ERROR The firmware mtiridge was not designed for this printer. Turn :HP 33449 Only) the printer OFF, then back ON. If error persists, veri~ with the mrtridge vendor whether the mrtridge was specifidly desi~~d for this printer. 72 SERWCE The font mrtridge was removed too quic~y after it was inserted. :HP 33449 Only) Turn the printer OFF, then back ON. This message mn dso result from a bad font mrtridge or bad connectors on the Formatter PCA. 79 SERWCE An unexpected error has been encountered. Document error HP 33449 Only) message. Turn the printer OFF, then back ON. If the message persists, proceed as follows: Solid Remove memory PCAS and font macro, and persondi~ mrtridges one at a time. If the problem persists and the printer has an Optional 1/0 PCA instiled, try a different interface (parallel or serial) if possible. If the problem continues, replace the Formatter PCA. Intemittenti Have the customer remove, for a period of time, any non-HP hardware/firmware products atiched to the printer. If the problem continues during this test period, replace the Formatter PCA. Error message documentation should be returned with the defective component. 7-17, Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) 3C LOAD [envelope size] A user request has been made for an envelope size not currently instiled in the printer or the tray is out of envelopes. Load the correct envelope in the envelope tray. Insert a loaded tray and select the loaded envelope size from the Control Panel or press ~ to override. If the problem continues, see the “ii PAPER OUTMessage” section. (Table 7-5) ([Envelope size] may be one of the following coMio, MONARC,5 or DL.) ?C LOAD [paper size] This message is displayed whenever there is a user request for a paper size that is not currently installed in the printer (per the Tray Size mitches) or the input tray is out of media. Insert the proper loaded tray into the printer or press {-) to override. If the problem persists, see the “ii PAPEROUTMessage” section. (Table 7-5) ([Paper size] may be one of the following A4, EXEC,LETTERo,r LEGAL.) PE FEED [envelope size] A user request has been made to manually feed an envelope of ]r the indimted size. Feed the envelope through the manual feed PE FEED E~LOPE slot or press (-~ to feed from the tray. If the manual feed operation is not working as expected, perform the “Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) Functional Check’ described in this section. PF FEED [paper size] A user request has been made to manually feed paper of the indicated size. Feed paper through the manual feed slot or press ~ to feed from the tray. If the manual feed operation is not working as expected, perform the “Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) Functional Check” described in this section. E~LOPE = [env. size] This message is displayed whenever an envelope tray is insetied in {HP 33440) the printer. The user must tell the printer what size envelopes are being used by scrolling through the choices (using the ~ and ~ keys) and pressing the ~-j key to make the new selection. Press ~~j or ~~j to proceed. If an envelope tray is not being used when this message occurs, reseat the tray. If the problem continues, see “Tray Size Switches Functional Check” in this section. ([Envelope size] may be one of the following COMIo, MONARC,5 or DL.) 7-18, ..m Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued).~SSAGE ,. ,..S~A~ON DESCR@ED ~/OR AC~ON REQURED FC [LEFT/RIGHT/BOTH] Font mrtridge(s) were removed or replaced while the printer W- off tine and contained buffered data. Reinsert mrtridge(s) and press the ~-j or ~-~ key. If the problem continues, try another font mrtridge before replacing the Interface/Formatter PCA, =foi~- replacing the I FE CARTRIDGE A mtiridge has been removed while the printer was on line. Turn printer OFF, reinsert the mrtridge, and turn printer ON. If the problem continues, try another mrtridge before replacing the Interface/Formatter PCA. 7-19, ._, Blank Display m Ml information displayed on the printer’s Control Panel is generated by the Interface/Formatter (1/F) PCA. The I/F PCA provides dl voltages and display information to the Control Panel, and the Control Panel cable connects the Interface/Formatier PCA to the Control Panel. A blank display panel is the result of one of the following malfunctions: E Service Mode was initiated with no follow through. ■ The printer cannot generate sufficient voltiges to illuminate (enable) the display panel. ■ The display panel, its related cabling, or its drive circuitry is defective. Note The test pattern produced by pressing the Test Print Button is exclusively created by the DC Controller PCA. The printer’s Control Panel and Interface/Formatter ~$ PCA may be removed from the printer and the test would still be functional. If a print engine Test Print pattern can be created once the fuser reaches its operating temperature and dl voltages are correct, the problem is more likely a defective Control Panel, Control Panel cable, or Interface/Formatter PCA. Table 7-3. Blank Display 1. Is the printer’s ON/OFF switch set to ON? Power ON printer. 2. Is AC power available at the input power Verify input power. receptacle? 3. Is the power cord fully inserted in the rear of Veri@. the printer? 4. Is the Lower Cooling Fan operational? If no aitiow can be detected at the lower right (Indicates +5 and + 24A voltages are present.) rear of the printer (below the Power Switch), proceed with the DC Voltage Functional Check which follows this table. 5. Are the + 5V and GND screws on the Verify that screws are fully tightened and that Interface/Formatier PCA loose or missing? voltage is available to the I/F PCA. 6. Are the display electronics malfunctioning? Perform the following steps while power-cycling the printen 1. Remove any 1/0 mbles to the host system. 2. Reseat the Control Panel Cable. 3. Replace the Control Panel. 4. Replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 5. Replace the DC Controller PCA. 6. Replace the Control Panel Cable. 7-20, DC Voltage Functional Check The DC Power Supply Assembly receives AC voltige from the AC Power Module and converts this power into three DC voltage levels. The presence of these DC voltages maybe checked at connector J21O on the DC Controller PCA (see Figure 7-2). [ J2 I ()-[) = +5 Vdc r J21O-5 = -5 Vdc J21~.I = +24 vd~I
● ☛☛☛✎✎✎ ✎ ✎ ✎ ✚☛☛☛☛☛☛ ● ☛☛ 13 517 97II+24v I -5V +5V Figure 7-2. J210 Location The J21O connector is located on the right side lower base of the printer nefi to the Test Print Bution. Using a DW, veri~ the +24, ~ 5, and +5 voltages (*5%-) are present at the specified pins using chassis ground as a reference. H ML of these voltages are missin~ 1. Check Fuse F1 on the DC Power Supply Assembly. (See Figure 7-3.) 2. Ensure the proper AC Power Module and DC Power Supply Assembly are installed per the available AC line voltage. 3. Perform the “AC Power Functional ChecN’ on the following page. H ~ of these voltages are missing 1. Ensure the proper AC Power Module and DC Power Supply Assembly are instiled per the available AC line voltage. 2. Remove any accessory memory, font/firmware cartridges, or optional 1/0. 3. Replace the DC Power Supply Assembly. 4. Replace the DC Controller PCA. Note The absence of any voltage maybe the result of a defective component elsewhere 8 in the printer. If this is suspected, disconnect one cable at a time from the DC &-,?o :: &:.:j.. Controller PCA and power cycle the printer until the voltage comes up. Use the printer wiring diagram (see Section 7-7) to then identi~ the defective assembly. ‘m 7-21, AC Power Functional Check The AC Power Module distributes AC power to the DC Power Supply Assembly and to the Fusing &sembly. If any DC voltages are present in the printer, AC power is dso present and the following procedures can be omitied. Jumpers \ Figure 7-3. Fuse FI Location Veri& that AC power is being input to the DC Power Supply Assembly as follows: 1. Power the printer OFF and remove the Main Body Covers. 2. Remove the printer’s Front Support Plate. Connect a voltmeter to J502-1 and to J502-3 of the DC Power Supply Assembly (see Figure 7-3), 3. Power on the printer. If the expected AC line voltage is not present at this point, replace the AC Power Module or the cable between the two assemblies. If line voltage is present, verify that Fuse F1 is not open. If Fuse F1 is good, the entire AC voltage path has been verified. Resume the DC Voltage Functional Check (see the previous page). 7-22 i., “02 WARMING UP” (continuous) Message During normal operation, the printer displays a 00 READYmessage within 90 seconds of power-on. If the 02 WARMINUGPmessage persists for longer than 90 seconds, check the following Table 7-4.02 WARMING UP (continuous) Checks 1. Are there host system interface problems? Disconnect the interface wble from the printer, power printer OFF, then ON, May be caused by a parallel cable connected to a serial port or vice-vers% both serial and parallel.cables attached, or a bad host interface. 2. Is J209 fiumper) instiled on the DC Instil jumper. Controller? 13. Is the Control Panel mble fully connected? lReseat/replace the Control Panel cable. 14. Is the Control Panel Assembly inoperative? lReplace the Control Panel Assembly. 15. Is the Interface/Formatter PCA inoperative? \Replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. “11 PAPER OUT” Message “PC/EC LOAD” Message Two conditions result in the 11 PAPER OUT (HP 33440) or PC LOAD [paper size]/EC LOAD [envelope size] (HP 33449) messages; first, the absence of the input tray and, second, the absence of media in the tray. The tray is sensed as the tray identifier tibs contact one or more of the three tray identifier microtitches in the tray input mvity of the printer. Under normal conditions, the PC/EC LOADmessage is dso generated when a paper or envelope size other than what is loaded in the printer is died for by the user or sotiare. The Paper Sensing Arm is lomted in the paper input area of the printer. During normal operation, the Paper Sensing Arm flag rests on the media instiled in the paper tray. The Sensing Arm flag is attached to a shti. The opposite end of the shfi is a photointerrupter that rotates through the PS301 (paper out) and PS302 (manual feed) sensors on the Paper Control PCA. When the tray is empty, the Paper Sensing Arm flag swings through an opening in the base plate of the tray, allowing the photointerrupter to rotate and block sensor PS301. The same Paper Sensing Arm is also used for manual feed operation. When media is inserted in the manual feed slot atop the input tray cover, the photointerrupter rotites toward the rear of the printer and blocks sensor PS302 on the Paper Control PCA. This indicates to the DC Controller PCA that media is in position for manual feed. Nate The following checks are applicable to both “false paper out” or “undetected paper out” conditions. The undetected paper out condition will normally result in a 13 ,P8 PAPERJAMerror with no paper in the input tray. w 7-23, Table 7-5. “11 PAPER OUT” or “PC/EC LOAD” Message Checks 1. Is there any media in the paper tray? [nstil media. 2. Is the proper paper tray fully insetied in the Push the tray into the printer until it contacts printer? the tray identifier microswitches. 3. Are any of the tray identifier protrusions Inspect the tray for damage. If damaged, broken on the paper tray? replace the tray. (See Figure 7-5.) 4. Is the Paper Sensing Arm broken? (See Inspect the arm for damage; if broken, replace Figure 7-4,) the arm. 5. Is anything hindering the Paper Sensing Veri& that the Sensing Arm swings through Arm movement? its full range of motion. Ensure the routing of various cables does not hinder Paper Sensing Arm movement. It maybe necessary to remove the DC Power Supply Assembly to closely inspect the arm’s motion. 6. Is sensor PS301 on the Paper Control PCA See the PS301 Functional Check which follows. functional? 7. Are dl paper tray size sensing microswitches See “Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, functional? SW203) Functional Check” which follows. 8. Does the Control Panel’s Paper/Envelope Correct setting to match tray me. setting match the tray being used? 9. Is the e~ected tray size being died for? Check the software application. 10. Is the READY indimtor flashing? Wait for a change in the display message after it stops flashing. ~ Eber Optic Gble Paper Sensing km ~I II I II
\ W ~Pa.er Control Figure 7-4. Paper Sensiflg Arm 7-24, Paper Out Sensor (PS301) Functional Check To check the functional operation of the Paper Out Sensor (via the Control Panel display), proceed as follows: 1. While the printer is ON and not in Manual Feed mode (i.e., Manual Feed indicator o~, remove the input tray from the printer. 2. With one hand, PUSH on the Iefi-most paper tray identifier switch (SW203), being careful not to push the Sensing Arm flag at this time. (See Figure 7-5.) If the printer returns to the READY state at this point: a. Replace the Paper Control PCA (PS301). b. Replace the DC Controller. 3. With the other hand, PULL the Paper Sensing Arm flag toward the front of the printer while obseting the printer’s display. If PS301 is functioning correctiy, the display will alternate from PC/EC LOAD[size] or 11 PAPEROUTto 00 READYas the Sensing Arm is moved. If the display does not alternate, the fault is either a bad Paper Control PCA (PS 301) or a bad DC Controller PCA. Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) Functional Check To check the operation of PS302 (the Manual Feed sensor) via the Control Panel display, proceed as follows: 1. After powering up the printer with 00 READYin the display, change menu item MANUAFLEED= to ONand PAPER=to LETTER(HP 33449 only). (On the HP 33440, remember to toggle through the remaining menu items, then hold down the [CONTINUE\ RESET] key until 07 RESETappears in the display in order for the menu change to take effect.) The MANUAL indicator should now be ON. 2. Take the printer off line and remove the input tray. Note that the printer should remain in a READY state at this point. 3. Press the (PRINT FONTS) key. The FORM FEED indimtor should be ON and the 06 FONT PRINTOUTmessage should be foHowed by a PF FEEDLETTERmessage. 4. With one hand, PUSH on the left-most tray identifier switch (SW203), being mreful not to push the Sensing Arm Flag at this time (see Figure 7-5). If the pickup roller begins to move at this point a. Replace the Paper Control PCA (PS302). b. Replace the DC Controller PCA. 5. With the other hand, PUSH the Paper Sensing Arm flag toward the rear of the printer. If the Pickup Rollers do not move at this point a. Replace the Paper Control PCA (PS302). b. Replace the DC Controller PCA. 7-25, -. Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, SW203) Functional Check ● The paper tray size microtitch levers are lomted on the lower right side of the paper tray cavity. The microswitches indicate the presence and size of the instiled paper tray to the DC Controller. The switches are activated by protrusions located on the rear of the paper tray. When the tray is inserted, the protrusions activate (engage) the microswitches (refer to Figure 7-5 below.) Table 7-6. Configuration of Tray Size Sensing Switches IA4 I ON I ON I OFF I Legal I OFF I OFF I ON I Envelope (Size set via Control Panel) OFF ON ON Letter ON OFF OFF No Tray Instiled OFF OFF OFF Note: ON = Engaged Metal Plate Microswitch Levers (Slanted) in Paper Identifier Tabs Figure 7-5. Tray Size Sensing Microswitches Locations Operational Check To check the operation of these Wtches (via the printer’s Control Panel display), perform the following 1. Power on the printer and WOW it to vvarrn Up (to 00 READY).Remove the paper tray and ensure printer is not in the Manual Feed mode. 2. With one hand, Pm forward on the Paper Sensing Arm. 7-26, 3. With the other hand, PUSH switch SW203 (the left-most microswitch) while obseting the Control Panel display. (See Figure 7-5). 4. When the switch is functioning properly, the display will change to 00 READY. 5. Repeat above procedure, but push switch SW201 (the right-most microswitch). The display should change to 00 READY. 6. Repeat above procedure, but push switches SW202 and SW201 (the right two switches) simultaneously. The display should change to ENVELOPE[=s ize] (HP 33440) or PE TRAY=[size] (HP 33449). If the display does not change as specified, replace the DC Controller PCA or the switch lever arms as appropriate. Electri~l Check A continui~ check can be performed on these switches on the DC Controller PCA. “12 PRINTER OPEN” Message The 12 PRINTEROPENerror indication tells the operator to close the printer’s Top Cover Assembly. The DC Controller PCA detects this condition due to the absence of the +24B Vdc supply. When the printer’s Top Cover Assembly is closed, a protrusion on the cover eztends into the DC Power Supply Assembly and closes the switch within this module. The closing of this switch provides + 24B Vdc to the DC Controller PCA. On the DC Controller PCA, the +24B Vdc power is distributed to the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly and to a +3.2 Vdc regulator on the PCA. The output from the +3.2 Vdc regulator is the power source for digiti-to-andog circuit~ on the DC Controller PCA. Table 7-7. “12 PRINTER OPEN” Checks 2. Is the protrusion on the Top Cover Assembly Vlsudly inspect. Correct if missing or broken. which activates the DC Power Supply microswitch missing or broken? 3. Is the printer plugged into the correct power Verify printer power rating. Refer to Chapter 1, source? Section 1-2, of this manual. Note: Plugging a 220 V model printer into a 120 V Voltige source will result in a 12 PRINTER OPENerror. 4. Is the DC Power Supply Assembly correctly Visually inspect. Reseat module if necessary. seated into its connectors on the DC Controller PCA? 5. Is the DC Power Supply Assembly defective? See the “+ 24B Vdc Electrid Check” following. 6. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? See the “+ 24B Vdc Electrid Check)) following. 7-27, +24B Vdc Functional Check For an explanation of the source of the +24B Vdc power, read the overview for the “12 PRINTER OPEN” message on the previous page. To verify if the +24B Vdc power supply is functional, proceed as follows: 1. Remove the access cover(s) to the test connector (J21O, next to the Test Print Button). 2. Using a voltmeter with frame ground as a reference, monitor the voltage at J21O-11 while manually activating the printer Top Cover Assembly closed microswitch (see Figure 7-6 and Figure 7-7). The measured voltage should toggle from zero to +3.2 Vdc (*5%) as the switch is activated. If the voltage is present yet the message persists, replace the DC Controller PCA. If the voltige is not present, + 24B Vdc (*5%) can be measured at J212-13 (bottom cover must be removed) while activating the Top Cover Assembly closed microswitch (see Figure 7-6). If + 24B is not presen~ replace the DC Power Supply Assembly. If +24B is present but + 3.2 V is not the DC Controller PCA is defective. ~ InsefNi on-MetalliC Object into Opening to tilvate Microswitch Figure 7-6. Defeating the Top Cover Assembly Microswitch w ‘2’0 I +3.2V +24~ I -5V I +5V Figure 7-7. J210 Test connectorTest Point 7-28, “13 PAPER JAM” Message To better understand the components involved with paper movement through the printer, refer to Figure 7-8 and the accompanying descriptions. To veri~ proper paper movement, refer to ~lowchart 7-3 (Paper Movement Troubleshooting Flowchart). \ \ 1/?’-1 r—’_ / –1 , )~ Figure 7-8. Paper Path Vs Paper sensors Paper Path Components and finctions (refer to Fi@re 7-8): Item Description 1. Paper Tray. Contains paper to be printed. 2, Manual Feed Input Tray. Lomted on the lid of the Paper Tray; adjustable for various tidths of paper, 3. Atiliary Paper Guide. Guides paper to the Paper Pickup Roller. 4. Paper Sensing Arm. Used for detecting paper during manual feed and for detecting out of paper conditions. 5. Paper Pickup Roller. Makes one rotation during paper feed process to advance paper to the Registration Rollers. 6. Separation Pad. Works in conjunction with the Paper Pickup Roller to ensure that only one sheet of paper is fed to the Registration Rollers. 7. Paper Guide. Guides paper toward the Registration Rollers. 8. Registration Rollers. Temporarily holds paper until the leading edge is aligned with the image on the EP-S Cartridge’s photosensitive drum. 7-29, 9. Transfer Guide. Guides paper onto the Transfer Corona. 10. Transfer Roller. Assists in moving paper onto the Transfer Corona. 11. Transfer Corona and Provides a positive charge to transfer the electrostatic toner image Static Teeth Assembly. to the paper and help separate the paper from the drum. 12. Feed Roller. Advances paper onto the Feed Guide Assembly. 13. Photosensitive Drum. Creates and holds the electrostatic toner image. 14. Feed Guide Assembly. Guides paper toward the Fusing Assembly. 15. Fuser Feed Guide. Guides the paper toward the Fusing Roller. 16. Upper Fusing Roller. Provides heat to fuse the toner image to paper. 17. Lower Pressure Roller. Provides pressure to ensure the toner image is permanently fused to paper. 18. Fuser Etit Paper Guide. Guides paper be~een the fuser pick-off pawls (claws) and the fuser delivery rollers. 19. Paper Etit Sensor. Detects the presence of paper in the Fuser Assembly. 20. Fuser Delivery Rollers. Assists paper in etiting the Fuser Assembly. 21. Deflectors. Deflects paper eating the fnser to either the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray or the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 22. Face-Up Output Tray. Mlows paper to stack face-up in reverse order, minimizing curvature produced by the paper path. 23. Efit Area Paper Guide Guides paper to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. (Upper). 24. Efit Area Paper Guide Guides paper to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. (Lower). 25. Etit Delivery Rollers Delivers paper the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. (Lower). 26. Etit Delivery Ro~ers Delivers paper the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. (Upper). 27. S&tic Charge EEminator. Removes residud static charges from the paper. 28. Face-Down Output Tray. Stacks output in correct order, but face down. 7-30, Paper Jam Detection Any paper movement problem normally restits in a paper jam indimtion. Ml paper jam detection centers around the Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) on the Thermistor/Exit Sensor PCA being interrupted by the Exit Sensing Arm photointerrupter on the Fusing Assembly. This sensor detects the presence or absence of paper and inputs this information to the main DC Controller microprocessor where it is stored in memory. From this information, the microprocessor determines when a paper jam has occurred. The following conditions result in a paper jam 1. When paper does not reach the Fusing Assembly within a specified time. 2. When paper does not clear the Fusing Assembly within a specified time (dependent upon current paper size as determined by SW201, SW202, and SW203 on the DC Controller PCA). 3. When paper is present in the Fusing Assembly at printer power ON and the fuser temperature is lower than 150° C. To effectively troubleshoot a paper jam problem, the position of the leading and lagging edges of the media must be noted. The rest of this section is subdivided according to the position of any jammed paper (or other media) in the printer. Table 7-8. “13 PAPER JAM” Checks CHEC@ AC~ON 1. Is there media in the input tray? If not, refer to “Paper Out Sensor (PS301) Functional ChecV’ earlier in this section. 2. Does the error occur at initial power-on or If so, clear any media from the Fusing whenever the Top Cover Assembly is closed? Assembly. If the problem persists, see Table 7-16, “Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Check.” 3. Can the printer support the media being Retest using suppotible media. (See Chapter 2 used? for media information.) 4. Does the leading edge of the media reach the If not, begin with Table 7-9, “Paper Feed Area Registration Rollers? Checks.” 5. Does the media enter the Fusing Assembly? If not, see Table 7-14, “Registration/Transfer Area Checks.” 6. Does the media actually (visibly) jam after Yes: See Table 7-15, “Exit Area Checks.” reaching the Fusing Assembly? No: 1. If using the Manual Feed slot, ensure the proper size paper is being used. 2.” Perform “Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, SW203) Functional Check” earlier in this section. 3. See Table 7-16, “Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Check.” 7-31, Hint Paper movement through the printer can be visually observed by initiating a TEST PRINT operation with the Top Cover Assembly open. To do this, open the ● ,! Top Cover Assembly and defeat the Top Cover Interlock Switch. With one hand, * hold down one of the Drum Sensitivi@ Microswitches (see Figure 7-17) and, with the other, press the TEST PRINT bution on the lower right side of the printer. This should feed paper up to the point it enters the Fusing Assembly. By holding down the fusing system drive lever (see Figure 7-15), the paper will continue through the Fusing Assembly as well. Note that there will be a momentary pause in paper movement, followed by an ERROR 51 indimtion. This is normal operation since the Laser Shutter Arm, normally engaged by the EP-S Cartridge, does not allow laser light to reach the beam detect mble. Paper Feed Area Checks The following procedures are designed to help identi~ any component(s) –from the Input Tray to the Registration Ro~ers-that are failing or marginal, musing paper feed problems that result in a “13 PAPER JAM’7 indimtion. Table 7-9. Paper Feed Area Checks 2. Is the Paper Tray defective? See Table 7-11, “Paper Tray Checks.” .. 3. Is the Paper Pickup Solenoid (SL301) See Table 7-12, “SL301 Checks.” ● operational? 4. Are the Feed Roller and Separation Pad See Table 7-13, “Paper Feed Mechanid Assemblies operational? Checks.” 7-32, Main Motor (Ml) Functional Check The Main Motor drives d] moving components in the paper path (see Chapter 5, Section 5-3, Figures 5-13 and 5-15). The printer’s Main Motor is a four-phase stepping motor controlled by the submicroprocessor on the DC Controller PCA. Motor operation begins when the Print (PRNT) signal is generated by the main microprocessor on the DC Controller PCA. Four output control signals from the DC Controller PCA (A, ~, B, and ~) are input to the DC Power Supply Assembly and are used to control the Main Motor. During normal operation, the Main Motor is enabled three seconds prior to paper being delivered to the Registration Rollers. The Main Motor remains enabled until dl printing is completed and dl paper has been moved to the output tray. The Main Motor, under normal conditions, is driven for one second at printer powerup. Table 7-10. Main Motor Checks 1. Is the Main Motor connector firmly seated Vlsudly inspect. Reseat connector if necessary. into J3 on the DC Power Supply Assembly? ‘2. Is the DC Power Supply Assembly correctly Visually inspect. Verify that dl pins are making seated into its connector. contact with their connectors and that no pins are bent or damaged. 13. Is the DC Power Supply Assembly defective? ISee the following Functional Check. 4. Is the Main Motor defective? See the following Functional Check. 15. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? ISee the following Functional Check. To verify that the Main Motor is operational, perform the following 1. With the printer powered ON, open the printer Top Cover Assembly. 2. Defeat the Top Cover Assembly Interlock and EP-S Cartridge Instilled/Drum Sensitivi@ MicroSwitches. 3. Press the TEST PRINT button and observe the Main Motor and the gear train. If the fuser temperature is greater than 150° C (00 READYon Control Panel), motor operation begins as soon at the Test Print button is pressed. If the Main Motor is not operating, change the following assemblies in the order listed: 1. DC Power Supply Assembly. 2. Main Motor. 3, DC Controller PCA. Note If the Test Print button does not appear to be operational, ensure that Manual ,8 Feed has not been selected (i.e., set to ON) and that the fuser is warmed up (00 b READYon the Control Panel display). w 7-33, Paper Tray Checks The following tible describes checks for potential paper tray problems. Table 7-11. Paper Tray Checks If there is too much paper in the tray, unnecessa~ pressure may be placed on the Paper Pickup Roller resulting in a paper jam. Remove the excess paper. (Note: This condition may have permanently damaged the Pickup Roller clutch.) 2. Is the paper tray fully inserted in Push the paper tray fully into the printer. If the tray is the printer? not square with the printer, remove the tray, lomte the problem, and correct it. 3. Is the paper tray lid fully seated on Seat the paper tray lid. the main body of the paper tray? 4. Does the meti plate (bottom of With the tray removed from the printer, verify that tray) move up and down freely? nothing is hindering the tray plate’s movement. If the plate does not move freely, replace the tray. 5. Does the printer’s lift mechanism While instiling the tray in the printer, observe if the lift the tray’s meti plate up when the plate moves up, positioning the paper against the Paper tray is intiled in the printer? Pickup Roller. If the lifi mechanism does not lift the paper, correct or replace the mechanism. 6. Are any of the tray identifier Examine the tray for damage (refer to Figure 7-9). If any protrusions broken? protrusion is broken, replace the tray. 7. Are any of the tray identifier Examine the paper tray cavity in the printer for microswitch levers damaged? microswitch lever damage (refer to Figure 7-9). If the levers are damaged, replace them. .LocMng PWer Out Access Hole Metal Plate Levers Identifier Tabs Figure 7-9. Paper Tray 7-34, Paper Feed Mechanical Checks The purpose of solenoid SL301 is to allow the Paper Pickup Roller to pick one sheet of paper from either the paper tray or the mwud feed tray and advance the paper to the Registration Rollers. Since the Registration RoUers are not turning at this time, the paper will be bowed slightiy as it enters the &gistration Rollers (see Figure 7-11). Paper pickup operation is initiated by the DC Controller’s main microprocessor. The Cassette Pickup Drive (CP~) signal from the microprocessor energizes the pickup solenoid (SL301) (see FiWre 7-10). The energizing of the solenoid engages the paper pickup clutch. The enga@ng of the clutch allows the Paper Pickup hller to make one rotition, picking up one sheet of paper and advancing the paper to the Regitimtion Rollers. The Separation Pad acts to prevent more than one page being advanced to the Registration Rollers should more than one piece of paper leave the input tray. HINT If an ovetidled paper tray results in subsequent paper jams, the Feed Roller Assembly has probably suffered permanent damage and will require replacement. Pick-up Roller Figure 7-10. Feed Roller Assembly Operation Registration Rollers Paper (awed) Pickup RolleroIo0 -~o0 Separation Pad Paper Stack c= Figure 7-11. Paper Positioned in the Regis&ation Rollers 7-35, Table 7-12. SL301 Checks Visually inspect the solenoid. 2. Does the Paper Pickup Roller Remove the paper tray cover. Observe the Paper Pickup rotite? Roller from the front of the Paper Tray while performing a Test Print. Note whether the Pickup Roller rotates. If the roller does not rotite, refer to the procedures following this table. 3. Are dl the pins of the Paper Visually inspect and correct as necessary. Control PCA seated properly into the DC Controller PCA connector in the printer’s base plate? 4. Is SL301 operational? Perform the following checks. Paper ControlPCA
SL301 Functional Check With the Main Body Cover Assembly (top cover panel only for the HP 33449) removed, observe the Pickup Roller while the printer is performing its Test Print function. Observe whether solenoid SL301 is being energized. If solenoid SL301 is energized, the Main Motor (Ml) is operating, and the Pickup Roller does not turn one full revolution, replace the Feed Roller Assembly. If solenoid SL301 is not being energized, perform the following electrid check. 7-36 .— ., SL301 Electrical Check Remove the Bottom Covers. Solenoid SL301 may be electrimlly checked, using frame ground as a reference, by monitoring J213-04 (CPUD) while performing a TEST PRINT. The voltage should ~tch from OVdc to + 5 Vdc (enabled). If the voltage changes but SL301 is NOT being energized, replace the Paper Control PCA (on which SL301 is mounted). If the voltage does not change, replace the DC Controller PCA. Note: Since this is a momentary signal, an oscilloscope may be required to view it. Table 7-13. Paper Feed Mechanical Checks 1. Does the paper have a slight If the roller is picking paper, yet the paper is not entering bow (bucMe) when it contacts the the Registration Rollers, the Feed Roller Assembly Registration Rollers? (See Figure is either worn or installed incorrectly. Replace the 7-11.) Feed Roller Assembly and Separation Pad. See the following “Feed Roller Assembly Functional ChecK’ for verifimtion. 2. Is the flat surface of the Paper If the flat portion of the roller does not face the pad when Pickup Roller facing the Separation in the idle state, the roller is installed incorrectly or is Pad? defective. Replace the Feed Roller Assembly as described in Chapter 6. 3. Is more than one page being fed to Multiple pages being fed from the input tray is a result of the Registration Rollers? the media having a poor cutting edge, a worn Separation Pad, or a damaged paper tray. Resolve as appropriate. Feed Roller Assembly Functional Check If the Feed Roller Assembly is excessively worn, paper will not be pulled completely to the Registration Rollers. To verify, measure the distance from where the trailing edge of the paper momentarily stops to the front of the paper tray (see Figure 7-13). The trailing edge of the paper should stop about 3.5 inches (95mm) from the front fence of the paper tray. If the paper has not advanced the specified distance, replace the Feed Roller Assembly and Separation Pad.I Printer
\ / m —n. ~-–_ .- I 3.5 inches (95mm) 1L–—, - “’“+ —k)JII
6 Front Fence ,/ Of The Paper PaperTray Tray Figure 7-13. Feed Roller Wear 7-37, Registrationflransfer Area Checks The Registration Assembly aligns the leading edge of the paper with the print image on the photoconductive drum. Drive to the Registration Rollers is provided by the Main Motor via the Registration Roller clutch (SL302). During normal operation, the Main Motor is continuously operational tier receiving the print (PRNT) command. The Registration Rollers are not rotating since they are held in position by solenoid SL302’S lotting lever. Following Main Motor startup, the Feed Roller Assembly first feeds paper to the Registration Rollers. When the image on the photosensitive drum and the leading edge of the paper (which is being held in the Registration Rollers) are aligned, the DC Controller enables the REGD (Registration Roller Clutch Drive) signal that energizes solenoid SL302. The energizing of this solenoid engages the Registration Roller clutch, thereby allowing the rollers to advance the paper so that the image may be properly transferred to the paper at the transfer station. Registration Clutch Transfer Ground Defeat Tab Corona II Static Springs Upper Tra~sfer Registration Guide Roller Figure 7-14. Registration Assembly 7-38, Table 7-14. Registration/Transfer Area Checks Cmcm AC~ON 1. Are there any obstructions in the transfer Open the Top Cover Assembly of the printer area paper path? and visually inspect the transfer area. 2. Are the Registration Roller torsion springs Visually inspect the springs. Correct if they are in place? not in position. (See Figure 7-14). 3. Is the Upper Transfer Guide deformed? Inspect the guide. Hint: a quick check would be to lift up on the registration locking lever and verify if several sheets of paper (i.e., 2 or 3) can easily be slid under the Transfer Guide, 4. Is the Transfer Corona monofilament line Visually inspect the Transfer Corona Assembly hindering the paper path? and replace if necessary. 5. Are any of the drive gears excessively worn, Inspect the gears. Replace if necessary. dirty, or damaged? 6. Is the Main Motor operational? Perform the printer Self Test and visually observe if the motor is rotiting. See the “Main Motor (Ml) Functional Check’ (Table 7-10). 7. Is anything preventing the energizing of See “SL302 Functional Check” following this solenoid SL302 on the Paper Control PCA? table. 8. Are the Registration Assembly and clutch See the “Registration Assembly Functional operational? ChecR’ which follows. SL302 Functional Check With the printer ON, open the printer’s Top Cover Assembly. Defeat the printer’s Top Cover Assembly and EP-S Cartridge instiled interlock switches (see Figure 7-17). While performing a TEST PMNT, observe solenoid SL302. If the solenoid is not being energized, perform the following electrid check. SL302 Electrical Check Remove the Botiom Cover(s). Using FRAME GND as a reference, measure J213-03 (REGD) on the DC Controller PCA while performing a TEST PRINT. The voltage level should switch from O Vdc (disabled state) to +5 Vdc (enabled). If the voltage does not switch, replace the DC Controller PCA. If the voltige switches, but the solenoid is not energizing, replace the Paper Control PCA. =gistration Assembly Wctional Check If (1) SL302 is operating properly, (2) the Main Motor is fnnctiond, and (3) paper (or other media) is not moving smoothly through the Registration Assembly, the clutch or rollers may be excessively worn. If this is suspected, replace the Registration Assembly. Note A worn Feed Roller Assembly may ~so “catch” paper as the Registration Assembly is trying to move the paper through the printer. This normally resulti in an intermittent (i.e., once every 50 to 100 pages) overprint “band” on the page. d 7-39, Exit Area Checks The etit area of the printer consists of the Fusing Assembly, Delivery Assembly, and Face-Up (Rear) and Face-Down (Top) Output Trays. Paper first enters the efit area of the printer at the Fusing Assembly. In the Fusing Assembly, the paper is guided between the fusing and pressure rollers where the toner image is permanently fused to the paper. As paper etits the Fusing Roller, the Paper Pickoff Pawls pick the paper off the Fusing Roller. A Paper Etit Arm Flag and an associated sensor (PS331) detect paper as it enters and efits the Fusing Assembly, The main microprocessor on the DC Controller uses this signal (PDP) for monitoring paper jams. The paper then encounters the Deflector Pawls (claws) which route the paper to the desired output tray. In the downward position, paper is guided to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. In the upward position, paper is guided to the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray. Their position is controlled by the position of the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray. The delivery rollers in the Top Cover Assembly feed the paper to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. Drive for the Fusing Assembly is achieved when the printer Top Cover Assembly is closed. Closing the cover forces a molded protrusion in the rear portion of the Top Cover Assembly to push against a lever on the right end of the Fusing Assembly (see Figure 7-15). Pushing down this lever muses the main drive gears of the Fusing Assembly to engage with the drive gear train from the Main Motor. Drive to the Top Cover Assembly is provided by the Fusing Assembly when the Top Cover Assembly is closed via the Delivery Coupler Assembly (see Figure 7-15).APawi Springs
Door Tensioning Spring \b/ \\ \ VYIA\ Rear Door \\ Exit Sensor Arm Flag pier Assembly SepardonPawls &~ \ Door Tensioning Spring Figure 7-15. Paper Exit Area 7-40, Table 7-15. Exit Area Checks 1. Are there any obstructions in the paper Visually inspect. Open the top of the Fusing path? Assembly. Remove the cleaning pad and inspect the Fusing Roller. Open the rear door of the Fusing Assembly and inspect for obstructions. 2. Open the rear door of the Fusing Assembly. Visually inspect and clean if necessary (refer to Are the Fuser Separation Pawls correctiy Figure 7-15). attached to the rear fuser door with the tension springs? 3. Are the right and left fuser rear door Visually inspect, (refer to Figure 7-15). Replace tensioning springs in position? if damaged or missing. 4. Are the Paper Etit Sensor Arm and Visually inspect, (refer to Figure 7-15). Replace photointerrupter damaged or broken? Is if damaged. anything hindering the Paper Exit Sensor Arm’s motion? 5. Does the Paper Exit Sensor indimte the See the “Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Functional presence of paper to the DC Controller PCA? Check” following this table. 6. Is the Deflector Pawl Assembly correctly Visually inspect. When paper is to be directed positioned? (Refer to Figure 7-15). to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray, the front of the deflectors point downward and rest against the moulded protrusions on the rear exit panel. When paper is directed to the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray, the front of the pawls face forward. Verifi that the pawls are correctiy positioned under these conditions. 7. Is the Delivery Coupler Assembly correctiy The gears should be pointing downward as positioned? (Refer to Figure 7-15). shown in Figure 7-15. Is the gear tensioning spring riding on the meti frame of the hinge bracket? If the gears are out of position or the spring tab is bent or damaged, correct or replace. Not& Earlier Delivery Coupler Assemblies were manufactured with the spring riding on the top bracket surface. Newer assemblies are designed so that the spring rides on the rear bracket surface. 3. Is the Delivery Assembly damaged or Replace as necessary. excessivelyworn? 7-41, Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Functional Check The Paper Etit Sensor PS331 is lomted on the Mt Sensor PCA (see Figure 7-16), This sensor and an associated ~t Sensor Arm detect paper motion as the paper enters and etits the Fusing Assembly. The main microprocessor on the DC Controller uses this etit flag signal (PDP) for monitoring paper movement through the printer. Table 7-16. Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Check 1. Is the Etit Sensor Arm or photointerrupter Visually inspect and replace as necessary. damaged or broken? 2. Does the Etit Sensor indicate the presence Perform the fo~oting Operational and of paper to the DC Controller PCA? Electrid checks. Exit Sensor Photointerruptero00OOOOO.OOO Exit Sensor Measure the Voltage at this pin Arm Counter while moving the Photointerrupter. Weight 7-42, Qerational Check This will simulate a paper jam: 1. Power off the printer. 2. Remove the printer’s Main Body Covers (left cover only on the HP 33449). 3. Push and hold the bottom of the Etit Sensor Arm counterweight fully foward (toward the front of the printer) and power ON the printer. 4. If PS331 is functioning properly, the printer will display a 13 PAPERJAMerror after completing its warmup cycle. Power the printer OFF and allow the sensor arm to rotate to its normal position. The printer should now power up to the 00 READYstite. If the sensor is not functioning in this manner, perform the electrid check. Electtid Check Use the following procedure to perform the electrid check: 1. Remove the Bottom Cover(s). 2. Using FRAME GND as a reference, measure the voltige at J206-6 (PDP) on the DC Controller PCA while moving the Etit Sensor Arm counterweight back and forth. The voltage should toggle from OVdc to +5 Vdc. 3. If the voltage does not change states when the Etit Sensor Arm is moved, replace the Etit Sensor PCA. If the voltage changes but the printer continues to report “false” paper jams, replace the DC Controller PCA. You may dso measure the voltage on the Paper Etit Sensor PCA as shown in Figure 7-16 while moving the Etit Sensor Arm. The voltage should toggle from OVdc to +5 Vdc as referenced to frame ground. If the voltage does not change states while the photointerrupter is moved, replace the Etit Sensor PCA. If the voltage does change but the problem persists, the cable between the Fusing Assembly and the DC Controller– or the DC Controller itself– maybe at fault. 7-43, “14 NO EP CART” Message The 14 NOEP CARTinstiled message occurs when neither of the drum sensitivity switches (SW301 and SW302) on the Paper Control PCA is activated. When the EP-S Cartridge is instiled and the Top Cover Assembly is closed, the EP-S Catiridge drum sensitivi~ tabs contact micro~tches SW301 and SW302 on the Paper Control PCA (see Figure 7-17). The input from these ~tches is fed directiy to the submicroprocessor on the DC Controller PCA. This microprocessor uses these signals to regulate laser power output. SL301 SL302 Figure 7-17. EP-S Cartridge Sensitivity Switches 7-44, Table 7-17. “14 NO EP CART” Checks 1. 1san EP-S Cartridge instiled in the printer? Instil cartridge if necessary. 2. Is there at least one sensitivity tab on the Visually inspect. The EP-S Cartridge must EP-S Cartridge? have at least one sensitivity tab. If the cartridge has no tab, replace the EP-S Cartridge. 3. Is the Paper Control PCA firmly seated into Vlsudly inspect. Ensure that none of the pins its connector? are bent or damaged. 4. Is the Paper Control PCA defective? See the “Drum Sensitivity Switches (SW301 and SW302) Functional Check” following this table. 5. Is DC Controller PCA defective? See the “Drum Sensitivi@ Switches (SW301 and SW302) Functional Check” following this table. Drum Sensitivity Switches (SW301 and SW302) Functional Check The EP-S Cartridge Drum Sensitivi@ microtitches (SW301 and SW302) are located on the Paper Control PCA. If either microswitch is bad, the Paper Control PCA must be replaced. Operational Check 1. Open the printer’s Top Cover Assembly. 2. Defeat the Top Cover Assembly closed interlock switch in the DC Power Supply Assembly. 3, Press switch SW301 (refer to Figure 7-17). The display should change from 14 NOEP CARTto 00 READY. 4. Release SW301 and the Top Cover Assembly interlock switch and repeat steps 2 and 3, testing SW302. Again, the display should change from 14 NOEP CARTto 00 READY. If this test fails, either the Paper Control PCA or DC Controller PCA is defective. Proceed with the following Electrical Check to determine the failing component. Electrical Check Verify that the EP-S Cartridge In-Place/Drum Sensitivi@ microswitches are functional as follows: 1. Remove the printer’s bottom covers. 2. Using FWE GND as a reference, measure J213 pin 1 (CSENS1) and J213 pin 2 (CSENS2), respectively, on the DC Controller PCA. The measured voltage level should change from + 5 Vdc (switch open) to OVdc (switch closed) as referenced to frame ground. 3. If the voltiges DO NOT change while the titches are pressed, replace the Paper Control PCA. If the voltage levels change but the error message persists, replace the DC Controller PCA. 7-45, “16 TONER LOW” Message A toner sensing mechatism is lomted in the toner mvity of the EP-S Cartridge. The function of this mechanism is similar to an antenna, sensing the AC developer bias voltages applied to the developer tiure by the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. The output sensed by this antenna is input back to the High-Voltige Power Supply (TSENS), where it is amplified and input to the DC Controller to be compared agtinst a preset threshold value. If the toner level in the catiridge falls below the minimum level and, consequently, the monitored voltage level falls below the threshold level, the 16 TONERLOWmessage is displayed. Table 7-18. “16 TONER LOW” Checks 1. Is the EP-S Cartridge out of toner? Shake the EP-S Cartridge. If the message persists, replace the cartridge. 2. Are the toner level sensor connectors Inspect connectors for damage (see FiWres 7-18 damaged? and 7-19). If damaged, correct or replace. 3. Is the EP-S Cartridge defective? (See Figare Replace the EP-S Cartridge if visibly damaged. 7-19.) 4. Is the high-voltage connector cable, from the Visually inspect. Reseat or replace if necessary. base of the printer (J601) to the DC Controller PCA, fully seated or damaged? ,. 5. Is the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly See the “Toner Low Functional Check” defective? following this table. 6. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? See the “Toner Low Functional Check” following this table. Toner Low Functional Check Since there is no good way to measure whether the toner low sensing system is malfunctioning (i.e., the warning message is constantly being displayed or is never displayed), replace the following components in the order listed: 1. EP-S Cartridge. 2. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. 3. High-Voltage Power Supply Cable (from the DC Controller). 4. DC Controller PCA. 7-46, Grid of Primary Primary Drum Developing Toner Corona Corona Ground Bias Sensor Stat ic Teeth Transfer Connector Corona Spring Figure 7-18. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly Connector t Tab Toner kw &nsor Developing Mas tinne~or Drum Ground lever to Prima~ Grid m tinnector PrimaW tirona ~nnector Figure 7-19. EP-S Cartridge (50ttom view) 7-47, “41 ERROR” Message Two displays, 41 ERRORand 51 ERRORi,ndicate a laser beam detect problem. The 41 ERRORis displayed when the beam is “lost” for less than 2 seconds. An error condition of greater than 2 seconds will result in a 51 ERRORmessage. See the “51 ERRORMessage” section for a discussion of the 41 ERRORmessage condition. “50 SERVICE” Fuser Malfunction The purpose of the fusing system is to maintin a constant temperature on the Fusing Roller so that the toner image is permanently fused to the paper. A high intensity fusing lamp, located in the center of the Fusing Roller, provides the high temperature required for the fusing process. While the printer is in standby mode, a temperature of 165° C is maintained on the Fusing RoUer. While the printer is in printing mode, a temperature of 180° C is maintained. The main components of the fusing system are the fusing lamp and its associated fusing and pressure rollers, a Thermistor, Thermoprotector, and the AC controller/safety circuitry in the AC Power Module. AC voltige is applied to the fuser bulb via the AC Power Module circuitry which is regulated by the FUSER DR~ (FSRD) signal from the DC Controller PCA. Feedback to the DC Controller is provided by the Thermistor signal (FSRTH ). The thermoprotection switch is designed for over temperature protection and opens when the temperature reaches 210° C. Overcurrent protection for the fising system is provided by circuit breaker CB101 on the AC Power Module (see Figure 7-20). For troubleshooting the printer when resting on its side, microswitch SW205 on the DC Controller ., PCA provides additiond fusing system protection When the bottom cover of the printer is removed, the microswitch closes and a resistor is placed in parallel to the Thermistor circuitry. ● This resistice simulates the Fusing Roller at temperature and this prevents the fusing lamp from operating under this condition. The following conditions result in a fusing erroc 1. A temperature below 140° C. 2. A temperature above 230° C. 3. A condition wherein a temperature of 165° C is NOT reached within 90 seconds ~er power-up. If any of the fusing error conditions occur, the DC Controller posts a 50 SERVICEerror. The error cannot be cleared until the printer has been powered down for a ten-minute interval. Note E the printer displays 50 SERVICEerror, allow a ten-minute power down interval to elapse for the error to clear. Pt w — 7-48 .—, Table 7-19. “50 SERVICE” Fuser Malfunction Checks 1. Is the Fusing Assembly correctly seated into Vlsudly inspect. Ensure the connectors are its connectors on the AC Power Module and properly seated (no bent pins or pins outside base plate (right and left ends)? their receptacles). 2. Is the + 24A voltage present? Verify per Figure 7-2. I 3. Is the circuit breaker on the AC Power Reset breaker.* (See FiWre 7-20.) If the Module tripped? breaker trips again, replace the Fusing Assembly or the AC Power Module. 4. Is the Thermistor defective? Perform the Thermistor Functional Check which follows. 5. Is the Fuser Bulb open? Perform the Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Functional Check which follows. 6. Is the Thermoprotector open? Perform the Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Functional Check which follows. 7. Are the cable assemblies defective? If the fault is intermittent, replace the Fusing Assembly Cable to the DC Controller.* If the fault persists, replace the AC Power Module cable to the DC Controller. 8. Is the AC Power Module defective? Replace the AC Power Module.* 9. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? Replace the DC Controller PCA.* Press Here Figure 7-20. Fuser Circuit Breaker Reset 7-49, Thermistor Functional Check Under normal operating conditions, Thermistor resistance decreases as ik operating temperature increases. Because of this characteristic it is diffictit to measure an accurate resistance value for the Thermistor. However, some conclusions may be made concerning the condition of the printer Thermistor with a resistance check. Me&surethe Thermistor value using the following Electrical Check. 1. Power off the printer. 2. Remove the protective cover from the Iefi side of the Fusing Assembly to access the Exit Sensor PCA. 3. Measure the Thermistor’s resistance at J332, pins 1 and 2 (see Figure 7-21). At ambient room temperature (72° F, 23° C), the resistance should be approximately 1,130 kohms. If the printer has been operating for some time, the resistance value will be much lower. If the Thermistor appears to be either open or shorted, replace the Thermistor@tit Sensor PCA. 0s 0 ,Q12o .Oo 00 J3J2. m o 000000000OOOOOOO. O00Exit Sensor PCA i Uuuuuuu Figure 7-21. Thermistor Resistance at J332 7-50, Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Functional Check Electtiml Check The Fuser Bulb and the Thermoprotector are wired in series. To quictiy check these components, perform the following eledrid check procedure 1. Remove the Fusing Assembly. 2. Using an ohm meter, check for continui@ at the two pin connector (J103) at the right side of the Fusing Assembly (see Figure 7-22). 3. If an open condition is detected, either the Fuser Bulb or the Thermoprotector is open. To differentiate between an open Fuser Bulb and an open Thermoprotector, proceed as follows: a. Remove the screw securing the lefi side of the Fuser Bulb connector to the Thermoprotector connector. b. Verify the continuity of the bulb from ih connector wire to the rear connector of the two pin connector. If the bulb is open, replace the complete Fusing Assembly. E the bulb appears good, but the serial continui~ measurement indicates an open condition, replace the Thermoprotector. c Fusino Roller- Fuser Bulb \ // . Thermopr6tector Thermistor \ Figure 7-22. Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Check 7-51, “51 ERROR” Message Two displays, 41 ERRORand 51 ERRORi,ndimte a laser beam detect problem. The 41 ERRORis displayed when the beam is “lost” for less than 2 seconds. An error condition of greater than 2 seconds will result in a 51 ERRORmessage. A 41 ERROR(temporary Beam Detect Error) may occur during laser scanning operation. This error results when the beam detect signal falls outside the timing window established by the DC Controller PCA. If this situation occurs longer than an intend of ~o seconds, a 51 ERRORbeam detect malfunction will occur, The BEAM DETECT (~) signal is the horizonti synchronization signal indicating the beginning of a scan line. Once beam detect synchronization is achieved, video data may be transferred from the Interface/Formatter PCA to the DC Controller PCA to turn the laser diode on and off, thereby writing print data (in the form of dots) on the photosensitive drum. At the beginning of printer operation, the DC Controller enables the Laser/Scanning Assembly and sets up a timing window. The DC Controller expects to receive a beam detect signal during this window. Once received, dl data transfer is synchronized from the last beam detect signal. A “Beam Detect Malfunction” indicates that the laser beam is not being detected. Beam detection occurs during the scanning process as the laser light strikes the beam detect mirror. The mirror reflects this light to a fiber optic cable that carries it to a sensing diode on the DC Controller PCA. To prevent possible exposure to laser light, a safety interlock shutter has been incorporated into the design of the Laser/Scanning Assembly. The Laser Shutter Arm is located on a pivoting shaft below the Laser/Smnning Assembly. When the Top Cover Assembly of the printer is open or the r, EP-S Cartridge is missing, a blocking shutter within the Laser/Scanning Assembly blocks the path of laser light. A small tab on the edge of the EP-S Catiridge must contact the pivoting shutter ● lever before laser light is allowed to exit the laser ~vity. warning Although the infrared laser beam is invisible, eye damage can occur if direct 9 or indirect (reflected) eye contact with the laser beam should occur. Heed all CAUTIONS and WARNINGS when working with the laser unit. Be careful when u the fiber optic beam detect cable is detached since the laser light transmitted through the cable can also cause eye damage. 7-52, Table 7-20. “41 ERROR” Checks ,-.=..”-. AC~ON Thoroughly clean the Feed Guide Assembly. 2. Is the EP-S Cartridge defective? Replace the EP-S Cartridge and retest the printer. 3. Is the Transfer Corona clean? Physidly remove the Transfer Corona Assembly and clean thoroughly or replace if necessary. Clean the base of the printer below the Transfer Corona. 4. Is the Transfer Corona Roller grounding Veri& proper instigation as in Figure 6-30 in block positioned properly so as to provide a Chapter 6. ground path to the roI1er? 5. Does the Registration Assembly float Veri& that the ground defeat tib on the EP-S with respect to ground when the Top Cover Cartridge (Figure 7-19) is not damaged. With Assembly is closed? the ground defeat lever on the right side of the Registration Assembly (FiWre 7-14) pushed down, resistance between the Registration Assembly and ground should be 15 Mohm (* 5%). If the resistance is less than 15 Mohm, ensure the Registration Assembly is properly installed and clean as necessary to resolve the problem. 6. Are the *O 15 Mohm resistors and/or the 1 Perform a resistance check. Note that in order kohm resistor under the Registration Assembly to measure the 15 Mohm resistors with a open? standard 4; digit DVM on the “kohm)’ smle, the two resistors may have to be measured in parallel at 7,500 kohm *5%. 7. Is jumper J209 instiled on the DC Veri@ and instil if necessary. Controller PCA? 8. Is static electrici~ a problem? Verify humidity to be at least 20% RH. 9. Does the error persist? Refer to the “5 I ERRORBeam Detect Checks” tible which follows (Table 7-21). 7-53, Table 7-21. “51 ERROR” Beam Detect Checks 1. If intermittent, have checks 1-8 in Table 7-20 Perform verification procedures. (“41 ERRORChecks”) been performed? 2. Is –5 Vdc present? Veri& per Figure 7-2. If missing, replace the DC Power Supply. If –5 V is sti absent, replace the DC Controller PCA. 3. Is the laser shutter protrusion tab on the Vlsudly insped (see Figure 7-19). Replace the EP-S Cartridge broken or damaged? EP-S Cartridge if necessary. 4. Is the laser shutter interlock mechanism Carefully inspect the Laser Shutter Arm damaged? mechanism. If necessary, remove the Laser/Scanning Assembly and inspect the pivot lever. Replace the mechanism if damaged. 5. Is the Fiber Optic Cable between the Visually inspect the cable for damage and Laser/Scanning assembly and J201 of the DC ensure that it is seated properly. Is the cable Controller PCA correctiy seated into each damaged? If neceswry, remove the Fiber Optic respective assembly? Cable and shine a light through the cable to veri& light continui@. Replace the cable if damaged. Warnin& Do not use the laser light to perfom this test. 6. Are connectors J202 on the DC Controller Inspect connectors and wiring. Reseat or and J451 on the Laser Drive PCA properly replace cables if necessary. seated? 7. Is +5 Vdc present at J451-1 of the Laser Veri& voltage with voltmeter. If voltage is not Drive PCA? presen~ replace cable to DC Controller. 8. Is the Laser Unit defective? Veri& the laser power level per the following instructions. If the laser power is acceptable, replace the DC controller PCA. 9. Is the Laser/Scanning Cable Assembly Closely inspect cable assembly. Examine for damaged? damaged wire crimps at the connector ends of the assembly. Replace harness assembly if damage is suspected. Laser Power Verification Required Tools The following special tools are required for this verification procedure: ■ Laser Power Checker # TW-0198-OOOCN ■ Digiti Voltmeter (+/– 200mV DC Range) Laser Power Output Check The laser power circuit~ is not adjustable. However, if it becomes necessary to veri& the laser output, use the following procedures. 7-54, warniEg DO NOT place anything in the Laser/Scanning Assembly access hole other than the Laser Checker Tool. Although the laser beam is invisible, the reflectedB
,,. , beam could possibly damage the eye. @e<. 1. Switch the printer power to OFF and open the Top Cover Assembly. 2. Remove the printer’s Main Body Cover Assembly (on HP 33449, the top cover panel). 3. Heed the Laser Safe@ Label attached to the top of the Laser/Scanning Assembly to avoid possible injury. 4. Keep the Control Panel connector attached to the printer so the display can be read. 5. Open the plate covering the access hole for the laser power checker tool on the Laser/Scanning Assembly. Instil the laser power checker tool into the opening (see Figure 7-23). 6. Connect the laser power tool leads to a digiti multimeter and set the range to 200 mV DC. 7. Defeat the top-cover-in-place microswitch. Press down both EP-S Cartridge Drum Sensitivity Mlcroswitches (SW301 and SW302). 8. Switch the printer’s power ON. — Note When the laser tool is instiled in the printer, only one page of the Self Test will run before a 51 ERROR(Beam Detect Malfunction) appears on the printer’s display d panel. The laser power checker tool must have been dibrated within the last year to be effective. 9. With the laser tool instiled (see Figure 7-23), the interlock switches defeated, and the voltmeter connected, perform a self test and veri~ the laser output. The measured output should be 17.6 (f 1.6) millivolts. If this laser power cannot be measured, replace the following assemblies in the order listed 1. Laser/Scanning Assembly. 2. Laser/Scanning Cable Assembly to the DC Controller. 3. DC Controller PCA. Laser Power Checker Tool Laser/Scanner Figure 7-23. installing Laser Power Checker Tool 7-55, “52 ERROR” Scanner Malfunction The scanner motor is a flat brushless, +24 Vdc motor. Motor operation is completely controlled by the DC Controller main microprocessor and motor speed is controlled by the SCANNER CONTROL (SCNCONT) signal. Motor speed is monitored via the FG– and FG+ feedback signals. LED 201 on the DC Controller PCA is illuminated when the scanner motor is at its operational speed. The scanner motor is enabled briefly when the printer is powered-up (during the printer’s power- on Self Test) or whenever the PR~T (PRNT) command is received by the Interface/Formatter PCA. The motor makes a distinctive sound, identified as a ‘%ariable pitch whirring noise,” when statiing up. (The Main Motor noise is much more subtie and does not perceptibly vary in pitch.) Table 7-22. Scanner Malfunction Checks 1. Are the scanner motor connectors– J401 Visually inspect. Ensure that connectors are on the Scanner Motor PCA and J203 on the properly seated. If the cable is damaged, replace DC Controller PCA– firmly seated in their the cable. connectors? 2. Is the J209 jumper in place on the DC Veri@. Controller PCA? 3. Is the problem intermittent? Replace the mble assembly to the DC Controller. 4. Does the scanner motor run at dl times Replace the cable assembly to the DC afier power-on, but before printing? Controller. 5. Is +24 Vdc present on J401-5 of the scanner Measure the voltage. E voltage is not present, + replace the cable to the DC Controller PCA. 6. Is the scanner motor defective? See the “Scanner Motor Functional Check” following this table. 7. Is the DC Controller defective? See the “Scanner Motir Functional Check” following this tible. Scanner Motor Functional Check While performing Test Print listen for the distinct noise of the scanner motor starting up. If this noise can not be detected, replace the following assemblies in the order listed: 1. Laser/Scanning Assembly. 2. Laser/Scanning Cable Assembly to the DC Controller. 3. DC Controller PCA. 7-56, 7-5. IMAGE FORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING Introduction The quality of the printer’s output is always subject to the judgment of the particular user. This section of the manual is intended to assist the service representative in defining print quality and understanding what factors may affect print quality. The print samples depicted in Figure 7-24 illustrate some print quality defects and their possible causes. It is impossible to illustrate dl possible print quality defects since there are too many variables in the printing process. It is recommended that the service representative keep copies of print quality defects with an explanation of their muses for future reference. Image defeck in the list below are covered in the tables which follow Black Pages. Very Faint Print. SpecMed Print. Vertid White Streaks. Right-Hand Text Missing or Distorted Faulty Registration. findom Horizonti Black Lines. Slightiy Faint Print. Suede Print. Smeared Print/Improper Fusing. Distorted Print. Repetitive Defects. Black Pages with Horizontal White Strips, Image Skew. Improperly Sized Image. Vetiid Dark Streaks. Character Voids. Background. Smudged Horizonti Band with Overprint. Black Stripe on Right Side of Page. White or Blank Pages. Note “Horizonti” and “vetiid” refer to paper movement and not to the orientation of print on the page.PI
w 7-57, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL -...1 ... -.- -,=-_.:;,: ., .,~-, ~,”. ! . ,... .-. - -. - -— w- - Di,.“- -=- -..>-,=,,-,,.,, ,,.,. -_=-s .. =,:- ....”. :. ~.-j._ ,. ;“-!,.,..,...-,.: - ; ....._ ,..:, - :;,,,~..,.,,,.-.,,, . ..—~,”.: .-, ...- ,,:7,,,:,,,,.-. ..x.. ~#,-..-.,-=-=-—-._-_—-:%.,:-=;:I.,,<.- .-_-.-= :- -:;:-:-., - -_-_-_ :- ~;,;.,-.- :.._ - - :5 ~-_- - —-=-: ,.-~S- BlackPages Very FaintPrint Right-Hand Teti, Missing/Distorted Random Hortiontal SlightlyFaintPrint uede Print BlackLines SmearedPrint/ DistortedPrint RepetitiveDefects ImproperFusing Figure 7-24. Image Defect Summary 7-58, i .,.-. BlackPageswith ImageSkew ImproperlySizedImage HorizontalWhite Strips ~:J-,5~~:...,-...-:-_-.-.,— .-.-..-.,u . A VerticalDarkStreaks CharacterVoids SmudgedHorizontalBand BlackStripeon White or withOverprint RightSide of Page BlankPages / Figure 7-25. Image Defect summary (continued), Table 7-23. Black Pages 1. No Primary The Primary Corona applies a negative Replace the EP-S Cartridge. Corona. (Blotchy charge to the drum’s surface which repels If the problem persists, refer with undefined the less-negatively-charged toner, except to Table 7-45, “High-Voltage border.) in those areas exposed to the laser light. Systems Checks.” Without the Primary Corona’s charge, bemuse of the erase lamps the drum’s surface would be neutral, attracting the less-negatively-charged toner and, therefore, creating a totally black image. 2. Laser/Scanning Low-level signals exchanged between the Replace the Laser/Scanning Cable Assembly. Laser/Scanning Assembly and the DC Cable Assembly. (Defined border) Controller may be affecting laser output. 3. Laser/Smnning Circuitry in the assembly is musing the Replace the Laser/Smnning Assembly. laser to run out of control. Assembly. (Defined border) 4. DC Controller If the laser drive circuitry is damaged so Replace the DC Controller PCA. that the laser is always on, the surface of PCA followed by the I/F (Defined border) the drum would be constantly discharged PCA as required. Hinti by the laser. Disconnect the I/F PCA from the DC Controller and perform a Test Print to determine the source. Table 7-24. Very Faint Print 1. Empty EP-S No toner is available for print. Cartridge. F2. Weak or no The Transfer Corona’s purpose is to apply a Perform the “ImageTransfer Corona positive charge to the back of the paper to Development (Half Self Test)current. attract the negatively charged toner image Functional Check” followingfrom the drum to the paper. these tables and proceed asdirected. 3. Weak or no If no developer bias is available, toner is not Refer to Table 7-45, “High- developer bias. attracted to the drum’s discharged areas. Voltage System Checks.” 4. Paper. The paper moisture content, conductiviv, Try a known type and source finish, etc., may not be acceptable for use in of paper. Refer to the Paper the electrophotographic process. Specifications Guide or Chapter 2, Section 2-4. 5. Drum ground A dirty’ or damaged drum ground contact Clean or repair the drum path interrupted. will not allow electrical discharge or ground conticts. laser-exposed areas. 7-60, AC~ON Replace the EP-S Cartridge.ICorona Grid. I Grid is to ensure that the Primau [f the problem persists, refer
Corona deposits a uniform negative to Table 7-45, “High-Voltage charge to the surface of the drum. If System Checks.” the grid is not functioning properly, uneven charges are deposited on the drum’s surface. The random areas of uneven charges appear as dark blotches in the print. Table 7-26. Vertical White Streaks 1. Dirty The Beam-to-Drum Mirror reflects Carefully clean the Beam-to- Beam-to-Drum the laser light from the smnner to the Drum Mirror. A quality camera Mirror. surface of the photoconductive drum. lens cleaning fluid and tissue If the mirror is dirty, the laser light is mn be used if necessary. The blocked and the image is not written mirror may be easily accessed properly on the drum. by moving the mirror shutter to the right and folding it up out of the way. 2. Dirty “Transfer The purpose of the Transfer Corona is Clean the Transfer Corona Corona. to apply a positive charge to the back housing and wire per of the paper to attract the negatively instructions in Chapter 4, charged toner image from the drum to Section 4-4. the paper. If potions of the Transfer Corona are earemely contaminated or blocked, vertid streaks would occur in the printed output. 3. EP-S Cartridge. No toner is available for print, Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 4. Laser/Scanning The focusing lenses within the Replace the Laser/Scanning Assembly. Laser/Scanning Assembly may be Assembly. contaminated, blocking (or diffusing) the laser light. 7-61, Table 7-27. Right-Hand Text Missing/Distorted No toner available for print. Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 2. Beam-to-Drum The Beam-to-Drum Mirror reflects Verify that the mirror is resting Mirror incorrectly the laser light from the scanner’s firmly on the moulded plastic instiled. polygonal mirror to the surface of the supports. Note that the mirror photoconductive drum. If the mirror is is spring loaded and should rest instiled incorrectly (end-for-end) or is squarely on the supports. If not fully resting on the mirror supports, the mirror had been removed the scan plane of the laser will not be during maintenance, ensure parallel. The resulting image written on that the mirror has been the drum will be distorted, missing, or correcfly reinstiled. Refer to out of parallel fllgnment. Chapter 6 for proper mirror instigation. 3. Bent Top Cover If the Top Cover Assembly Hinge Replace the Top Cover Assembly Hinge Brackets are bent the Beam-to-Drum Assembly Hinge Brackets. Brackets. Mirror will not reflect the laser beam to the drum properly. Table 7-28. Faulty Registration POSSIBLE- GA@Ski 1. Worn Feed Roller If the Paper Pickup Roller or associated Assembly. clutch is sufficiently worn, the leading edge of the paper may not reach the Registration RoNers in time. 2. Registration The Paper Pickup Roller positions Replace the Registration Assembly. the leading edge of the paper at the Assembly. Registration Rollers. If these rollers do not grab the paper at the proper time and move it smoothly through the printer (due to worn rollers, springs, or clutch), misregistration will occur. 3. Drive Gears. If any gear within the gear drive Closely examine the gears train becomes excessively worn or along the paper path for wear is excessively dirty, erratic paper and contamination. Clean and movement would result leading to inspect the gears. Replace any image misregistration. defective gear. 4. Paper Tray. The paper tray may be preventing the Replace the paper tray. paper from freely moving through the printer. 5. Paper. The surface of the paper maybe too Change paper. Refer to the smooth for the pickup roller to move Paper Specifications Guide or the paper through the paper path. Chapter 2, Section 2-4 (“Paper Specifications”). 7-62, Table 7-29. Random Horizontal Black Lines POSS~LE CAUSE AC~ON 1. Defective or Horizonti black lines could occur in the event 3eplace the Fiber mproperly seated of a beam detect error (41 ERROR). In this 3ptic Cable. ?iber Optic Cable. condition (i.e., the microprocessor is expecting beam detecb but never receives it), the processor turns on the laser continuously, searching for beam detect. If beam detect has not occurred after NO seconds, a 51 ERRORmessage is displayed on the Control Panel. If the Fiber Optic Cable is damaged or disconnected, the beam would be blocked from the microprocessor and an error would result. 1. Laser/Scanning If the beam detect mirror within the assembly Replace the lssembly. becomes misaligned or damaged, beam detect Laser/Smnning would not consistently be provided to the DC Assembly. Controller PCA, 3. DC Controller See previous explanations. Replace the DC PCA. ~ontroller PCA. Table 7-30. Slightly Faint Print POSSIBLE CAUSE :-,-.- ‘-.’: ,.*“- =: .“ -“ -, ,.: 1. EP-S Cartridge. No toner available for print. Replace the EP-S Cartltidge. 2. Print Density set The higher the Print Density Did Turn the Print Density Dial ,mproperly. setting, the sma31erthe amount of toner to a lower setting (i.e., toward that will be transferred to the EP drum. “l”). Replace the ~S if no effect. 3. Drum Sensitivity The drum sensitivi~ switches sense the Perform the “Drum Sensitivity Switches. drum’s sensitivi~ to three levels of laser Switches (SW301 and SW302) light. Malfunctioning microswitches may Functiona3 Check” in Section cause the microprocessor to adjusting 7-4. the laser power level incorrectly with respect to EP-S Cartridge requirements. ~. Erase Lamp Slightiy faint print may result over time Perform the “Erase Lamp Assembly. if the erase lamps are malfunctioning. Functiona3Check” following. j. Low laser power. Low laser power would result in an Verify the laser power output. inadequately discharged surface on the Refer to “Laser Power photoconductive drum. Verification” in Section 7-4. 5. Paper. The paper may not be acceptable to the Try a known source and type electrophotographic processes. of paper. Refer to the Paper Specifications Guide or to Chapter 2, Section 2-4.I
7. Transfer Corona. Corona functiondi~ may not be at peak. Clean the Corona Assembly. - 7-63, Table 7-31. Suede Print If the laser drive circuitry is Perform a Test Print to isolate PCA. malfunctioning and turning the laser the DC Controller from the on and off at incorrect intervals, suede Interface/Formatter PCA. If the print may be observed. defective print occurs during the Test Print function, assume a defective DC Controller PCA and replace it. 2. If the Interface/Formatter PCA is Perform a Test Print to isolate Interface/Formatter defective, the PCA maybe instructing the DC Controller PCA from PCA. the DC Controller PCA to turn the the Interface/Formatter PCA. If laser on and off at incorrect times. the test print is acceptable but the Control Panel test operation is unacceptable, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. Table 7-32. Smeared Print/Improper Fusing The print will be smeared if the Fusing Assembly is not heated sufficiently to bond the toner image to the paper. 2. Bent Static Teeth. The purpose of the static teeth is to Closely examine the static teeth assist in separating the paper from the for defects. If the teeth are photoconductive drum by discharging bent or defective, replace the the positive charges placed on the paper Transfer Corona Assembly. by the Transfer Corona. If the static teeth are defective, the print could possibly become smeared prior to the paper entering the Fusing Assembly. 3. Media. The media may not be acceptable for Verify that the media meets the EP process and for laser printing. specifications. (See the Paper Specifications Guide or Chapter 2, Sections 2-4-2-6. 4. Dirty Fuser Excessively dirty fuser cleaning pads Replace the Fuser Cleaning Cleaning Pads. may result in contamination of the Pad. Fu~ing Roller, thereby causing smeared print. 5. Worn Gears. When the EP-S Drum and paper are Replace the EP-S Cartridge, not moving at the same speed, smudged Feed Drive Assembly, 19- and characters (often appearing to be bold 57-Tooth Gears, Main Motor, or characters) will result. Fusing Assembly as necessary. 6. Foreign object in Something is smearing the unfused Remove any foreign material. paper path. toner image on the surface of the paper. Try a new EP-S Cartridge. 7-64 -_, Table 7-33. Distorted Print If any component within the paper Closely examine the paper path is preventing the paper from transpofi rollers along the moving at a uniform rate, the print paper path for wear. Replace image would be affected (e.g., the main if excessive wear is observed. motor rotating too fast or too slow, the Inspect and replace the transport gears excessively worn, etc.). EP-S Cartridge, Feed Drive Characters that are either too Ml or too Assembly, 19- and 57-Tooth short (in the direction of paper motion) Gears, Main Motor and Drive are usually a result of drive mechanism Assembly, or Fusing Assembly problem. as necessary. 2. Laser/Scanning Wavy, irregular-shaped characters, Replace the Laser/Scanning Assembly. or irregular line margins in the scan Assembly. direction of printing are usually a result of a defective Laser/Scanning Assembly. 3. Laser/Scanning See explanation above. Replace the Cable Assembly. OableAssembly. 1. High-Voltage Improper charges on the EP drum See Table 7-45, “High-Voltage Zorona stays on. surface u muse image distortion. System Checks.” Table 7-34. Repetitive Defects 1. EP-S Cartridge. The circumference of the Replace the EP-S Catiridge. photoconductive drum (EP drum) Refer to the “Repetitive Image is 32 inches. The circumference of Defect Ruler” drawing in the developer roller is 2 inches. If a Section 7-7 for additional hints. defect appears in the print image at these intervals, assume the defect is associated with the EP-S Catiridge. 2. Fusing Assembly. The Fusing Roller’s circumference is Clean the Fusing Assembly approximately 3* inches. If a defect rollers. Replace the assembly if appears at this interval, assume the necessary. defect is associated with the Fusing Assembly. 3. Dirty Roller. Any dirty roller along the paper path Examine and clean rollers may result in a pattern of repetitive along the paper path. Refer print image defects. to “Repetitive Image Defect Ruler” drawing in Section 7-7. 4. Bad High-Voltige A “sofi” HVPS may leave inadequate Replace the ~S. If the Power Supply charges on the EP drum or may not problem persists, replace the Assembly or DC properly charge the developer roller. DC Controller. Controller. If the Primary or Transfer Coronas are lefi on when the printer is idle, repetitive image defecti will appear. 7-65 .— -, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED. SERVICE MANUAL Table 7-35. Black Pages with Horizontal White Stripes 1. Defective This unique printout results from a Insure the Fiber Optic Cable (damaged) Fiber defective or damaged Fiber Optic Cable. s properly seated. If the error Optic Cable. The pattern results from the printer’s )ersista, replace the Fiber Optic firmware attempting to locate Beam ~able. Detect (the horizonti synchronization signal). The white horizonti lines result from retry efforts by the firmware (e.g., the turning on/off of the laser) in an attempt to locate Beam Detect. The black areas show where the laser is continuously on, discharging the surface of the drum. This printout is usually associated with a 51 ERROR. 2. Laser/Scanning See explanation in step 1 above. Replace the Laser/Scanning Assembly or DC Assembly followed by the DC Controller PCA. Controller PCA, if necessary. Table 7-36. Image Skew H paper is carelessly instiled in Inspect the paper tray. Verify the paper tray or the paper tray is that the tray is correctiy loaded loosely instiled in the printer, paper and not overfilled. Verify movement will be hindered as the that the tab in the upper left paper enters the Registration Assembly. corner of the tray is not bent out of position. Veri& that the paper tray is fully seated into the printer. Switch trays with another printer to ver~ that the problem follows the tray. 1. Worn Feed Roller If the Paper Pickup Roller or associated Replace the Feed Roller Assembly. clutch is sufficiently worn, the leading Assembly. edge of the paper may be skewed before it reaches the Registration Rollers. 3. Registration The Registration Assembly torsion Inspect the Registration 4ssembly torsion springs ensure that equal pressure is Assembly’s torsion springs to ;prings. applied to both ends of the upper and verify correct instigation. If lower Registration Rollers. If one of the springs are out of position, the springs is missing or defective, reinstil. If correctiy installed unequal pressure would be applied to but the image is still skewing the paper along the length of the roller. beyond its specification, replace The paper should advance through the the Registration Assembly. If assembIy in a uniform manner. Since the fault condition persists, one side of the paper advances ahead of refer to the “Registration the other side of the paper, the image ChecV’ toward the end of this would appear skewed on the paper. section. 7-66 —— ——, Table 7-37. Improperly Sized Image POSSIBLE CAUSE AC~ON 1. Paper Tray The purpose of the paper tray Perform the “Tray Size MicroSwitches. microswitches is to indicate b the DC Switches (SW201, SW202, Controller PCA what size paper tray SW203) Functional Check” in is instiled. The DC Controller will Section 7-4. If envelopes are the then use this information to format the problem, ensure the envelope print image to the stie of the paper size setting (displayed following intiled in the tray. K the paper tray insertion of an envelope tray) is microswitches are defective, the DC set properly. Controller is receiving false information and will format the print image h an improper size. Table 7-38. Vertical Dark Streaks 1. Dirty Primary A dirty Primary Corona wire wi~ leave Clean the Primary Corona wire. Corona wire. areas under the contaminated potion with an inadequate charge to repel unwanted toner. 2. Bad EP-S Contaminants lodged within the Replace the EP-S Cartridge. Cartridge. cartridge or improper manufacturing (or refilling) can cause non-uniform characteristics. 3. Incompatible During forms manufacture, inks or Change we of form. forms. other finishing processes may interfere Hinti Check the Fuser Iwith the eleckophotographic (EP) or Cleaning Pad for contaminant Ifnsing process. buildup. Table 7-39. Character Voids 1. Bad Transparencies wi~ exhibit this Use Hewlett-Packard-approved transparencies. problem if they are not designed for transparencies (refer to Chapter proper toner adhesion. 2, Section 2-6). 2. Bad paper lot. The surface of the paper may be too Try a known paper from a smooth for proper toner adhesion. known source (see Chapter 2, Section 2-4). 3. Poor fusing. Toner may not be properly fused to the Perform the “Fusing Check” at media. the end of this section. 7-67, Table 7-40, Background A dirty Primary Corona wire will Clean the Primary Corona wire. prevent adequate charging of the EP drum’s surface to repel toner. The EP-S Cartridge maybe internWy Replace the EP-S Cartridge. damaged. 3. Bad paper lot. The paper moisture conten$ Try a different paper lot (see conductive@, or surface finish Chapter 2, Section 2-4 (“Paper may be incompatible with the Specifimtions”). electrophotographic process. 4. Print Densi~ set If the Print Densi@ is set incorrectly, Adjust the Print Densi~ (see incorrectly. then background smtter mn result, Chapter 4, Section 4-9, “Print particularly with envelopes. Densi@ Adjustment”). If toner dust has leaked out of the Clean the inside of the printer EP-S-Catiridge, this problem an occur. (see Chapter 4, Section 4-4, “Cleaning the Printer”). Table 7-41. Smudged Band with Overprint The plastic i~er wheels mn grab the Replace the Feed Roller paper feed D-roller as the Registration Assembly and Separation Pad. Assembly is trying to pull paper through the printer. If the D-roller is turned sufflcientiy, it can momentarily prevent normal paper movement. Table 7-42. Black Stripe on Right Side of Page Drum surface mnnot be charged where Clean Primary Corona tire (see corona wire is contaminated. Chapter 4, Section 4-4). 7-68, Table 7-43. Wtite or Blank Pages .. .’,. AHON No toner is available for print. Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 2. Sealing tape not No toner is available for print. Remove tipe. removed. 3. Broken Transfer Without Transfer Corona voltage, toner Perform the “Image Corona wire or no cannot be attracted from the surface of the Development (Hrdf Self Test) Transfer Corona drum to the paper. Functional Check” which voltage. Followsto check dl other EP processes. 4. No Developing The Developing Bias applies a charge to the Refer to Table 7-45, Bias. developing cylinder which, in turn, passes “High-Voltage System a charge to the toner. The charged toner Ohecks.” pafides are attracted to the neutralized surface areas of the drum previously discharged by the laser. If the charge on the toner is missing, toner will not be attracted to the drum and the page will be totily whik. 5. No drum If the drum ground discharge path is Refer to Table 7-45, ground path. interrupted, the laser light’s discharging “High-Voltage System effect mnnot occur and the highly negative Checks.” charge placed on the drum by the Primary Corona will repel toner, leaving a white page. 6. Drum is not If the drum does not rotite, the page will be Perform the “Drum Rotation rotating. white because the EP process functions will Functional ChecV’ which not have occurred. follows. 7. High-Voltage When the Transfer Corona is thoroughly clean or replace 3ystem shorted-to-ground, the current-limiting the Transfer Corona shorted-to-ground. circuitry within the High-Voltage Power Assembly. Supply Assembly disables ~ EP process functional voltages. Without these voltages, none of the EP process functions will occur. 3. Bad Low-level signrds exchanged between the Replacethe Laser/Scanning Laser/Scanning Laser/Scanning Assembly and the DC UableAssembly. 3able Assembly. Controller may be affecting laser output. 1. Bent Top Cover With bent Hinge Brackets, the ?eplace the Top Cover issembly Hinge Beam-to-Drum Mirror may improperly 4ssembly Hinge Brackets.. 3rackets. reflect the laser beam or the drum drive gear may not engage. 10. Blocked Laser [f the Beam-to-Drum Mirror or EP-S Jerify the laser beam is not 3eam. Cartridge shutiers do not open when the ]locked from striking the EP-S Cartridge is instiled, the beam will 1P drum (see the following not reach the drum, resulting in an all-white ‘Beam-to-Drum Mirror page. Assembly Functional Check’). 7-69, Image Development (Half Self Test) Functional Check The EP process can be subdivided into the following stages (see Chapter 5, Section 5-2): Cleaning (Physid and Electrostatic). Conditioning (Primary Corona and grid). Writing (Laser Modulation). Development (Formation of the Toner Image). Transfer (Transfer Corona charge to transfer the image to paper), The purpose of the Hdf SeMTest Check is to determine which of the EP processes are functioning. Perform the test as follows: 1. Press the TESTPRINTbution. 2. After the paper has advanced halfway through the printer (the leading edge of the paper should have advanced at least past the Transfer Corona), open the Top Cover Assembly. 3. Open the EP-S Cartridge’s drum shield (see Figure 7-27) to view the drum’s surface. If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum’s surface, assume that the first four functions of the EP process are functioning, concentrate troubleshooting efforts to a transfer problem, and proceed to Table 7-46. If the drum image is faint, veri$ proper laser power per the “Laser Power Verifimtion” in Section 7-4, followed by the “High-Voltage System Checks,” (Table 7-45) in this section. If NO image is present on the photoconductive drum, concentrate troubleshooting efforts on the earlier stages of the EP process as follows Drum Rotation Functional Check The photoconductive drum, located in the EP-S Cartridge, must rotate for the EP process to function. The photoconductive drum receives its drive from the Main Motor gear train. To verify whether the drum is rotating, proceed as follows: 1. Open the printer’s Top Cover Assembly. Open the EP-S Cartridge’s drum shield (cover) to view the photoconductive drum. 2. With a felt-tipped marker, draw a tine on the edge of the drum (away from the print image area). Note the position of the line. 3. CIose the printer and power it on. The one-second start-up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark. Open the printer and inspect the drum. Veri& that the mark drawn in Step 2 of this procedure has moved. If the mark has not moved, inspect the gear train to ensure that it is meshing with the EP-S Cartridge gears. If the Main Motor and drive gears appear to be functional and yet the EP drum does not move, the Top Cover Assembly Hinge Brackets may have been bent and require replacement. 7-70 —, Beam-to-Drum Mirror Assembly Functional Check In order for the laser b- ~ reach the surface of the EP drum &r it ti~ the her/Smnning Assembly, it must reflect off a properly positioned Beam-to-Drum Mirror. The mirror is normally blocked by the Mirror Shutter Assembly. When an EP-S Cartridge is i@ed, it cbntacts a lever on the lefi side of the Mirror Shutter Assembly, doting the shutter b f~ away from the mirror when the Top Cover Assembly is dosed. With the Top Cover Assembly opened to its 45° position and the EP-S Cartridge removed, gently push the botim of the shutter locking assembly on the lefi side of the Mirror Shutter Asembly. If the shutier does not fdl away from the mirror, check for the source of the binding and resolve. (See Figure 7-26). Ensure that the Mirror Assembly is intied properly between the EP-S Cartridge Guide and the Top Cover Assembly and that it is positioned on its guide pins as described in Chapter 6. ~ Visually obsewe from tis mgle / / / / Assembly Here I c-I- - - .—-. —- ._ ._. J \; \ I beam-to-Drum Mirror Figure 7-26. Beam-to-Drum Mirror Assembly EP-S Cartridge Guide Functional Check ~enever an EP-S Cartridge is itied in the EP-S Cartridge Guide in the Top Cover Assembly, protrusions on the right side of the guide are used to open two shu~rs on the top side of the EP-S Cartridge the Erase kp Shutter and the Beam Shutir. As the Top Cover Assembly is dosed, a protrusion in the base of the printer opens the drum shutter (or shield) on the bottom of the EP-S Cartridge. With the Top Cover Assembly open at 45°, slowly stide an EP-S Cartridge into the cartridge guide and, looking over the top of the EP-S Cartridge, note whether both shutters are opening properly. If W is we~, the surface of the EP drum shotid be visible when looking diretiy over the top of the idled EP-S Cartridge (see Fignre 7-26). 7-71, High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly The High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly provides the necessary voltages for the printir’s electro-photographic processes. Chapter 5 of this manual provides a summary of functional theory describing how the EP process works. The +2~ Vac supply is uses b power the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. A summary of the m@or component of the high-voltage system ana their functions is given in the table below. Table 7-44. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly SummaW 1. Primary Corona. Deposits a negative charge on the drum’s surface. 2. Primary Corona The grid ensures that the negative charges provides by the Prima~ Grid. Corona are appliea evenly to the drum’s surface. The grid, which consists of a meti screen, is tied to grouna potential through a varistor in the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. The varistor becomes highly conductive at voltages above its breakdown point. This characteristic allows the varistor to bleed off excess corona current and maintain a unifom, fiea voltage on the arum’s surface. 3. Drum ground. Proviaes a aischarge grouna path for the drum’s surface charge through the photoconauctor tier being struck by the laser or the erase lamps. 4. Developing bias. The developing bias consists of a variable negative DC bias ana a superimposed AC square wave bias. This bias is applied to the develope~ roll within the EP-S Cartridge. Toner pticles, within the aeveloper, obtain this negative bias by rubbing against the aeveloper roll. The AC bias appliea to the aeveloper helps the toner overcome the magnetic attraction of the developer roll ana assists in the toner projection process. 5. Transfer Corona. Deposits a positive charge to the back of the paper to attract the negatively charged toner from the drum’s surface. 6. Toner Sensing. Provides a variable voltage level to the DC Controller, depending on the toner level in the EP-S Cartridge. 7. Static Teeth. A high negative potential is appliea to a row of static teeth. These negatively charged teeth assist in discharging the positive charge placed on the paper at the transfer station. The result of this aischarge action is to weaken the paper’s attraction to the photiconductive drum. 7-72, Laser Shutter T* Ground11Toner Low Sensor Developing Mas tinnetior Drum Ground sh on Lever Mew Drum Prima~ Grid tinnetior Prima~ @rona tinnetiorFigure 7-27. EP-S Cartridge (Bottom view)
Grid of Primary Primary Drum Developing Toner Corona Corona Ground Bias Sensor Static Teeth Transfer Connector Corona SpringFigure 7-28. High-Voltage Power Supply Connector
7-73, Table 7-45. High-Voltage System Checks 1. Are any of the following supply Visually inspect each item. (See Figure 7-28). connectors damaged, corroded, dirty, or If any of the items are damaged, correct as missing? necessary. Replace the High-Voltige Power Supply if the connetion is unable to be corrected. Ensure K prima~ Corona connector. that W wires are connected to their respective ■ prima~ Corona Grid connector. terminals. ■ D~m Ground connector. ■ Developing Bias connector. ■ Toner Level Sensor connector (and connecting wire). 2. Inspect the EP-S Cartridge and verify that Visually inspect (see Figure 7-27). Correct, or if the following connectors are not damaged, necessary, replace the EP-S Cartridge. dim, or missing: w pfima~ Corona connector. ■ Primary Corona Grid connector. ■ Dmm Ground connector. ■ Developer Bias connector. E Toner Sensing connector. 3. Is the Primary Corona wire broken, Inspect. (See Figure 7-29.) If broken, replace the resulting in black pages? EP-S Cartridge. 4. Are the Light-Blocking shutters on the Inspect the EP-S Cartridge’s top to verify that the EP-S Cartridge opening? (A closed laser shutter tabs are not broken or damaged (See Fig shutter will result in white pages.) 7-29). Inspect the Top Cover Assembly to veri~ that the plastic protrusions which open the EP-S Cartridge shutters are not damaged. 5. Is the protective shutter conceding the Intil the EP-S Cartridge. Visually inspect to see Top Cover’s reflecting mirror being released if the mirror’s protective shield swings open as the when the EP-S Cartridge is instied? Top Cover Assembly is closed. 6. Is the Beam-to-Drum Mirror dirty? Inspect the mirror. If dirty, clean per the procedure described in Chapter 4. 7. Is the High-Voltage Power Supply Vlsudly inspect. If necessary, remove the Assembly correctiy seated into its connector assembly h verify that dl pins are in their to the DC Controller PCA? respective connectors. 8. Is connector J211 on the DC Controller Remove the bottom cover and visually inspect the PCA properly connected? connector. Reseat or replace if necessary. 9. Do the EP-S Cartridge’s sensitivi~ Refer to the “Drum Sensitivi@ Switihes (SW301 switches function? and SW302) Functional Check” in Section 7-4. 10. Do the Erase Lamps function? Perform the “erase lamp fnnctiond Chec~’ which follows. 11. Do the Primary Coron~ Developer Perform the “Primary Corona,” “Developer AC AC Bi~, and Developer DC Bias signals Bias,” and “Developer DC Bias” functional checks function? which fo~ow. .-., Light Blocking Shutter 1 (Laser Opening), ~ / Sensitivity Tabs \ ((\G Shutter Tabs Primary Corona (Behind Cover) Figure 7-29. EP-S cartridge {End view)Primary Corona Functional Check
Veri& that the Primary Corona (HV1ON) enable signal on the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly is functioning as follows 1. Using a voltmeter and frame ground as a reference, measure the voltige level at J21O-8 (Test Connedor, see Figure 7-30) on the DC Controller PCA while performing a Test Print. The voltige level should switch betieen + 18.0 Vdc (disabled state) and 0.0 Vdc (enabled state) one second after the print cycle begins. If the voltage at J21O-8 does not switih, replace the DC Controller PCA. If the signal line is being switched but the Primary Corona does not appear to be functioning (i.e., producing black pages), replaw the EP-S Cartridge followed by the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly.Developer AC Bias Functional Check
Verify that the Developer AC Bias (DBAC) enable signal on the High-Voltige Power Supply Assembly is functioning as follows: 1. Using a voltmeter and frame ground as a reference, measure the voltage level at J21O-6 (Test Connector, see Figure 7-30) on the DC Controller PCA while performing a Test Print. The voltage level should switch between +18.0 Vdc (disabled state) and 0.0 Vdc (enabled state) three seconds after the print ~cle begins. If the voltige at J21O-6 does not switch, replace the DC Controller PCA. If the signal line is being switched but the developer AC bias does not appear to be functioning (i.e., producing very faint print), replace the EP-S Cartridge followed by the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly.Note The absence of the Developer AC Bias will dso result in a perpetual 16 TONER
LOWcondition. 7-75, Developer DC Bias Functional Check Verify that the Developer DC Bias (DBDC) enable signal on the High-Voltige Power Supply Assembly is functioning as follows: 1. Using a voltmeter and frame ground as a reference, measure the voltage level at J21O-4 (Test Connector, see Figure 7-30) on the DC Controller PCA while initiating the printer SeH Test. The voltage level should titch between +18.0 Vdc (disabled state) and 0.0 Vdc (enabled state) one second after the print cycle begins. If the voltage at J21O-4 does not switch, replace the DC Controller PCA. If the signal line is being switched but the developer DC bias does not appear to be functioning (i.e., producing e=remely faint or white pages), replace the EP-S Cartridge fo~owed by the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. a—. Figure 7-30. J21O Test Points — —Note Functionality of the DC Controller’s high-voltage control circuitry can be
readily verified using the tiserJet Series II Sewice Diagnostic Tool Kit, P/N ~1 33440-67905, and following the instructions therein. w 7-76, Transfer Corona The Transfer Corona applies a positive charge to the back of the paper during the transfer process to attract the toner image from the surface of the photoconductive drum to the paper. The High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly provides the voltage applied to the Transfer Corona Assembly. The main microprocessor on the DC Controller PCA enables the Transfer Corona via the HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFER ON (HVTON) signal, which occurs approximately two seconds atier the PRNT command is issued by the Interface/Formatter PCA. The Transfer Corona remains on until dl printing is complete, Table 7-46. Transfer Corona Checks 1. Is the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly Vlsudly inspect. If necessary, remove the correctiy seated into iti connectors to the DC assembly to vetify that dl pins are in their Controller PCA? respective connectors. 2. Is the Transfer Corona wire broken? Inspect. If the wire is broken, replace the assembly. 3. Is the drum ground connector (see Figure Inspect. Replace the High-Voltage Power $ 7-28) damaged? Supply Assembly if necessary. 4. Are the Transfer Corona Assembly spring Remove the High-Voltige Power Supply connectors (located on the bottom of the Assembly. Inspect the Transfer Corona spring High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly connections (see Figure 7-28). Straighten or connector arm) dirty or bent? clean the connectors if necessary. 5. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? See the “Transfer Corona Functional Check” which follows. Transfer Corona Functional Check Veri& that the Transfer Corona enable signal (HVTON) on the High-Voltige Power Supply Assembly is functioning as follows 1. Using a voltmeter and frame ground as a reference, measure the voltage level at J21O-10 (Test Connector, see Figure 7-30) on the DC Controller PCA while initiating the printer Self Test, The voltage level should toggle between +18.0 Vdc (disabled state) to 0.0 Vdc (enabled state) No seconds tier the print cycle begins. If the voltage at J21O-10 does not toggle, replace the DC Controller PCA. If the signal line is being switched but the Transfer Corona does not appear to be functioning (i.e., producing a clear image on the drum but faint or white pages), replace the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly followed, if necessary, by the Transfer Corona Assembly. 7-77, Erase Lamp Functional Check The Erase Lamps receive their operating voltage through connectors J333 and J334 on the Exit Sensor PCA. 1. Remove the Main Body Covers or, at a minimum, the left cover panel. 2. Remove the EP-S Cartridge and close the Top Cover Assembly. 3. Power on the printer. 4. Observe the Erase Lamps through the left side opening. H the lamps are functioning, an orange glow may be observed for about one second fo~owing powerup. If the orange glow is not observed, veri$ that the Erase Lamp contacts are fully contacting the ~t Sensor PCA. If the lamps still appear to be malfunctioning, replace the following assemblies in the order listed: a. Exit Sensor PCA. b. Erase Lamp Assembly. c. DC Controller PCA. d. Cable assembly between the Exit Sensor PCA and the DC Contro~er PCA. Image Quality Check Perform an “Image Qudi~ Check” as follows: 1. Ensure that a properly stored, reliable copier bond paper (e.g., Xerox 4024, Canon NP, etc.) is instiled in the printir.2. Run several copies of the Service Mode SeMTest. (See Chapter 3, Section 3-7, for instructions.) ● 3. Inspect the so~d and shaded gradient areas in the four corners of the Service Mode Self Test printout. The sotid areas shotid be uniform in density with no fading from one side of the printout to the other. The four corner gradient patterns should appear uniform. If uniform density is not being observed, perform the fo~owing a. Remove and rock the EP-S Cartridge about its long axis (see Chapter 2, Section 2-3), b. Clean the Transfer and Primary Corona wires (see Chaptir 4, Section 4-4). c. Ensure that the Beam-to-Drum Mirror is clean. If the preceting actions do not correct the densi@ problems, replace the EP-S Cartridge, followed by the Transfer Corona Assembly, High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly, and Laser/Smnning Assembly as necessary. 7-78, Paper Overview The major variable in the print quality formula is paper. Table 7-47 provides a Est of paper checks that shotid be made prior to troubleshooting for printer malfunctions. Table 7-47. Paper Checks .- “cmQ@=::-‘;=”. :.. \?;’:<;”.Registration Check
Registration is defined as the printer’s ability to accurately position the printed image on the paper. The border printed on the Control Panel or Service Mode Self Test printout defines the print image area. This border dso provides a wnvenient referenw to measure print image registration. The follting registration toleranws are Wowed with the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers. Table 7-50. Registration Specifications - ‘~-;:.;’ ~. *. 2 ,* - ~“. ‘?-= ~~-. ‘3’*: ““$,“ :-M’- :.,””=;,~>1”~’-x: .-$=. = “s = z-’$..$-’”,”,~,”,~;= .;T.,@*‘w-~c=-B- :”?~-~:a.-= 3:%”%-.:”-’2* ""$-4::$.:??::.. ~...;...~-:+s;%~* —e$*=.,H~-c~=:. .-L.:* -~:&-+=`:~;e~%=w..-: ,,:~..=~:g;$$$;:i?:3.,’ ..’ J-: -, - ~. ,i -. 5mm * 2.5mm Leading edge of the paper b the horizonti first tine of dot row. 4.7mm & 2mm (HP 33440) Lefi edge of the paper to the first vefid dot row (for letter size paper). 4.Omm ~ 2mm (HP 33440) Lefi edge of the paper to the first vertid dot row (for A4 size paper). 6.4mm & 2mm (HP 33449) Lefi edge of the paper to the first vertid dot row (for letter size paper). 6.Omm & 2mm (HP 33449) Left edge of the paper b the first vetid dot row (for A4 size paper). Left-most + A + Scan Line Figure 7-31. Registration Specifications 7-82, Skew Tolerance Ml vertid lines should be parallel to the left edge of the paper. In Figure 7-31, dimension A should not vary from dimension B by more than 1.5mm (0.06 in.) over a paper length of 260mm (10.25 inches). Procedure Run the printer Control Panel continuous Self Test (04 SELFTEST). E misre@stration is suspected, measure the lefi and top margins and compare the measured values with the listed specifications. If, in comparison, misregistration is confirmed, proceed as follows: 1. Closely examine the paper path gear train. Inspect for worn or excessively dl~ gears. Replace or clean if necessary. 2. Inspect the Paper Pickup Roller. If worn, replace the Feed Roller Assembly and Separation Pad. 3. Verify that the torsion springs are correctiy mounted on the Registration Assembly. 4. If the preceding actions do not correct the misregistration problem, replace the Registration Assembly. Note There are no adjustments for skew or registration problems. Fusing Check The Fusing Assembly permanently bonds toner to the paper. To verify that the printer is correctiy fusing the print image, proceed as follows: 1. Run ten continuous copies of the Control Panel Self Test. 2. Place the printout on a firm surface and, using your fingertips, vigorously rub the first and the tenth printout. Inspect for any evidence of smearing. The M should be permanently fused on both printiuts. No smearing should occur. If the level of fusing from the first printout varies from that of the tenth printout, clean the Fusing Assembly’s Thermistor and repeat the fusing check. If the difference in levels of fusing persists, replace the Thermistor/Exit Sensor PCA. If smearing occurs in dl printouts, replace the Fusing Assembly. If the problem continues, replace the DC Controller PCA.Note E the Thermistor Bypass Switch is not engaged when the Bottom Cover is in
place, the DC Controller betieves the fuser is at temperature and, therefore, the cl fusing lamp will not be activated. However, the printer win attempt to print v “normally” in this condition. 7-83, /- 7“6. INTERFACE TROUBLESHOOTING e Communications CheckNate ~cept for a potentially bad Interface/Formatter PCA, communication problems
~ are normally the customer’s responsibility. Time spent attempting to resolve theseUC problems will not be covered by the product’s Hewlett-Packard warranty. # The Periphed Products Assist Line (PPAL) is available to the customer at no charge to help them through these problems. The PPAL telephone number is: (208) 323-2551. If the printer is not connected to an MS-DOS-based host proceed to Table 7-51 (Communications Checks). Test Message After the printer is in~led, verify communications be~een the printer and the computer using MS-DOS by entering the following at the compute~ Type:Repetitive Defect Ruler, HP 33440 and HP 33449
Repetitive print defeck are usually associated tith a specific roller tithin the printer or the EP-S Cartridge. The folloting diagram illustrates the diameters of the main printer rollers in a linear format. To use the diagram, align the first occurrence of the defect tith the top of the “’ruler” and measure to the ne~ occurrence of the defect to determine the roller in question. Firsl occurrence of the print defect * T Rcgistfiltion :tsscml~ly tr~lnsrcr roller ().5 in (13 mm)~ - Upper registr:ltion roller 1.5 in (38 mm) ~- Lo\vcr rcgistrtltion roller 1.75 in (44 mm) ~– EP cartridge clcvclopcr roller 2.0 in f51 mm)~ - Lo\Ycr fusing ~Isscm~Ily roller 2.56 in (65 mnl)~ - Upper fusing asscm[>ly roller 3.16 in (80 mm) ~- EP cartridge pllotoconcluctivc drum 3.7j in ({)5 nlnl)~ - Figure 7-32. Repetitive Defect Ruler 7-87,Connector Location Diagrams
AC Power Main Module Motor DC Power Supply Assembly Paper ControlPCA
High-Voltage Power Supply Fusing Assembly Figure 7-33. Printer Base Connectors (Top view)Y
J331 J601r1- . J206 u DC CONTROLLER PCA J213 ( 1 J212 J5Q W J208111LLd)A J211 ~ E - Figure 7-34. Printer Base Connectors (Bottom view), Primary Corona Primary Corona Ground for EP-S Wire Connector Grid Connector Cartridge Drum J603-1 Toner LowC-n-n-n-e-c-tor lu:...u..+~>...:.:..,..: dv< [— 1 / Green Wire Print Density Dial High-VoltageTransfer Corona Developing (Same as Power SupplyConnectors Bias Connector (Below Assembly) J Drum Ground) Connector to DC (Optional) Controller PCA TB603 Figure 7-35. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly (Top view) To Erase Lamp Assembly To Thermistor \ Paper Exit Sensor J333 J3~ Ps 331 J331 I \ i To DC ControllerPCA
Figure 7-36. Exit Sensor PCA (Component side) 7-89, Drum Sensitivity Microswitches Psper Pickup Clutch Solenoid \ I \HI
-\\\ / 01 Paper Out %nsor Registration Clutch SolenoidrvManual Feed iI Paper Sensor I
Connecior to J213 of the DC Controller PCAFigure 7-37. Paper Control PCA (Component side)
, To High-Voltage Power Supply Test Print Assembly Test Frame Ground/ I Connector Signal Ground Thermistor \ II1,21, , I 1 J210 209 J212 (DC Power SUPPIY) >212 Beam Detect SW205 m (Fiber Optic Cable) Lower [~+ J213( Paper Control PCA) ~ Cooling Scanner Motor P J203 Fan Laser PCA J202 ,206 To the Exit SW201 Sensor PCA Paper Tray SW202 Size Microswitch 1 ‘“m203 1 >205 TB202 ! lnterfacelFormatter \ PCA Connector TB201 Figure 7-38. Dc controller PCA Optional Memory Optional (HP 33449 Only) MemoryiI{ } J5 J4 J3 ParallelA
Font [10 PortJ6 + Carttidge J2 Serial 1/0 Port J9 ExpansionDB1/0 Font J7B
Cartridge J1 J8I
r , ( r1I\I DC Controller 1/0 +5 vdc GND
Control Panel liOFigure 7-39. Interface/Formatter PCA
7-91,Printer Wiring Diagram, HP 33440 and HP 33449
———— ———— ———— —- i AC POWER MODULE J152I21~ ti’~ k+24VDC ~FILTER
o T4 “NE J103JJLJ
Jlol 1234I
J33117654321III111- , , J3 DC POWER SUPPLY/ MAIN MOTOR DRIVER MODULE ! — 3MAIN
MoToR — 4 TO~OVER 5 lNTERLOCK +24vDC~0 Q - ma - ;~ ; ~ / I cEl‘I’al‘I’ml=1?131 CI’il ‘
~12123456789 “1’”0111 !21314 # fl”*- EJ20 1L
ONnFusINGINTERLKK~ (SW205) DC CONTROLLER PCAI FRONT PANEL I Figure 7-40. HP 33440/HP 33449 Printer Wring Diagram (1 of 2)
7-92,I ~.~ A EP CARTRIDGE DT0321ERASELAMP ASSYTB322
,._P-_A_PlER CONTROL PCA ~~~~ ~: - ~ ; PS30, ,- +5$ + 24v~ ~:;;~l;;~ GND , pAPER :s&:02 _- J: (OUTI 4 02 ~-_-_J~GNO ~-_-–-T :P;:K-U}- : F-F7-7 , ROLLERIICARTRIDGESI1PS302 N+5V I SOL ~ lSENsITIVITY 1 : MANuAL 1 ~S~L-[301 : SWITCHES : , FEED ~:E_N_S:::_ GND :sw.*_-sw_3QlJ +24V GNO J211[ 987654321IIII1II1I!I I I I I
iI HP 33440/HP 33449 Printer Wiring Diagram (2 of 2)
, DC Controller Signal Listing Chart, HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 7-52. LED 201 and SW201, 202, 203, and 205 LED201 Scanning motor at correct speed. SW201 “Right” paper tray size switch. SW202 “Mldde” paper tray size switch. SW203 “Lefi’ paper tray size switch. >SW205 Bottom cover is instied (Thermistor Bypass Switch). Table 7-53. Signal ListingII Iline.
J202-01 IRed IDSADJ lPhotodiode sensitivi~ adjustment bias. J202-02 Wte PD Photodiode feedback signal to indicate lxer beam power. J202-03 Red LDRV Laser diode current source, modulated by the video signal from the Intetiace/Formatter PCA. I I J202-04 Wlte +5 Vdc IJ202-05 IGreen IFG Frame Ground. J203-01 Red FG– Scanner motor tachometer feedback 3J203-02 Green GND(FG)J203-03 White FG+ Smnner motor tachometer feedback.J203-04 Green GND(FG) J203-05 YeUow SCNCONT Scanner motor speed control; signal level varies to maintain proper motor speed. J203-06 Red GND J203-07 IWlte +24VA + 24A Vdc 7-94, Table 7-53. Signal Listing (continued)E color Name-. - Description .
Connwt[ r J205 J205-A1 n/a SG Signal Ground. J205-A2 n/a PPRDY Printer Power Ready. J205-A3 n/a VSREQ Vertid Sync Request. J205-A4 n/a STATS DC Controller status. ~J205-A5 n/a CBSY I/F PCA sending command to DC Controller. IJ205-A6 n/a VSYNC Vertid sync pulse. IJ205-A7 n/a VDo Video data from IF PCA. IJ205-A8 n/a CCLK Command strobe from I/F PCA. J205-A9 n/a I-5V I-5Vdc I IJ205-A1O n/a I \Not used. I J205-B1 n/a Im Beam Detect- Horizonti sync pulse. t 1 J205-B2 n/a RDY Printer ready. IJ205-B3 n/a SBSY DC Controller sending status to I/F PCA. 1 I IJ205-B4 n/a PCLK Status strobe from DC Controller PCA. 1 1 J205-B5 n/a PRNT Initiates printing operation. ! i J205-B6 n/a CPRDY I/F PCA Power Ready. II1J205-B7 n/a CMND I/F PCA Command. I J205-B8 n/a I INot used. I J205-B9 n/a +24VA +2U Vdc J205-10 n/a FG Frame Ground Inte~cc ~o’matter PCA VoI@ge.-Conn”@to@ TB201 n/a + 5V +5 vac TB202 n/a GND 7=95, Table 7-53. Signal Usting (continued) Red I+24V I +24A Vdc. Blue IGND 24V IReturn for +24A Vdc. Yellow PE~ Preconditioning Erase Lamps signal enables the Erase Lamps. J206-04 Pink FSRTH Fuser Thermistor resistance provides a representative Fuser temperature signal to the DC Controller. J206-05 Blue GND J206-06 Lt. Blue PDP Paper Detivery (Paper Etit) signal indimtes that paper is present in the Fuser Assembly (PS331). J206-07 Brown + 5V I +5 Vdc. -‘-,~.:$;-=, : com:6;~ J207-01 Red \+24VA ILower Cooling Fan drive voltage. (+24 Vdc) Lt. Blue IFAN IEnables the Upper Cooting Fan during printing. J208-02 Pink FSRD Fusing Roller Heater Drive pulse enables the Fuser Bulb. Signal may only be observed with an oscilloscope. J208-03 Blue IGND I J208-04 ~;o;*-@ J209-01 Varies FG Frame Ground (Note: Jumper always instiled.) J209-02 Varies SG Signal Ground 7-96, Table 7-53. Signal Listing (continued) Pln No. Color .-N~e ‘“ ‘;”’ -. ‘:::.. D. .e.s-c,f.i_p*t”i”tu <,”,.:.-’-:.,-.:.”.”;.,,,...,~ -“.:;:,,.’ Connmtor” J21~’ (~~~ .-c~~~~t~r)- : -~ -:- =-’- .,.;. ~:~ ., ““ : .; ..-,. J21O-O1 n/a +24VA +24VA Vdc J21O-O2 n/a TMODEO Test Mode Control Line O. J21O-O3 n/a TMODE1 Test Mode Control Line 1 J21O-O4 n/a DBDC DC voltage added to developing bias when Low. J21O-O5 n/a -5V -5 Vdc J21O-O6 n/a DBAC AC voltage added to developing bias when Low. J21O-O7 n/a GND J21O-O8 n/a HV1ON High-Voltage (DC) applied to Primary Corona when Low. J21O-O9 n/a + 5V + 5Vdc J21O-10 n/a HVTON High voltige (DC) applied to Transfer Corona when Low. J21O-11 n/a + 3.2V + 3.2Vdc J21O-12 n/a TPA Selects a test pattern to be printed with TPB and TSTPTE. J21O-13 n/a TSTPT Low when the TEST PRINT switch is pressed. J21O-14 n/a TPB See TPA. J21O-15 n/a RD~NH Printer forced ready when Low. J21O-16 n/a TSTPTE See TPA. J21O-17 n/a LPCK Laser forced to operate at a power level seleded by CSNT1 & CSNT2 when Low. J21O-18 n/a CSNT1 her power selected with CSNT2. J21O-19 n/a SCNON Smnner motor starts when L. J21O-2O n/a CSNT2 See CSNT1. 7-97, Table 7-53. Signal Listing (continued) J211-01 Enables the Transfer Corona circuitry (+18 Vdc disabled, OVdc enabled). J211-02 Pink I~ST High-voltage reset. J211-03 T Enables the Primary Corona circuitry (+18 Vdc disabled,OVdc enabled). J211-04 Enables the developer ac bim circuitry (+18 Vdc disabled, OVdc enabled). J211-05 Yellow TSENS Toner Sensor level provides a voltage level to the DC ControHer representative of the amount of toner present * in the EP-S Cartridge. J211-06 Enables the developer dc bias circuitry (+18 Vdc disabled, OVdc enabled). J211-07 Blue GND J211-08 Red +24 Vdc J212-01 Blue GND J212-02 Blue GND J212-03 *Brown + 5V +5 Vdc J212-04 +5 Vdc J212-05 –5 Vdc J212-06 Violet RESET Initializes the microprocessors on the DC Controller PCA. J212-07 T Enables the +24 Vdc power supplies on the DC PowerSupply/Main Motor Driver PCA. Signal may only beobserved with an oscilloscope. J212-08 Pink 1A Main Motor Drive signal. J212-09 Main Motor Drive signal. J212-10 Yellow IB Main Motor Drive signal. J212-11 White B Main Motor Drive sign~. J212-12 Blue GND J212-13 Pink I+24VB +24B Vdc J212-14 Red +24VA +24A Vdc, Table 7-53. Signal Listing (continued) Pin No. Color N,.a-me - De~ription-,. Conn=tor J213 EP-S Cartridge Sensitivi@ switches indicate the ~ sensitivity and the presence of the EP-S Cartridge. J213-02 Pink CSENS2 EP-S Cartridge Sensitivi~ switches indicate the sensitivi~ and the presence of the EP-S Cartridge. J213-03 Violet REGD Registration Drive signal enables the Registration Solenoid (SL302) to advance paper through the Registration Rollers. J213-04 Lt. Blue CPUD Control Pickup enables the Paper Pi&up Solenoid (SL301).I
J213-05 Red +24V + 2U Vdc J213-06 Blue GND J213-07 Brown + 5V +5 Vdc J213-08 White PEMP Paper Out indicates the absence of paper in the paper tray. Signal is low when paper is not detected (PS301). Manual Paper Feed Sensor signal indicates the presence of paper in the manual area of printer (PS302). 7-99,Signal Timing Chart, HP 33440 and HP 33449
Figure 7-41. HP 33440/HP 33449 Signal ~ming Chart 7-1oo — —,PARTSAND DIAGRAMS
$. Pmm mD DUG- 8-1. HOW TO USE THE PARTS LISTS ., .’.8-3 8-2. PARTS LIST .8-4 8-3. PARTS INDEX .8-51 Figures Main Assemblies .8-4 8-lA. Etiernd Covers -HP 33440.8-6 8-lB. E~ernd Covers -HP 33449..8-7 8-2A. Upper Main Body -HP 33440..8-9 8-2B. Upper Mtin Body -HP 33449.8-12 8-3A. Lower Main Body -HP 33440.8-15 8-3B. Lower Main Body -HP 33449.8-18 8-W. AC Power Module and Upper Cooling Fan - HP 33440 .8-21 8-4B. AC Power Module and Upper Cooling Fan - HP 33449 .8-22 8-5. Pressure Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-24 8-6. Hinge Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-25 8-7. Control Panel Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449.8-26 8-8. Main Motor and Drive Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-27 8-9. Feed Drive Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-28 8-10. Mirror Shutier Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-29 8-11A. Paper Tray Assembly and Top Cover - HP 33440.8-30 8-llB. Paper Tray Assembly and Top Cover - HP 33449.8-31 8-12. Main Body Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-32 8-13. Feed RoUer Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449.8-34 8-14. Feed Guide Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-35 8-15. Registration Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-36 8-16. Delivery Coupler Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-37 8-17. Delive~ Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-38 8-18. Laser Smnning Assembly -HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-39 8-19. Erase Lamp Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-40 8-20. Trantier Corona Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-41 8-21. Fusing Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-42 8-22. Paper Control PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-45 8-23. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-46 8-24. DC Power Supply Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-47 8-1, ,-, - -— w 8-25. DC Controller PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-48 8-26. Intefiace/Formatter PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-49 8-27. Control Panel Cable Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 .8-50 Tables 8-O. COMMON HARDWARE .8-3 8-1A. Efiernd Covers -HP 33440 .8-6 8-lB. Etiernd Covers -HP 33449..,..8-8 8-2A. UPPER WNBODY-HP 33440,.8-11 8-2B. UPPER MN BODY -HP 33449..8-14 8-3A. LOWER WNBODY-HP 33440..8-17 8-3B. LOWER WNBODY-HP 33449..8-20 8-4A. AC POWER MODULE AND UPPER COOLING FAN - HP 33440 .8-23 8-4B. AC POWER MODULE AND UPPER COOL~G FN .8-23 8-5. PRESSURE ASSEMBLY .8-24 8-6A. HINGE ASSEMBLY -HP 33440...8-25 8-6B. HINGE ASSEMBLY -HP 33449...8-25 8-7A. CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY - HP 33440 .8-26 8-7B. CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY - HP 33449 .8-26 8-8. WNMOTOR AND DR~ ASSEMBLY .8-27 8-9. FEED DR~ ASSEMBLY .8-28 8-10. MIRROR SHUTTER ASSEMBLY ...8-29 8-11A. PAPER TRAY ASSEMBLY AND TOP COVER - HP 33440 .8-30 8-llB. PAPER TRAY ASSEMBLY AND TOP COVER - HP 33449 ., .8-31 8-12. WN BODY ASSEMBLY .8-33 8-13. FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY .8-34 8-14. FEED GUIDE ASSEMBLY .8-35 8-15. ~GISTRATION ASSEMBLY ...,.8-36 8-16. DEL~RYCOUPLER ASSEMBLY .8-37 8-17. DEL~RY ASSEMBLY .8-38 8-18. LASER SC~N~G ASSEMBLY .:: : : : : : : .8-39 8-19. ERASE MP ASSEMBLY .8-40 8-20. TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY.8-41 8-21. FUSING ASSEMBLY .8-44 8-22. PAPER CONTROL PCA .8-45 8-23. HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY .8-46 8-24. DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY..8-47 8-25, DC CONTROLLER PCA .8-48 8-26. INTERFACE/FORMATTER PCA - HP 33440 MD HP 33449 8-49 8-27. CONTROL PANEL CABLE ASSEMBLY AND CONNECTOR CtiLES. : : : : 8-50 PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER..8-51 8-2, 8-7. How To USE THE PARTS LISTS The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies and their component patis of the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers. Each figure is followed by a table which lists the item number for each part given in the illustration, the associated part number for the item, the quantity required, any special notes, and the description of that part. While looking for a part number, pay special attention to the voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number is for the correct type of machine. Part numbers with no indicator in the Notes column are stocked and mn be ordered through Hewlett-Packard’s Support Material Organization (SMO). Parts marked with an “S” in the Notes column are special order parts which can be “hotined” through SMO but have an eight-week lead time. Parts that have no reference designator or part number are not field-replaceable and cannot be ordered through SMO. An dphabetid index referencing dl part numbers is included at the end of the chapter (Section 8-3). The following table identifies common hardware used in the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers: Table 8-O. Table 8-O. COMMON HARDWARE Coated (black) pan-head Phillips Use platid screws. machine screw. (See below) Plated (silver-colored) pan-head M3x6 -0515-1896L Phillips machine screw. M3x8 -0515-1895M4x6 -0515-1876M4X8 -0515-1912
Coated (black) washer-head Phillips M3x6 - M6-7300-609CN machine screw. M3x8 - ~6-7300-809CN Plated (silver-colored) washer-head M3x6 - ~9-0267-OOOCN Phillips machine screw. Coated (black) self-tipping Phillips M3x6 - =4-7300-609CN screw for plastic. M4x1O - ~4-7401-009CN Plated (brass-colored) Phillips ~9-0342-OOOCN % shoulder screw. @ Plated (silver-colored) Phillips screw ~9-0389-OOOCN with captive star washer. 8-3, 8“2. PARTS LIST Delivery Coupler Assembly Erase Lamp Assambly Figure 8-16 7 Figure 8-19 I Shutter Assembly Figure 8-10 [rA Paper Control PCAFigure 8-22L. Control Panel Assembly
Figure 8-7L Bottom Cover
Figure 8-1, 6-3 DC Controller PCA Figure 8-25 Interface PCA Figure 8-26Main Assemblies (1 of 2)
, Fusing Assembly Feed Guide Assembly Figure 8-21 r Figure 8-147 Laser Scanning Assembly ~ Figure 8-18 Main Body Assembly Figure 8-12 Exit Sensor PCA Figure 8-21 Paper TrayHiahVoltaae Connector Assemblv I \ l\ - Figure 8-11
High Voltage Power S“ppIy Assembly Figure a-23 r ive Assembly -9 Pressu Figure Transf eed Roller Assembly Figure igure a-l3 _ Registration Assembly Figure a-l 5Main Assemblies (2 of 2)
, Figure 8-1A. External covers - HP 33440 Table 8-1A. EXTERNAL COVERS - HP 33440 8-6,I
8-7, Table 8-lB. EXTERNAL COVERS - HP 33449 REF-” +Pm~-”:m:@;;l ;;-~: ; .:-N- .3- ; -’”:”.:=-’:.=::-n*~mQN: :G::j .: - 1 RF1-2572-OOOCN 1 PANEL, FRONT 2 RF1-2574-OOOCN 1 P~EL, TOP 3 RF1-2575-OOOCN 1 PANEL, RIGHT 4 RF1-2576-OOOCN 1 PANEL, LEFT 5 W1-8278-OOOCN 1 RELEASE BUTTON 7 RF1-2577-OOOCN 1 CO~~ BOTTOM 9 RA1-8290-OOOCN 1 G~E, FONT CARTWDGE 56 RA1-8273-OOOCN 1 PANEL, BOTTOM CO~R 57 RA1-8284-OOOCN 1 P~EL, MEMORY CO~R 58 RA1-8285-OOOCN 1 PNEL, TEST COWR 59 RA1-8293-OOOCN 1 GUARD, 1/0 CONNECTOR 8-8, - 8-9, 34 23 8. 8-10, Table 8-2A. UPPER MAIN BODY - HP 33440 REF PART ~ER QTY NO~S DESCRI~ON 1 RA1-4019-OOOCN 1 HOLDER, MAGNET 2 RA1-4021-OOOCN 1 DEFLECTOR PAW ASSEMBLY 3 W1-4290-OOOCN 1 TRAY, UPPER REAR OUTPUT 4 RA1-4292-OOOCN 1 PANEL, REAR DEL~RY 5 W1-4025-OOOCN2sSPRING, LEAF 6 RA1-4034-OOOCN 1 SPRING A, GROUNDING 7 RA1-4035-OOOCN 1 SPRING B, GROUNDING 8 W1-4036-OOOCN 1 ARM, CONNECTOR 9 RF1-0947-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, EP-S CARTR~GE 10 RA1-4038-OOOCN 1 CO~R, FUSER INSULATING 11 RA1-4042-OOOCN2sSHAFT, LOCK 12 RA1-4030-OOOCN 1 PLATE, RIGHT ~NGE BRACKET 13 RA1-4033-OOOCN 1 PLATE, LEFT HINGE BRACKET 14 RA1-4045-020CN2sSPR~G, LEAF 15 RA1-4046-OOOCN 1 LEWR, INTERLOCK 16 W1-4047-OOOCN 1 ELIMWATOR, STATIC CHARGE 17 RA1-4048-OOOCN 1 CO~R, CONNECTOR ~ 19 RS1-2101-OOOCN 1 SPRING, TORSION 22 RF1-0926-OOOCN1sSPRWG, RIGHT, MIRROR 23 RF1-0977-OOOCN 1 PANEL, TOP COWR ASSEMBLY 24 RF1-0929-OOOCN1sSPR~G, LEFT, MIRROR 25 RF1-0985-OOOCN 1 TRAY, LO~R REAR OUTPUT 26 RA1-4294-OOOCN 1 COWR, LO~R DEL~RY 27 RA1-4079-OOOCN1sCOWR, WP ASSEMBLY 31 RGO-0052-OOOCN 1 ~RROR ASSEMBLY 32 RS1-2152-OOOCN 1 SPRING, TENSION 33 RA1-5258-OOOCN1sSHAFT, SPRING 34 RA1-5361-OOOCN 1 LATCH 35 RA1-5362-OOOCN 1 SPR~G, LEAF 36 RA1-5363-OOOCN 1 SWT, LATCH 37 RA1-5256-OOOCN1sPLATE, LEFT LOCK 38 RA1-5257-OOOCN1sPLATE, RIGHT LOCK — — o \ , 8-11, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL ..-–._—# ue’ \l .,-.-.. \‘:*.. 8-t7 8-12, n 8 — ,! ‘I I
SEE FIGURE 8-25. ~1 8-15, -, .4 \ 25v9,a-. 8-16, Table 8-3A. LOWER MAIN BODY - HP 33440 REF PMT ~ER QTY N- D~C~ON 1 RA1-4114-OOOCN1sPLATE, DC CONTROLLER MOUNTING 2 RA1-4115-050CN1sTERMINAL 3 RA1-4282-OOOCN1sPLATE, SERWCE COVER 4 RA1-4283-OOOCN 2 ~OB 5 RA1-4132-OOOCN1sGUIDE, FRONT, D-RAM PCA 6 RA1-4133-OOOCN1sGUIDE, REM D-W PCA 7 RA1-4134-OOOCN1sGUIDE, ~GHT, E~ANSION PCA 8 RA1-4135-OOOCN1sGUIDE, LEFT, E~ANSION PCA 9 RA1-4285-OOOCN 1 PANEL, FONT CARTRDGE 11 RA1-4138-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, UPPER, CARTRIDGE 12 RA1-4139-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, LOWER, CARTRIDGE 14 RA1-4296-OOOCN 1 PLATE, D-W 15 =9-0342-OOOCN 10 SCREW, STEPPED M3 17 WT2-0250-OOOCN3sCL~, CABLE 18 RH2-5053-OOOCN 1 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 19 RF1-0975-OOOCN 1 COVER BOTTOM 20 RA1-4113-OOOCN 4 FOOT 20A 0515-0055 4 SCREW 21 RH7-1056-OOOCN 1 FAN, LOWR COOLING 22 RA1-4146-050CN1sPLATE, TERMINAL 23 RA1-4147-OOOCN1sSHIELD, DC PWR SUPPLY C~LE 24 RA1-4148-OOOCN 1 SHIELD, FONT CARTRIDGE 25 W1-4149-OOOCN 2 SUPPORT, PANEL A 26 W1-4150-OOOCN 1 SUPPORT, P~EL B 27 RA1-4161-OOOCN1sMOUNT, TRAY SIZE SENSING 28 RA1-4162-OOOCN 3 LEVER, TRAY SIZE SENS~G 29 W1-4637-OOOCN 1 SHAFT, TRAY SIZE LEVER 30 VS3-0190-003CN1sCONNECTOR, 3P FEMALE 31 WS3-0976-OOOCN2sCONTACT 32 VS3-0190-004CN1sCONNECTOR, 4P FEMALE 33 WS3-1204-OOOCN4sCONTACT 34 RH2-5051-OOOCN 1 CONNECTOR 35 RA1-4167-OOOCN 1 INSULATOR, LEFT, FUSING ASS’Y 36 RA1-4168-OOOCN 1 INSULATOR RIGHT, FUSING ASS’Y 37 RA1-4170-OOOCN 1 PLATE, FRONT SUPPORT 38 RA1-4638-OOQCN1sCOVER, LEVER 39 VS9-0013-025CN1sCAP, SERN 1/0 DUST 40 WS9-O1O4-OOOCN1sCAP, CENTRONICS 1/0 DUST 41 SA4-6202-OOOCN1sPLATE, OPTIONAL 1/0 DUST 42 RA1-4317-OOOCN1sSPRING, LE~ 43 RA1-5423-OOOCN1sINSULATION SHEET 44 RA1-5489-OOOCN1sPLATE 45 RA1-5490-OOOCN1sSTAND, FAN MOUNT 8-17,I
. / &“ 14 /b 8-19, Table 8-3B. LOWER MAIN BODY - HP 33449 REF PART ~ER QTY N- .- “ ~ .D~QR~.~Q~ ‘ 1 RA1-4114-OOOCN1sPLATE, DC CONTROLLER MOUNTING 2 W1-4115-050CN1sTEMNAL 3 RA1-6047-OOOCN1sPLATE, SERWCE COVER 5 W1-8292-OOOCN1sGUDE, DRAM REAR 6 RA1-8289-OOOCN1sGU~E, DRAM CENTER, 7 RA1-4134-OOOCN1sGUIDE, MGHT, E=ANSION PCA 8 RA1-4135-OOOCN1sGUIDE, LEFT, ~ANSION PCA 11 RA1-8302-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, FONT CARTRIDGE 14 RA1-8299-OOOCN 1 PLATE, DRAM ACCESS 15 W9-0342-OOOCN 10 SCREW, STEPPED M3 17 WT2-0250-OOOCN3sCLP, C=LE 18 RH2-5108-OOOCN 1 FIBER OPTIC C~LE 19 RF1-2577-OOOCN 1 CO~~ BOTTOM 20 RA1-4113-OOOCN 4 FOOT 20A 0515-0055 4 SCREW 21 RH7-1056-OOOCN 1 FAN, LOWER COOLING 22 RA1-4146-050CN1sPLATE, TERMINAL 23 RA1-4147-OOOCN1sSHIELD, DC PWR SUPPLY CABLE 24 M1-8295-OOOCN 1 SHIELD, FONT CARTRIDGE 27 RA1-4161-OOOCN1sMOUNT, TRAY SIZE SENSING 28 RA1-4162-OOOCN 3 LEVER, T~Y SIZE SENSING 29 RA1-4637-OOOCN 1 SHAFT, TRAY SIZE LEVER 30 VS3-0190-003CN1sCONNECTOR, 3P FEMALE 31 WS3-1204-OOOCN2sCONTACT 32 VS3-0190-004CN1sCONNECTOR, 4P FEWE 33 WS3-1204-OOOCN4sCONTACT 34 RH2-5051-OOOCN 1 CONNECTOR 35 RA1-4167-OOOCN 1 ~SULATOR, LEFT, FUSING ASSV 36 RA1-4168-OOOCN 1 ~SULATOR, RIGHT, FUSING ASS’Y 37 RA1-4170-OOOCN 1 PMTE, FRONT SUPPORT 38 ~1-4638-OOOCN1sCOVER, LEVER 39 VS9-0013-025CN. 1 s CAP, SER~ 1/0 DUST 40 WS9-O1O4-OOOCN1sCAP, CENTRONICS 1/0 DUST 41 SA4-6202-OOOCN1sPLATE, OPTIONAL 1/0 DUST 42 RA1-4317-OOOCN1sSPRING, LEAF 43 RA1-5423-OOOCN1sINSULATION SHEET 44 RA1-5489-OOOCN1sPLATE 45 RA1-5490-OOOCN1sSTAND, FAN MOUNT 46 M1-8011-OOOCN1sPLATE, GROUNDING 49 RA1-5403-O~OCN> 1 s MOUNT, SWTCH LEVER 50 RA1-5404-OOOCN ) 1 s PLATE, LEVER / 8-20, ,/ 8-21,I
/I
4 -13P \
8-22, Table 8-4A. AC POWER MODULE AND UPPER COOLING FAN - HP 334401 REF PART -ER QW NOW DESCRI~ON 1 RG9-0205-OOOCN 1 AC PO~R MODULE 100/l15V 1 RG9-0206-OOOCN 1 AC PO~R MODULE 220/240V 2 RA1-4082-OOOCN 1 MOUNT, OZONE FILTER 3 RG1-1753-OOOCN 1 OZONE FILTER ~T 8 RH7-1074-OOOCN 1 FAN, UPPER COOL~G 10 RA1-4083-OOOCN1sDUCT, E=UST 11 RA1-5402-OOOCN1sHOOD, E=UST 12 RA1-5424-OOOCN3sCHP, HOOD 13 See note below PO~R CORD Table 8-4B. AC POWER MODULE AND UPPER COOLING FAN2 REF P~T =ER ..Q~. NO~S “- DESCRI~ON 1 RG9-0205-OOOCN 1 AC Pm MOD. 100/l15V (HP 33440) 1 RG9-0206-OOOCN 1 AC Pm MOD. 220/240V (HP 33440) 1 RG9-0319-OOOCN 1 AC Pm MOD. 100/l15V (HP 33449) 1 RG9-0325-060CN 1 AC Pm MOD. 220/240V (HP 33449) 2 RF1-2133-OOOCN 1 MOUNT, OZONE FILTER 3 RF1-2130-OOOCN 1 OZONE FILTER 8 RH7-1074-OOOCN 1 FAN, UPPER COOLING 10 RA1-7361-OOOCN1sDUCT, E=UST 11 RA1-7362-OOOCN1sHOOD, -UST 12 RA1-5424-OOOCN3sCLIP, HOOD 13 See note below POWR CORD 1Use this table for earlier HP 33440 printers without a user-replaceable ozone filter. zUse this table for both the HP 33449 and those HP 33440’s equipped with a user-replaceable ozone filter. Note: Refer to the Computer Users Cata/og from DMK for HP power cord ordeting information. A portion of this mtiog is reproduced below, Powr cords 81 2&1348 Black”’ %ti no. 81261378 GmY.” 812@l 351’ 812@l 369” 8120-1689” 8120-2104. ● Plug aIIo0QaVoltageming 125V 250V 250V 250V 250V 8-23, Figure 8-5. Pressure Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-5. PRESSURE ASSEMBLY, Figure 8-6. Hinge Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-6A. HINGE ASSEMBLY - HP 33440 ~F P&T -m : ..~.:- NO- - DWCRI~ON 1 RG1-0969-OOOCN 1 H~GE ASSEMBLY, RIGHT 2 RG1-1153-OOOCN 1 HINGE ASSEMBLY, LEFT 4 RS1-211O-OOOCN 2 SPR~G. HINGE ASSEMBLY Table 8-66. HINGE ASSEMBLY - HP 33449 REF PMT _ER.; :. -Qw; NO= = ., ; DWCR~ON 1 RG1-1435-OOOCN 1 H~GE ASSEMBLY, RIGHT 2 RG1-1436-OOOCN 1 H~GE ASSEMBLY, LEFT 4 RS1-211O-OOOCN 2 SP~NG, HINGE ASSEMBLY 8-25, Figure 8-7. Control Panel Assembl]f - HP 33440 and HP 33449 . 8-26, I 8 Figure 8-8. Mlain Nlotor and Drive Assembly - EIP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-8. MAIN MOTOR AND DRIVE ASSEMBLY ~F p~T ~ER Q~- :. NO.~ - ; DESCRI~ON 1 RF1-0998-OOOCN 1 COWR, GE~ 2 RH7-1048-OOOCN 1 MOTOR, MN DR~ 3 RG1-0943-OOOCN 1 MN MOTOR DR~ NSEMBLY 8-27, Figure 8-9. Feed Drive Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-9. FEED DRIVE ASSEMBLY, Figure 8-10. Mirror Shutter Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-10. MIRROR SHUTTER ASSEMBLY, Figure 8-1 1A. Paper Tray Assembly and Top Cower - HP 33440 Table 8-1 1A. PAPER TRAY ASSEMBLY AND TOP COVER - HP 33440 R~ .. PM~ *m ‘ ;Q~ -“i “ N~m$- - ; “:. :-; :. :“~pEggR~qy-:-:; $.$-; ~: $2 1 92295B TRAY, LETTER SME (8.5xllin) 1 92295C TRAY, LEGAL SIZE (8.5x14in) 1 92295D TRAY, A4 SIZE (210x297mm) 1 92295E TRAY, E~CUT~ SIZE (182x257mm) 1 92295F TRAY, E~LOPE 2 92295R COWR, INPUT TRAY 2 92295s COWR, LEGAL TRAY, ~igu~~ 8-1 IB. paper Tray Ass~mbly and Top COwe~ - Hp 33449 Table 8-1 lB. PAPER TRAY ASSEMBLY AND TOP COVER - HP 33449 REF ?WT “WBG .;, ~. NO~S ~“ -, ~ D~cRI~ON 1 92297B TRAY, LETTER SIZE (8.5xllin) 1 92297C TRAY, LEGAL SIZE (8.5x14in) 1 92297D TRAY, A4 SIZE (210x297mm) 1 92297E TRAY; E~CUT~ SIZE (182x257mm) 1 92297F I TRAY, E~LOPEI
2 92297R COW’R, INPUT TRAY 2 92297s CO~R, LEGAL TRAY, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 20 16— ,40 ‘4II-— \ \ \\ / Figure 8-12. Main Body Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-32, Table 8-12. MAIN BODY ASSEMBLY Rm PART -ER QV NOTES D~CW~ON 1 RA1-3821-OOOCN 1 BLOCK m BODY (HP 33440) +Z$wf? 1 =“~~ ~1- -– m~-w-Y’ew=~ 2 RA1-3822-OOOCN1sPLATE, GROUNDINGA3W1-3823-OOOCN1sPLATE, GROUNDING B (HP 33440) 3 ~1-5479-OOOCN1sPLATE, GROUNDING B (HP 33449) 4 W1-3824-OOOCN1sP~TE, GROUNDINGC5RA1-3825-OOOCN1sGUIDE, CASSETTE LEFT 6 RA1-3826-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, CASSETTE RIGHT 7 W1-3827-OOOCN 1 ARM, LASER SHUTTER 8 RA1-3828-040CN 1 ARM, PAPER SENSING 9 RA1-3829-OOOCN1sSP~NG, LEAF 10 RA1-3830-OOOCN1sSWT, HOOK 11 RA1-3831-OOOCN 1 HOOK LEFT COWR MTCH % 12 RA1-3832-OOOCN 1 HOOK ~GHT CO~R LATCH 13 W1-3833-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, LEFT CO~R LATCH HOOK 14 M1-3834-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, NGHT CO~R MTCH HOOK 15 RA1-3835-OOOCN .1 HFTE~ LEFT 16 RA1-3836-OOOCN 1 HFTE~ RIGHT 17 RA1-3837-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, A~MY 18 W1-3838-OOOCN 1 NUT, SCANNER, A 19 RA1-3839-OOOCN 1 NUT, SCANNER B 20 W1-3864-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, UPPER TRANSFER 22 W1-4320-OOOCN1sCOmR, USER SHUTTER 23 RA1-4321-OOOCN1sSPRING, LEAF 24 RA1-4319-OOOCN1sPLATE, BLOCK SUPPORT 27 RA1-4318-OOOCN1sPLATE, GROUND~G — 29 RS1-O1O5-OOOCN 1 GEAR, 19 TOOTH 30 RS1-O1O6-OOOCN 1 GE~, 57 TOOTH , 31 RS1-2095-OOOCN 1 SP~NG, TORSION 32 RS1-2096-OOOCN 1 SPRING, TORSION 33 RS1-2097-OOOCN 1 SPRING, TENSION 34 RS1-2112-OOOCN1sSPRING, TENSION 35 XG3-601O-3O3CN 1 BEARING, BALL 36 RF1-2118-OOOCN 1 RESISTOR ASS’Y, 15 MOHM l/4W 37 RF1-0841-OOOCN 1 RESISTOR, 1 KOHM l/4W 38 RF1-0988-OOOCN 1 S~T, DRUM QR~ 40 ~9-0375-OOOCN 4 SCREW, M3ti5 41 RA1-5396-OOOCN n/a s WASHER, SHIM 8-33, ~igu~~ 8-13. ~~~d Roll~~ Ass~mbly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-13. FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY 8-34 —. —, Figure 8-14. Feed Guide Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-14. FEED GUIDE ASSEMBLY REF” I P@Tj-m-ER==.-\{ .Q~-. -~: ~O~S .;. I ‘ - ~ .-. DESCRI~ON 1 :IRG1-0938-OOOCN1IIFEED GUIDE XSEMBLYI [ II 9 ] RF1-1177-OOOCN 1 ICLENER 1
8-35, Figure 8-~5. Registration Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-15. REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY REF’ _PmT’m”~: y .:= “ ..No~’”f ~“; ““=.:;;;..; -; ’:.:Q*=G,Rg~QN:+.: “-:-::; ->.:.; 1 RG1-0932-120CN 1 REGISTWTION MSEMBLY 2 RF1-1145-020CN 1 Pm, SEP-TION 5 W1-3871-OOOCN 2 SP~NG, TENSION 8-36, Figure 8-16. Delivery coupler Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-16. DELIVERY COUPLER ASSEMBLY Rm Pmq:-”@ -. ,Qm N=,. ~ “: D~CR~ON 1 RG1-0967-OOOCN 1 DE~RY COUPLER ASSEMBLY, Figure 8-17. Delivery Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-17. DELIVERY ASSEMBLY 8-38, Figure 8-f18. Laser Scanning Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-18. LASER SCANNING ASSEMBLY REF, ~P&~_-ER=-;. ~ “[:~. ~Now- DESCRI~ON 1 RGO-0050-030CN-= 1 LASER/SCANNING ASSEMBLY 2 RH2-5053-OOOCN 1 , FIBER OPTIC CABLE (HP 33440)1I2IRH2-5108-OOOCNI1IFIBER OPTIC CABLE (HP 33449)
8-39, Figure 8-19. Erase Lamp Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-19. ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY 8-40, Table 8-20. TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY ~F P~T ~~ Q~ ‘ -Nm - ~, D~C~~ON 1 RG1-0933-060CN 1 TRANSFER CORONA AF3EMBLY 8-41, Figure 8-21. Fusing Assembly (1 of 3) - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-42, p- W \v “0 /25 1(2/3) Figure 8-2f. Fusing Assembly [2 of 3) - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-43, Figure 8-2fl. Fusing Assembly (3 of 3) - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-21. FUSING ASSEMBLY ‘REF ‘ ‘ PART _ER-’ ‘“ ‘“:Qm: :’ .“N~~’:- :.’=””-:” -=’ :=-:D~cRwoN ‘- :- 1 RG1-0939-230CN 1 New FUSING ASSEMBLY (100/l15V) 1 33440-69003 1 Rebuilt FUSING ASSEMBLY (100/l15V) 1 RG1-0940-OOOCN 1 New FUSING ASSEMBLY (220/240V) 1 33440-69009 1 Rebuilt FUSING ASSEMBLY (220/240W 5 RA1-3942-OOOCN 1 ARM. ~T SENSOR 25 ~1-2104-OOOCN 1 SPRING, TENSION 26 RS1-2105-OOOCN 1 SPRING, TENSION 27 RS1-2109-OOOCN 2 SPRING, TENSION 33 RG1-0719-OOOCN 1 THERMISTOR/EMT SENSOR PCA 44 RF1-0842-OOOCN 1 THERMOPROTECTOR 49 RG1-0966-030CN 1 P~, FUSER CLEAN~G 50 RA1-3971-OOOCN 4 PAWL (CLAW), SEPARATION 51 RS1-2106-OOOCN 4 SPRING, PAWL TENSION 8-44, / —1 /Qo L
Figure 8-22. Paper control PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-22. PAPER CONTROL PCA PMT “-ER - Q~ Nom .: “ ., ; :. -.:- ~~CR~QN . 1 RG1-0718-OOOCN 1 PAPER CONTROL PCA 2 W1-4599-OOOCN 1 CO~R, P~ER CONTROL PCA .m...-.,-,_. 8-45, Figure 8-23. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449, / Figure 8-24. DC Power Supply Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-24. DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY REF .- ,-P*$i:-Eq;:. :j~:j.; ;~yvs;~., ::::S:-::”:~=-:.:D~~RI-o~- ~ - 1 RG1-1394-020CN 1 DC PO~R SUPPLY, 100/l15V (HP 33440) 1 ‘RG1-1395-OOOCN 1 DC POWR SUPPLY, 240V (HP 33440) 1 RG1-1975-OOOCN DC POWR SUPPLY, ,, 100/l15VI (HP 33449)
1 IRG1-1977-OOOCN IDC POmR SUPPLY, 240V (HP 33449) I {112!~1-0222-OOOCN1tDC PO~R FUSE 2iOV/3.15A11112I~1-0224-OOOCN1IDC PO~R FUSE 125V;6.3A 8-47, Figure 8-25. Dc Contro!!er PCA = HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-25. DC CONTROLLER PCA ,.=- - -., . - 1 IRG1-O71O-O9OCN’ 1 New IDC CONTROLLER PCA (HP 33440) - i1I33440-69002 1 Rebuilt DC CONTROI LLER PCA (HP 33440) 1 RG1-1969-OOOCN 1 New DC CONTROL JLER PCA (HP 33449) 1 33449-69002 1 Rebuilt DC CONTROL~R 1PCA (HP 33449) 8-48 —, \ Figure 8-26. !n%erface/Formatter PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-26. lNTERFACE/FOR’MATTER PCA - HP 33440 AND HP 33449 REF PART _ER .Q~ NO~ D~CR~ON 1 SG4-6212-050CN 1 New INTERFACE PCA (HP 33440) 1 33440-69001 1 Rebuilt INTERFACE PCA (HP 33440) 1 33449-60001 1 New FORUTTER PCA (HP 33449) 1 33449-69001 1 Rebuilt FOUTTER PCA (HP 33449) —.}, Figure 8-27. Control Panel Cable Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 Table 8-27. CONTROL PANEL CABLE ASSEMBLY AND CONNECTORCABLES
2 RG1-2307-OOOCN 1 PANEL CABLE ASSEMBLY (HP 33449) 4 RG1-0905-OOOCN 1 AC PO~R MODULE/DC POWR s~ 5 RG1-0906-OOOCN 1 HIGH-VOLTAGE PO~R SUPPLYCABLE
5 RG1-0907-OOOCN 1 FUSWG ASSEMBLY CABLE 1 RG1-0908-OOOCN 1 LASER/SC~NING CABLEASSEMBLY
5 RG1-0912-OOOCN 1 AC PO~R MODULE/ DC CON TROLLER CABLE 3 VS1-0440-002CN 1 mER: SIGN& GND TO FRAME 8-50 .- —— <–-—, 8-3. PARTS INDEX This dphabetid index references dl Pati Numbers. Part Numbers with initial numerics are listed first. HP 33440-specific parts have a single asterisk (*) following the Part Number. HP 33449-specific pati have tio asterisks (**) following the Part Number. If a referenced Part Number appears in both the A and B versions of a table or figure, no A or B is given with the tible or figure numbe~ othetise, an A or B will follow the table or figure number. PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBERI IWASHER I I
0515-1876 I n/a SCREW, PLATED PAN HEAD PHILL~S Table 8-O n/aMACHINE M4x6 0515-1895 n/a SCREW, PLATED PAN HEAD PHILLIPS Table 8-O n/a MACHINE M3x8 0515-1896 n/a SCREW, PLATED PAN HEAD PHILLIPS Table 8-O n/a MACHINE M3x6 0515-1912 I n/a SCREW, PMTED PAN HEAD PHILLIPS Table 8-O n/aMACHINE M4x8 33440-69001* I 1 IINTERFACE PCA (HP33440) Rebuilt IFig 8-26I133440-69002* I 1 DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP33440) Rebuild Fig 8-25I133440-69003I1FUSING ASSW (100/l15V) Rebuilt Fig 8-21I133440-69009I1FUSING ASSW (220/240V) Rebuilt Fig 8-21I133443B* I 1 MEMORY PCA, 1 MBYTE n/a I n/a 33443-69004* I 1 MEMORY PCA, 1 MBYTE (Rebuilt) n/a I n/a 33444B* I 1 IMEMORY PCA, 2 MBYTE 33444-69002* I 1 MEMORY PCA, 2 MBYTE (Rebuilt) n/a I n/a 33445B* 1 MEMORY PCA, 4 MBYTE n/a n/a 33445-69008* 1 MEMORY PCA, 4 MBYTE (Wbuilt) n/a n/a 33449-60001** 1 FORMATTER PCA (HP33449) New Fig 8-26 1 33449-69001** 1 FORMATTER PCA (HP33449) Rebuilt Fig 8-26 1 33449-69002** 1 DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP33449) Rebuilt Fig 8-25 1 33474B** I n/a IMEMORY PCA, 1 MBYTE 33474-69004** I n/a [ MEMORY PCA, 1 MBYTE (Rebuilt) 33475B** n/a MEMORY PCA, 2 MBYTE n/a n/a *HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 8-51, PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 92295A n/a EP-S CARTMDGE n/a 1 92295B* n/a TRAY, LETTER SIZE (8.5x11 in.) Fig 8-11A 1 92295C* I n/a ITRAY, LEGAL SIZE (8.5x14 in.) IFig 8-llAI 1 92295D* n/a TRAY, A4 SIZE (210x297mm) Fig 8-11A 1 92295E* n/a TWY, E~CUT~ (182x257mm) Fig 8-11A 1 92295F* n/a TWY, E~LOPE Fig 8-11A 1 92295R* n/a CO~m INPUT TRAY Fig 8-11A 2 92295s’ n/a CO~~ LEGAL TRAY Fig 8-11A 2 92297B** n/a TRAY, LETTER SIZE (8.5x11 in.) Fig 8-llB 1 92297C** n/a TWY, LEGAL SIZE (8.5x14 in.) Fig 8-llB 1 92297D** n/a TRAY, A4 SIZE (210x297mm) Fig 8-llB 1 92297E** n/a TRAY, E~CUT~ (182x257mm) Fig 8-llB 1 92297F** n/a TRAY, E~LOPE Fig 8-llB 1 92297R** n/a CO~R, INPUT TRAY Fig 8-llB 2 92297S** n/a CO~~ LEGAL TRAY Fig 8-llB 2 RA1-3821-OOOCN* 1 BLOCK U BODY Fig 8-12 1 RA1-3822-OOOCN 1 PLATE, GROUNDING A Fig 8-12 2 RA1-3823-OOOCN* 1 PLATE, GROUNDING B Fig 8-12 3 W1-3824-OOOCN 1 PLATE, GROUND~G C Fig 8-12 4 RA1-3825-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, CASSETTE LEFT Fig 8-12 5 RA1-3826-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, CASSETTE MGHT Fig 8-12 6 RA1-3827-OOOCN 1 ARM, LASER SHUTTER Fig 8-12 7 RA1-3828-040CN 1 ARM, PAPER SENSING Fig 8-12 8 U1-3829-OOOCN 1 SP~NG, LEAF Fig 8-12 9 RA1-3830-OOOCN 1 SHAFT, HOOK Fig 8-12 10 RA1-3831-OOOCN 1 HOOK LEFT CO~R LATCH Fig 8-12 11 RA1-3832-OOOCN 1 HOOK RIGHT CO~R LATCH Fig 8-12 12 RA1-3833-OOOCN 1 GUDE, LEFT CO~R LATCH HOOK Fig 8-12 13 RA1-3834-OOOCN 1 GU~E, RIGHT CO~R WTCH HOOK Fig 8-12 14 *HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 8-52, PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER PART ~~ D~C~ON REF m RA1-3835-OOOCN 1 L~TER, LEFT Fig 8-12 15 =1-3836-OOOCN 1 LIFTER, WGHT Fig 8-12 16 RA1-3837-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, A~~Y Fig 8-12 17 RA1-3838-OOOCN 1 NUT, SCANNER A Fig 8-12 18 IRA1-3839-OOOCNI1NUT, SCANNER, B Fig 8-12 19 IRA1-3864-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, UPPER THSFER Fig 8-12 20 IRA1-3871-OOOCN 2 SPMNG, TENSION Fig 8-15 5 ] RA1-3942-OOOCNI1IARM, EMT SENSOR lFig 8-21I5IIRA1-3971-OOOCNI4IPAW (CLAW, SEPARATION lFig 8-21 I 50 I RA1-4019-OOOCN* 1 HOLDER, MAGNET Fig 8-2A 1 W1-4021-OOOCN 1 DEFLECTOR PAW ASSEMBLY Fig 8-2 2 RA1-4025-OOOCN 2 SPRING, LEAF Fig 8-2 5 RA1-4030-OOOCN 1 PLATE, RHT HINGE BRACKET Fig 8-2 12 RA1-4033-OOOCN 1 P~TE, LFT HINGE BRAC~T Fig 8-2 13 IRA1-4034-OOOCNI1ISPRING A, GROUNDING lFig8-2I6IW1-4035-OOOCNI1SPMNG B, GROUNDING Fig 8-2I7IIRA1-4036-OOOCNI1IARM, CONNECTOR lFig8-2I8IRA1-4038-OOOCNI1ICOWR, FUSER INSUWTING Fig 8-2 I 10 I IW1-4042-OOOCNI2ISHAFT, LOCK IFig 8-2 I 11 I IRA1-4045-020CNI2ISP~NG, LEAF IFig 8-2 I 14 I IRA1-4046-OOOCNI1ILE~R, INTERLOCK Fig 8-2 I 15 I IW1-4047-OOOCNI1IELIM~ATOR, STATIC C~GE Fig 8-2 I 16 I RA1-4048-OOOCNI1ICO~R, CONNECTOR ARM Fig 8-2 I 17 I RA1-4079-OOOCNI1ICO~R, LAMP ASSEMBLY Fig 8-2 I 27 I RA1-4082-OOOCN* 1 MOUNT, OZONE F~TER Fig 8-4A 2 RA1-4083-OOOCN* 1 DUCT, E~UST Fig 8-4A 10 RA1-4113-OOOCN 4 FOOT Fig 8-3 20 RA1-4114-OOOCN 1 PLATE, DC CONTROLLER MOUNT~G Fig 8-3 1 *HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 8-53, PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER ? { ps~” WE~$ ;!$~~;:j?$8@‘$-i !$5*FF:mHN=i%‘Z;it$‘-$~gE:@<-’_jmi- G1-4115:050CN - 1 TEMINti Fig 8:3 2 RA1-4132-OOOCN* 1 GWDE, FRONT, D-RAM PCA Fig 8-3A 5 RA1-4133-OOOCN* 1 G~DE, REAR, D-RAM PCA Fig 8-3A 6 RA1-4134-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, RIGHT, E~ANSION PCA Fig 8-3 7 RA1-4135-OOOCN 1 GUIDE, LEFT, E~ANSION, PCA Fig 8-3 8 RA1-4138-OOOCN* ,1 GUIDE, UPPER, CARTRIDGE Fig 8-3A 11 RA1-4139-OOOCN* 1 GUIDE, LO~R, CARTNDGE Fig 8-3A 12 RA1-4146-050CN 1 PLATE, TER~NAL Fig 8-3 22 RA1-4147-OOOCN 1 SHIELD, DC Pm SUPPLY CABLE Fig 8-3 23 RA1-4148-OOOCN* 1 SHIELD, FONT CARTRIDGE Fig 8-3A 24 RA1-4149-OOOCN* 1 SUPPORT, PANEL A Fig 8-3A 25 ~1-4150-OOOCN* 1 SUPPORT, PANEL B Fig 8-3A 26 RA1-4161-OOOCN 1 MOUNT, TRAY SIZE SENSING Fig 8-3 27 RA1-4162-OOOCN 3 LE~~ T~Y SIZE SENS~G Fig 8-3 28 RA1-4167-OOOCN 1 INSULATOR, LEFT, FUSING ASS’Y Fig 8-3 35 RA1-4168-OOOCN 1 INSULATOR, RIGHT, FUSING ASST Fig 8-3 36 RA1-4170-OOOCN 1 PLATE, FRONT SUPPORT Fig 8-3 37 RA1-4231-OOOCN* 1 PANEL, FRONT LO~R Fig 8-1A 2 RA1-4232-OOOCN* 1 PANEL, FRONT UPPER Fig 8-1A 3 RA1-4233-OOOCN* 1 PANEL, RIGHT Fig 8-1A 4 RA1-4234-OOOCN* 1 PANEL, LEFT Fig 8-1A 5 RA1-4235-OOOCN* 1 RELEASE BUTTON Fig 8-1A 7 RA1-4282-OOOCN* 1 PLATE, SERWCE COWR Fig 8-3A 3 U1-4283-OOOCN* 2 ~OB Fig 8-3A 4 RA1-4285-OOOCN* 1 PANEL, FONT CARTMDGE Fig 8-3A 9 ~1-4290-OOOCN 1 TRAY, UPPER RE~ OUTPUT Fig 8-2 3 RA1-4292-OOOCN* 1 PANEL, REAR DEL~RY Fig 8-2A 4 RA1-4294-OOOCN* 1 CO~R, LO~R DEL~RY Fig 8-2A .26 RA1-4296-OOOCN* 1 PLATE, D-RAM Fig 8-3A 14 *HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 8-54, PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER . P*T :*ER;:, “:iQq,= “.,;>’;. ‘;; “,;, “.‘.- ‘.,=D:.t!i..S.C,..R.I.~-O.-~N.~... = REF m RA1-4317-OOOCN 1 SPRING, LEAF Fig 8-3 42 RA1-4318-OOOCN 1 PLATE, GROUNDING Fig 8-j2 27 U1-4319-OOOCN 1 PLATE, BLOCK SUPPORT Fig 8-12 24 RA1-4320-OOOCN 1 CO~~ WSER SHUTTER Fig 8-12 22 RA1-4321-OOOCN 1 SPRING, LE~ Fig 8-12 23 RA1-4599-OOOCN 1 CO~R, PNER CONTROL PCA Fig 8-22 2 RA1-4637-OOOCN 1 SHT, TRAY SIZE LE~R Fig 8-3 29 RA1-4638-OOOCN 1 COWR, LEWR Fig 8-3 38 RA1-4776-OOOCN** 1 BLOCK WN BODY Fig 8-12 1 RA1-5256-OOOCN 1 PLATE, LEFT LOCK Fig 8-2 37 RA1-5257-OOOCN 1 PLATE, RIGHT LOCK Fig 8-2 38 RA1-5258-OOOCN 1 SHAFT, SPRING Fig 8-2 33 RA1-5361-OOOCN* 1 LATCH Fig 8-2A 34 RA1-5362-OOOCN* 1 SPRING, LEAF Fig 8-2A 35 RA1-5363-OOOCN* 1 SHAFT, LATCH Fig 8-2A 36 RA1-5396-OOOCN n/a WASHER, SHIM Fig 8-12 41 W1-5402-OOOCN* 1 HOOD, E=UST Fig 8-4A 11 RA1-5403-030CN 1 MOUNT, S~TCH LE~R Fig 8-3B 49 RA1-5404-OOOCN 1 PLATE, LEWR Fig 8-3B 50 RA1-5423-OOOCN 1 INSULATION SHEET Fig 8-3 43 RA1-5424-OOOCN 3 CLIP, HOOD Fig 8-4 12 RA1-5479-OOOCN** 1 PLATE, GROUNDING B Fig 8-12 3 RA1-5489-OOOCN 1 PMTE Fig 8-3 44 RA1-5490-OOOCN 1 STAND, F~ MOUNT Fig 8-3 4 RA1-6047-OOOCN** 1 PLATE, SERWCE COWR Fig 8-3B 3 RA1-7361-OOOCN 1 DUCT, E~UST Fig 8-4B 10 RA1-7362-OOOCN 1 HOOD, E=UST Fig 8-4B 11 RA1-8011-OOOCN** 1 PLATE, GROUNDING Fig 8-3B 46 RA1-8273-OOOCN** 1 PANEL, BOTTOM CO~R Fig 8-lB 56 RA1-8275-OOOCN** 1 PANEL, REAR DEL~RY Fig 8-2B 4 *HP 3344o only. **HP 33449 only. 8-55, PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER lFig 8-lBI51I11RA1-8284-OOOCN** 1 IPANEL, MEMORY CO~R Fig 8-lB 57 RA1-8285-OOOCN** II PANEL, TEST CO~R Fig 8-lB I 58 U1-8287-OOOCN** II COWR, LOWER DEL~RY Fig 8-2B 26 GU~E, DRAM CENTER Fig 8-3B 6 GU~E, FONT CARTRIDGE *Fig 8-lB 9 RA1-8292-OOOCN** 1 GU~E, DRAM REAR Fig 8-3BI5RA1-8293-OOOCN** 1 GUARD, 1/0 CONNECTOR Fig 8-lB I 59 RA1-8295-OOOCN** 11 SHIELD, FONT CARTRIDGE Fig 8-3B I 24 PLATE, DW ACCESS G~DE, FONT CARTR~GE RF1-0841-OOOCNI1RESISTOR 1 KOHM l/4W Fig 8-12 37 RF1-0842-OOOCNI1THERMOPROTECTOR Fig 8-21 44 RF1-0926-OOOCNI1ISPRING, RIGHT, M~OR Fig 8-2 I 22 RF1-0929-OOOCN 1 SPRING, LEFT, MIRROR Fig 8-2 24 RF1-0947-OOOCNI1GUIDE, EP CARTRIDGE Fig 8-2I9RF1-0975-OOOCNI1ICO~R, BOTTOM Fig 8-3A 19 RF1-0977-OOOCNI1IPANEL, TOP COWR ASSEMBLY Fig 8-2A 23 TRAY, LOWER REAR OUTPUT Fig 8-2A 25 SHAFT, DRUM DR~ Fig 8-12 38 RF1-0998-OOOCN 1 COWR, GEAR Fig 8-8 1 RF1-1145-020CN 1 PAD, SEPARATION Fig 8-15 2 RF1-1177-OOOCN 1 CLEANER Fig 8-14 9 RF1-1383-OOOCN* 1 CONTROL PANEL O~RLAY Fig 8-7 2 RF1-2118-OOOCN 1 RESISTOR ASSW, 15 MOHM l/4W Fig 8-12 36 RF1-2130-OOOCN 1 OZONE FILTER Fig 8-4B 3 RF1-2133-OOOCN 1 MOUNT, OZONE FILTER Fig 8-4B 2 RF1-2572-OOOCN** 1 PANEL, FRONT Fig 8-lB 1 RF1-2574-OOOCN** 1 PANEL, TOP Fig 8-lB 2 *HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 8-56, PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER PART -ER m D~CRI~ON RW m. RF1-2575-OOOCN** 1 PANEL, RIGHT Fig 8-lB 3 RF1-2576-OOOCN** I 1 IPANEL, LEFT Fig 8-lB 4 RF1-2577-OOOCN** I 1 ICOVER, BOTTOM Fig 8-3B 19 RF1-2579-OOOCN* * I 1 IPANEL, TOP COVER ASSEMBLY Fig 8-2B 23 RF1-2580-OOOCN* * I 1 ITWY, LO~R REAR OUTPUT Fig 8-2B 25 RGO-0050-030CNI1I~SER/SCANNING ASSEMBLY Fig 8-18I1IRGO-0052-OOOCNI1IMIRROR ASSEMBLY lFig 8-2 I 31 I IRG1-O71O-O9OCN* I 1 IDC CONTROLLER PCA (HP 33440) IFig 8-25I1IRG1-0718-OOOCN 1 PAPER CONTROL PCA Fig 8-22 1 RG1-0719-OOOCN 1 T~RMISTOR/~T SENSOR PCA Fig 8-21 33 IRG1-0905-OOOCNI1IAC Pm MOD.~C Pm SUP. CABLE IFig. 8-27I4IRG1-0906-OOOCNI1~GH-VOLTAGE Pm SUP. CABLE Fig. 8-27 4 IRG1-0907-OOOCNI1IFUS~G ASSEMBLY CABLE IFig. 8-27I4IRG1-0908-OOOCNI1WER/SCANN~G CABLE ASSEMBLY Fig. 8-27 1 RG1-0912-OOOCNI1AC Pm MOD./DC CONTROL. CABLE Fig 8-27 4 IRG1-0929-OOOCNI1IMIRROR, SHUTTER ASSEMBLY Fig 8-10I1RG1-0931-060CN 1 FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY Fig 8-13 1 RG1-0932-120CNI1I~GISTRATION ASSEMBLY Fig 8-15I1RG1-0933-060CN 1 TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY Fig 8-20 1 RG1-0934-OOOCN 1 FEED D- ASSEMBLY Fig 8-9 1 RG1-0935-OOOCN 1 PRESSURE ASSEMBLY Fig 8-5 1 RG1-O936-11OCN 1 HIGH-VOLTAGE Pm SUPPLY ASST Fig 8-23 1 RG1-0938-OOOCN 1 FEED G~DE ASSEMBLY Fig 8-14 1 RG1-0939-230CN 1 FUSING ASSEMBLY (100/115) (New) Fig 8-21 1 RG1-0940-OOOCN 1 FUSING ASSEMBLY (220/240V) (New) Fig 8-21 1 RG1-0943-OOOCN 1 MN MOTOR D~ ASSEMBLY Fig 8-8 3 IRG1-0945-OOOCNI1IDEL~RY ASSEMBLY IFig 8-17I1IRG1-0946-OOOCN 1 ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY Fig 8-19 1 RG1-0959-OOOCN* 1 CONTROL PANEL Fig 8-7 1 RG1-0966-030CN 1 PAD, FUSER CLEANING Fig 8-21 49 *HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 8-57, PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER RG1-0967-OOOCN 1 DEL~RY COUPLER ASSEMBLY RG1-0969-OOOCN* 1 HNGE ASSEMBLY, RIGHT (HP 33440) Fig 8-6I1IRG1-1153-OOOCN* 1 HINGE ASSEMBLY, LEFT (HP 33440) Fig 8-6 2 RG1-1394-020CN* 1 DC Pm SUP. 100/l15V (HP 33440) Fig 8-24 1 RG1-1395-OOOCN* II DC PO~R SUPPLY 240V (HP 33440) Fig 8-24 1 RG1-1435-OOOCN** I 1 HINGE ASSEMBLY, NGHT (~ 33449) Fig 8-6 1 IRG1-1436-OOOCN** I 1 I~GE ASSEMBLY, LEFT (HP 33449) IFig 8-6I2IRG1-1753-OOOCN* 1 OZONE FILTER ~T Fig 8-U 3 RG1-1969-OOOCN** 1 DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP 33449) NW Fig 8-25 1 RG1-1974-OOOCN** 1 CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY Fig 8-7 1 RG1-1975-OOOCN** 1 DC Pm SUP. 100/l15V (HP 33449) Fig 8-24 1 RG1-1977-OOOCN** 1 DC PO~R SUPPLY 240V (HP 33449) Fig 8-24 1 RG1-2307-OOOCN** 1 PANEL CABLE ASST (HP 33449) Fig 8-27 2 RG9-0205-OOOCN* 1 AC Pm MOD. 100/l15V (HP 33440) Fig 8-4 1 RG9-0206-OOOCN* 1 AC Pm MOD. 220/240V (HP 33440) Fig 8-4 1 RG9-0319-OOOCN* * 1 AC Pm MOD. 100/l15V (HP 33449) Fig 8-4B 1 RG9-0325-060CN** 1 AC Pm MOD. 220/240V (HP 33449) Fig 8-4B 1 RH2-5051-OOOCN 1 CONNECTOR Fig 8-3 34 RH2-5053-OOOCN* 1 FIBER OPTIC CABLE (HP 33440) Fig 8-18 2 IRH2-5108-OOOCN** I 1 IFIBER OPTIC CABLE (HP 33449) ]Fig 8-18I2IRH7-1048-OOOCN 1 MOTOR, WN DR~ lFig8-8I2IERH7-1056-OOOCN 1 FAN, LO~R COOLING Fig 8-3 21RH7-1074-OOOCN 1 FAN, UPPER COOLING Fig 8-4 8RS1-O1O5-OOOCN 1 GEAR, 19 TOOTH IFig 8-12 I 29 I
IRS1-O1O6-OOOCNI1IGEAR, 57 TOOTH IFig 8-12 I 30 I IRS1-2095-OOOCNI1ISPRING, TOMION Fig 8-12 31 I IRS1-2096-OOOCNI1ISPWNG, TORSION Fig 8-12 32 IIM1-2097-OOOCNI1ISPRNG, TENSION IFig 8-12 I 33 I
RS1-2101-OOOCN 1 SPMNG, TONION Fig 8-2 19 N1-2104-OOOCN 1 SPRING, TENSION Fig 8-21 25 *HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 8-58, PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER Fig 8-21 26 =: ::::=NSION Fig 8-21 51 RS1-2109-OOOCNI2ISPRMG, TENSION Fig 8-21 27 RS1-211O-OOOCN [ 2 ISPRING, COMPRESSION IFig 8-6I4RS1-2112-OOOCN \ 1 ISPR~G, TENSION IFig 8-12 I 34 RS1-2149-OOOCN* I 1 SPRING, TENSION Fig 8-1A 8 RS1-2152-OOOCNI1ISPRING, TENSION lFig 8-2 I 32 SA4-6202-OOOCNI1IPLATE, OPT 1/0 DUST lFig 8-3 I 41 SG4-6212-050CN* ] 1 ] INTERFACE PCA (HP 33440) IFig 8-26 ] 1 SG4-6271-OOOCN* I 1 IPANEL CABLE ASS’Y (HP 33440) IFig 8-27I1VS1-0440-002CNI1WMPER SIG. GND TO FME GND Fig. 8-27 3 VS3-0190-003CNI1ICONNECTOR, 3P FEMALE Fig 8-3 I 30 VS3-0190-004CNI1CONNECTOR 4P FEMALE Fig 8-3 I 32 VS9-0013-025CNI1ICAP, SEM 1/0 DUST IFig 8-3 I 39 ~1-0222-OOOCNI1IDC POWER FUSE 250V/3.15A IFig 8-24I2WD1-0224-OOOCNI1IDC POWER FUSE 125V/6,3A IFig 8-24I2WS3-0976-OOOCN* 2 ICONTACT lFig 8-3A I 31 WS3-1204-OOOCN 4 CONTACT Fig 8-3 33 WS9-O1O4-OOOCN 1 CAP, CENTRONICS 1/0 DUST Fig 8-3 40 WT2-0250-OOOCN 3 CLIP, CABLE Fig 8-3 17 ~9-0267-OOOCN n/a SCREW, PL WASH-HD PHIL. (M3x6) Fig 8-O n/a M9-0389-OOOCN n/a SCREW, PL PHIL. M3x8 W/STAR WASH Fig 8-O n/a U9-0342-OOOCN 10 ISCREW, STEPPED M3 Fig 8-3 I 15 M9-0375-OOOCNI4ISCREW, M3x25 Fig 8-12 40 D4-7300-609CN n/a SCREW, BLACK SELF-TAPPING Table 8-O n/a PHI~PS M3x6 ~4-7401-009CN n/a SCREW, BMCK SELF-TAPPING Table 8-O n/a PHILLIPS M4x1O ~6-7300-609CN n/a SC~W, BLACK WASHER HEAD Table 8-O n/a PHILLIPS MACHINE M3x6 ~6-7300-809CN n/a SCREW, COATED (BLACK) WASHER Table 8-O n/a HEAD PHILLIPS MACHINE M3x8 XG3-601O-3O3CN 1 BEARING, B~L Fig 8-12 35 ‘HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 8-59, This appendix contains the complete text of the pamphlet Your Road Map to setting up Your hserJet series II Printer (P/N33440-90004), except for the titie page. &er November 1989, this pamphlet was packed with the LaserJet series II (W 33440) printer. It replaced the kserJet series II Getting Started Manual. A-1, start Here Locate each item in the checklist below ❑ 1. bserJet series II printer ❑ 2. LaserJet series/1 Printer User’s Manual ❑ 3. LaserJet series// Prjnter SoWare Application Notes ❑ 4. LaserJet series II Printer Technical Quick Reference Guide ❑ 5. LaserJet series// Printer User’s Quick Reference Guide Q 6. Power cord ❑ Get help to lift the printer from the box. ❑ 7. Paper tray Q 8. EP-S caflridge package ❑ 9. EP-S cartridge ❑ 10. Cleaning pad e,;,,,,6.,0 Notify your Hewlett-Packard Dealer immediately if any parts are missing or damaged A-3,Unpack Your Ptinter Check each box as you complete the step. d
❑ Remove the front packing tape. ~ Remove the packing foam from ❑ Open the printer to the fully the paper tray slot. open postion. ❑ Remove the pacMng foam from ❑ Remove the fuser assembly ❑ Remove the top cover packing inside the printer. spacers. spacer.Your Location Requirements Are
. An area with space around the printer as shown at the right ● A well-ventilated room ● Room temperature of 500 to 90.5° F . ● Relative humidity of 20% to WY. A stable environment-no abrupt temperature or humidity changes No exposure to chemicals or direct sunlight A sturdy, level surface tine voltage that does not vay more than &l OOAfrom that on printer’s nameplate 1“ 80 cm (32.1 inches) I )A-4
,Install the EP=S Catiddge CAUTION: Make sure that you have removed all of the pac~ng material.
❑ Locate the EP-S @rtridge. ❑ Remove the EP-S cartridge from ❑ Do not stand the EP-S cartridge ts bag. on end. -9 ❑ Slowly rock the EP-S ca~ridge five to sk times, in the direction shown, O Open the printer to the half-open to distribute the toner. - r ❑ Slide the EP-S @rtridge into the U Bend tab on left side of EP-S D Pull the tab straight out and top of the printer. - cartridge back and forth until away from the printer to remove it separates from the cartridge. the sealing tape.You’re doing great! Now go to section om
❑ If the tab separates from the ❑ Push firmly to be sure the EP-S tape, pull out the tape. catiridge is seated properly in the printer.A-5
,Inseti the Cleaning Pad
o ❑ Locate the cleaning pad and remove k from ts plastic bag.L
❑ Locate the fuser assembly. ❑ Open the printer to the fully open position.E
❑ Open the fuser assembly cover. ❑ Use the felt tip on the end of the R Remove and dis~rd the felt tip cleaning pad to wipe the fuser from the cleaning ~d. assembly roller. ❑ Place the cleaning pad on the ❑ Close the fuser assemMy cover. ❑ Close the printer. fuser assembly roller. The cover is slightly ajar when fully closed. A-6, .HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL ..
. w kLoad the Paper
The HP LaserJet series II works well with most types of paper. To ensure the best print quality and most reliable ~rinter ~erformance, use .MDer and”other media that meet ihe specifications below.’ ❑ Locate the paper tray Paper Paper, Top Input Must not scorch, melt, offset, or 16 to 36 pound (60 to 135 g/M2) release ha~rdous emissions when heated to 200°C (392°F) for 0.1 second. Must have 4% to 6% moisture content. Must be packaged in moisture-proof ream wrap. Hetiett-Packard has tested &non Dry Paper~, Xerox 4024@, Gilbert Neu-Techw and Neenah NP~ and found the results satisfacto~. If in doubt, use one of the recommended papers. I / IL
\ 7’ ❑ Remove the cover and all ❑ Load the paper tray up to th= ❑ Ensure that the paper is flat in packing material from inside the limit tabs (about 200 sheets). the tray at all four corners. tray. ❑ Replace the tray cover. ❑ Firmly insert the paper tray in the printer.A-7
, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICEConnect the Ptinter to a
Power supply ❑ Locate the power cord. Locate the power switch on the ❑ Make sure the Dower switch is in bck of the printer. the off position: Make sure you plug the other end of the power cord into a 120-volt AC power outletQ
It ❑ Plug the power cord into the ❑ Turn on your printer. receptacle on the bck of the printer.Printer Control Panel
READY + - n 00 READYMANUAL
- m <+~ mDHr=lDn ❑ Make sure the READY and ON LINE indicators are It and the display window shows 00 READY. ~-a —, ] 00 READY II 06 FONTPRINTOUTI
1 1 , 1 ❑ Press the ON LINE key. Nhe ON ❑ Press and release the PRINT ❑ Font samples for the internal LINE indicator goes oh.) FONTSflEST key. fonts are printed. I 1II 05 SELF TEST
1 Hold the PRINT FONTS key ❑ A one-page self-testis printed. 2 seconds until 05 SELF TEST appears in the display window, —II1,8, I I 04 SELF TEST ,I -,OJ:SELF TEST 1
1’I
1 \ ❑ Hold down the PRINT FONTS key ❑ A continuous self-testis printed. ❑ Press the ON LINE key to stop 7 seconds until 04 SELF TEST continuous self-test. Printing stops appears in the display window. shortly after you press ON LINE.GOOD JOB! YOU’RE NOW READY TO CONNECT YOUR PRINTER TO YOUR COMPUTER!
,0I ❑ When printing stops, turn off the ❑ Turn this Road Ma~ over and continue with QA-9
,Choose a Parallel or Intetiace
w SerialInterfaceRearview ofthep= I Your printer communicates with your computer through an interface. Your LaserJet series II provides both parallel and serial interfaces. The interface connections are on the back of your printer. oA uses parallel i“terfacewhen:. Your printer is lees than 10 feet from your computer. .-~=y-===,.:< -.-=- : . You send primarily graphic information or soft fonts to the printer. “+~-_~:-g:*.-...~. ~r~=y~+-:.=.:-:;:-+.,.,.- .‘- .-.,.. .-_ z.:=<:i?<:t.+-:<~,:$~~-.~=x-c :;:. ::::.;..<.-.,-::.;.=:,=..~.>-..=- : * . al w Use a serial interface when: ● Your printer must be more than 10 feet from your computer. ● Your computer does not have an available parallel interface. Did you decide on a serial interface? Go too Tefiual Information A-10,Set Up to Use a Parallel Intetiace The following setup information applies to MS.DOS-based computers; Hewlett- Packard has not tested other operating systems. If you have an operating system
other than MS-DOS, contact your computer dealer for information. Make sure both your computer and printer are turned off, and m then plug the cable into yourcomputer and your printer. Usethe clips to attach the mble toyour printer. Note into whichparallel potion your computer(LPT1 or LPT2) you plug the \ cable; you will need this information later. I , , I ❑ Use clips to attach parallel cable. ❑ Install the intetiace ~rd for your computer, if required.* *K you need a parallel interfacefor your HP Vetira, order HP part number HP24WA. Myou have a differenttype of Wmputer, mntact your 100aldealer for information. computers “::~.:’.j~;:~ohpti{tir~$n$- ,~:-.’- -. -_ .tiarallelCable.- ‘Printe;End HP Vectra IBM PC/ATm/PS2 HP Part# Length Compaq - ~ AT&T 25 Pin Male HP92284A 6.6’ (2.0 m) 36 Pin MaleQ
❑ Choose the right cable for your computer.Confi~e the Control Panel for a Partiel Interface
1 ON LINE 00 READY The ON LINE indimtor goes out.) 2 MENU (Hold down for SYM SET= ROMAN-8* approximately 7 seconds.) 3 MENU AUTO CONT= OFF* (or ON*) 4 MENU I/O= SERIAL* o 5 + (Plus) [/0 = PARALLELI 6 ENTER 1/0 = PARALLEL* 7 ON LINE 00 READY ~he ON LINE indicator lights.) *lndi@tes the current defaultNow go to Q
A-11,Set Up to Use a Setial Intetiace The following setup information applies to MS-DOS-based computers; Hewlett- Packard has not tested other operating systems. If you have an operating system
other than MS-DOS, contact your computer dealer for information. Make sure both your computer and printer are turned off, and then plug the cable into your computer and your printer. Use a small screwdriver to attach the cable to the printer. Note into which serial port on your computer (COM1 or COM2) you plug the cabla you will need this information later. ❑ Use a screwdriver to attach serial ❑ Install the intetiace card for your cable. computer, if required.* *H WU need a serial intetia~ for ~ur HP Ve@ra,order HP pm numbr HP2- or HP24WIA for the dual sefial option. HWU have a differentw of mmputer, mntaat ~ur l-l deder for information. IBM PC, PCm/PS 2 & IBM Compatibles Compaq Portable AT&T HP Vectra IBM PCIAT & Length IBM Compatibles Compaq Deskpro m ‘p’a’# m 266/366 9 Pin Female HP24542G 9.9’ (3.0 m) 25 Hn Male HP Vectra HP Part# Length (Dual Serial Card) - - 25 Pin Male HP17255M 3.9’ (1.2 m) 25 Pin Male HP13242~Ol O 16.7’ {5.0 m) ❑ Choose the right cable for your computer.Now go to
o If you are going to use a serial RS422 cable, see AppendN E, “Interfaces,” in the LaserJet series II User’s Manual. A-12, . Step Press Printer Displays (If not, press ~ or ~ until it does, and then press m.) 1 ON LINE 00 READY Uhe ON UNE indiator goes out.) .2 MENU (Hold down for SYM SET= ROMAN-* approximately 7 seconds.) 3 MENU AUTO CONT= OFF* (or ON*) 4 MENU I/O= SERIAL* * 5 ~ ‘“” ‘MENU: ‘.::. “-=”‘=: “’-: ‘- ‘.; :.; ‘SER~A$=RS-23~*. ‘.: ~ : ‘ 6 ENTER BAUD RATE =9600* 7 MENU ROBUST XON =ON* o8IMENU DTR POURIW= HI*9 I ON LINE I 00 READY flhe ON LINE indi~tor lights.) *lnditites the current default.Now go to o Note * This does not apply to the W 33440. Stitches must be set. See Chapter 3, page 3-5. OKAY! GOOD WORK! YOU’RE NOW READY TO PREPARE YOUR PRINTER TO TALK TO YOUR COMPUTER!
A-13,Create or E&t your AUTOEXEC.BAT File
The fallowing procedure: ● Puts into a file called AUTOEXEC.BAT the instructions your computer needs to be able to talk to the printer. ● Uses the EDUN editor that comes with DOS.Works with either MS-DOS or PC-DOS operating sy~ems. Most IBMand lBM-compatible compaers use one of these operating systems. If your computer does not use either MS-DOS or PC-DOS, contact your computer dealer for configuration instructions. Step What to Do How tO DO it Uype the command in this procedure and press the Return key, as indicated by ~.) 1 Turn on your comptier. 2 Turn on your printer. 3 Make sure you are in the CD\ ~ root diretio~ of the disk from which you boot your computer. 4 Check to see ifthe DIR AWEXEC . WT H AUTOEXEC.BAT file appears in the listing. 5 If the message “file not found” appears, go to step 7. 6 Make a backup copy of your COPY A~E=C . DAT AWE=C . SAV ~ existing AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Name 1 AUTOEXEC.SAV. * 7 Look for the files DIR *. COM @ MODE.COM and EDLIN.COM in your root dire~ory.** 8 If MODE.COM and EDLIN.COM appear in the directoW listing, go to M. 9 If MODE.COM and Place your DOS disk in drive A and type the following EDLIN.COM do not appear commands: in the directory listing, copy COPY A: MODE. COM ~ them from your DOS disks COPY A: EDLIN . COM~ to your root directo~. .- -. m lU tio Io~ *H you need to remver wur originalAUTOEXEC.BATfile Iawr, w COPY A~EXEC. SAV A~EXEC. WT ** MODE.COM and EDUN,COM are on your original DOS dsks. MYOUhave a hard @sk,these fileSmay be in a subdiretiow.A-14
, .L
HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUALPrepare Your Computer to Talk to the Ptinter
Type EDUN A~EWC. BAT and press ~ C> EDUN AWEMC . BAT C> EDLIN A~EMC . BAT END OF IN~ FILE - FILE * * Kyourmmputer =reen looks like t~s, followthe instructionsin Myour =reen looks like ttis, followthe instrutiionsin this this oolumn. column. Hyou need help using EDLIN,see your DOS Step Ation documentation. 1 List the file by typing L @at the* prompt. Step Action 2 Look for commands that begin with MODE. If 1 Insert a new line at the beginning of the there are none, go to the next column. AUTOEXEC.BAT file by typing li and pressing ~ at the ● prompt. The prompt 1: * appears. 3 Compare the existing MODE commands whh the ones listed below for your configuration. 2 Type the MODE command listed below for your Parallel: MODE LPT1 :,,P configuration. Seriti: MODE COM1 :~0,N,8,1 ,P Parallel: MODE LPTl: , , P ~ MODE LPT1 :=COM1 : Serial: MODE COMl:9600, N,8,1, P@ (If you used LPT2 or COM2, substitute it for LPT1 MODE ml: =COM1 : ~ or COM1.) If you have the correct MODE 3 Stop inse~ing lines in the file by holding down the commands, go to step 5. CTRL key and pressing C. 4 You must delete any other MODE commands for 4 List the file by typing L and pressing ~. the port to which your printer is connected. 5 Check the lines you just added for typographical Delete any other mode commands by typing the errors. To fix any errors, type the line number of number of the tine on which the command the line containing the error and press @. Retype appears, and D. Then press B. For example, if the line correctly and press @. Ust the file again line 3 has another MODE command, type 3D and press ~ at the* prompt. Go to the ne~ column. and recheck it for errors. Make sure the lines are correct before you proceed. 5 Reboot your computer by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys while pressing the DEL key to run 6 Exit from EDLIN by holding down the CTRL key your new AUTOEXEC.BAT file. and pressing E. EDLIN saves your file automatically.A-15
,Vetiy Communication Between MS~DOS@and Your Ptinter
1. Make sure your computer and printer are on, and your printer is on line. 2. At yourMS-DOSprompt, type DIR >~ and press@. C:\>DIR >PRN 3. The LaserJetseriesII printsa listof the fileson yourdisk. c:\> 4. The FORM FEEDindi~tor lightsto indiwte that the printer receiveddata. Pressthe ON LINEkeyand then pressthe FORM FEEDkeyto ejectthe page. 5. Rememberto pressthe ON UNE keyto prepareyourprinterfor moredata. 6. If youare havingtrouble,go to@You’re Done! Now you can set up your software to work
with your new LaserJet series II printer.Refer to the LaserJet series II Printer Software Application Notes that came with
your LaserJet series Il. A-16, ● Was your computer or printer on when you connected your interface cable? - Turn off your computer and printer, wait 15 seconds, and turn them on again. Continue with @ ● Is the interface port configured correctifi - Your cable may not be connected to LPT1 for a parald interface or COM1 for a serial interface. Try working through ~, ~, and @ again subsdtuting LPT2 Kyou have a parallel interface, or COM2 if you have a ser~ interface. ● Are all of the cables and power cords attached propedfi - Check all of the connections. ● Is the ON LINE indicator on the printer control panel lit? - If not, press the ON UNE key. ● Is the printer working propeti~ Run the self-test describd in~. - If necessa~, mll your HP Dealer or HP Sales Representative. ● Is your computer working properf~ - Run an application that works. - If necessa~, call your computer dealer or manufacturer. ● Have you setup the control panel proped~ - Hold down the MENU key for about 7 seconds until the Configuration Menu appears in the display window. Then step through the configuration settings. If necessary, repeat ~for a parailel interface or Q and @ for a serial intetiace, and continue through the rest of this Road Map. ● Have you setup your AUTOEXEC.BAT file properffi - Type TYPE A~E~C. ~T on your computer and press @. Check the listing for errors in the line or lines you added. If necessary, repeat ~, @ , and ~. ● DO you have the correct printer caMe? Check ~ for a parallel intetiace or Q and @ for a serti interface. - If necessa~, obtain the correct cabfe. Consult your LaserJet series II User’s Call the HP Dealer from whom you Call Hewlett-Packard’s Personal Manual. purchased your LaserJet series Il. Peripherals Assist Line for help.I@ I 1
Enter your Dealets number here: 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Mountain time (7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Wednesday)A-17
,YQUR GUIDE TO SETTINGUP YOUR LASERJET 1!1 PRINTER
This appendk contins the complete text of the pamphle~ Your Guide to Setting up Your LaserJet 111Printer (P/N 33449-90905), except for the titie page. This pamphlet is packed tith the bserJet III (HP 33449) printer. B-1, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUALB-2
, stat hereLocate each item in the checklist below:
❑ 1. LaserJet Ill printer ❑ 5. Paper tray ❑ 2. LaserJet Ill Printer User’s Manual ❑ 6. EP-S cartridge package and Quick Reference Guide a. EP-S cartridge ❑ 3. LaserJet/// Printer Software b. Cleaning pad o Application Notes❑ 4. Power cord ❑ Get helpto Iifithe printerfromthe box. (The printer hghs 4S pounds.) Notifyyour Hewlett-Packard Waler immediately if any partsare missingor damaged.Minimum Location Requirements Are:
57” (144 cm) ● An area with space around the printer & as shown at the righttGAwell-ventilated roomI8(20 cm) ● Room temperature of 50° to W.5° F ● Relative humidity between 20°A andWYO
. A stable environment-no abrupt temperature or humidi~ changes . No exposure to chemicals or direct sunlight . A sturdy, level surface ● tine vokage that does not va~ more 22” (55 cm) than AI WA from that on printer’s nameplate —~I8“ (20 cm) B-3
, unpacking your Printer / Chti eati Wx asyou complete the step. ~ u Removethe packingfoam from the ❑ Open the printer to the fully open paper trayslot. position.L J
O Remove the patting foam from inside ❑ Remove the fuser assembly spacers ❑ (Rear Wew) Remove the top cover the printer. packing spacer. B-4,Installing the EP-S cartridge
CAUTION: Make sure you have removed all of the printer packing material. -.. m,::Z:-*’- ?-.,y’===:.-:‘-;:-z-(:~-i-;,r:i ..=:=H=:=-,-.- =- -: -..-,,,,-,,,, ,’-. ...,- -., ,’~:::::~:-.:-.-:_:- / -..:_ -, .\-. -,,, ,.,;_-T- :- .,, .,-’ - -;-—,,-,’0 , Q ❑ Lo@e the EP-S cartridge. It is in a ❑ Remove the EP-S cartridge from its ❑ Do not stand the EP-S cartridge on separate box that is included with bag. end. your printer. ❑ SIOWIYrock the EP-S cartridge five to six times, in the direaion shown, to distribute ❑ Open the printer to the half-open the toner. position. , I ❑ Slide the EP-S cartridge into the top of ❑ Bend the tab on the left side of the ❑ Pull the tab straight out and away from the orinter, EP-S mtiridae back and forth until it the printer to remove the sealing tape. separates fr;m the @rtridge. 10I ❑ If the tab separates from the tape, pull ❑ Discard the sealing tape strip, which is ❑ Push firmly to be sure the EP-S out the tape. abOLl 22 inches (55 cm) 10ng. cartfidge is seated properly. You’re doing great! Now go to section @. B-5, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUALInserting the Cleaningpad
o ❑ Locate the cleaning pad and remove it from is plastic wrap.J
19’I
❑ Opn the printerto the tiny open ❑ Locate the fuser assembly. Identify the fuser assembly by green color and the position. WARNING-HIGH TEMPERATURE message.(lt will not be hot until powered up.) ❑ Open the fuser assembly cover. ❑ Use the fek tip on the end of the ❑ Remove and discard the felt tip from cleaning pad to wipe the fuser the cleaning pad. assembly roller.I
❑ Place the cleaning pad on the fuser a Close the fuser assembly cover. The ❑ Closathe ptinter, assembly roller. cover is slightly ajar when fully closed.B-6
,Loading the paper Paper Specifications
Your HP LaserJet Ill printer works well with many common papers, particularly xerographic bond papers with basis weights from 16 to 36 pounds (60 to 135 g/m2). However, we recommend you test a particular paperto determineif its performance is acceptable. Refer to Appendix D: Paper and Print Media Specifications,” in the LaserJet Ill Printer User’s Manual.NOTE
H4W-Packard netiherwrranta nor recommends the use of a particular paper, Paper properties are subject to change by papar manufacturers and Hetiett-Packard has no control over such changes. The customer assumes all responsibility as to the quafity and patirmanm of paper. Akhough testing helps to characterize performanm, long-term =isfadion requires process quari mntrol by the manufacturer, and proper handling until use. o ❑ Locate the paper tray. ❑ Remove the cover and all packing ❑ Load the paper tray up to the limit ❑ Ensure that the paper is flat in the tray material from inside the tray. - tabs (about 2~ sheets of 20 pound at all four corners. paper). ❑ Replace the tray cover. ❑ firmly insert the paper tray in the printer. B-7, connectintghe printerto power supply 0 Lo~te the power cord. m (Rear Mew) Locate the power stitch m— Make sure the Power ~fich is in the — on the back of the printer. OFF (0) position. ❑ Plug the power cord into the ❑ CA~lON Make sure you plug the ❑ Turn on your printer. K SELF TEST receptacle on the back of the printer. other end of the power cord only into will appear momentarily in the display a 12@volt AC power outlet. window. The self test will last approximately w seconds.Printer Control Panel
O Make sure the Ready and On Une indicatorsare litand the displaywindowshowsM READY., HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL display messageIanWage If you want your control panel messages displayed in English, goon to Section O. If you want them in French, German, Italian, or Spanish, do the following:
\ O R- D W“ti COFNIGMNGUAGE / \ -@ I \ \ J ❑ Turn the printer off. ❑ Hold the Enter key while turning the L~ Wat until CONFIG UNGUAGE appears. printer back on. Release Enter key. 05 SELF TEST appears. ~]R I \ \ I
❑ Wai for LANGUAGE= ENG to appear. ❑ Press the Enter key to save your n Press the On Line key. The On Line Press the + key to choose your choice. An asterisk (*) will appear indicator light will come on. language. beside your language seledion. ❑ Your display messages will now be in the language you seleded. B-9, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL ““1- ❑ Press the On tine key once to take ❑ Briefly Press and release the ❑ Foti samples for the printer’s internal the printer off-fine again. (The On Line Print Fontsflest key. fonts are printed. inditior goes out.) \\ ❑ Hold down Print Fonts key 3 seconds ❑ Afier about W semnds a one page until 05 SELF TEST appears in display self-test is pfinted. window, then release. ❑ Hold down the Print Fonts key for ❑ After about W semnds a continuous ❑ Press the On Line key to stop the about 5 se~nds until 04 SELF TEST self test begins printing. Now go to continuous self test. W will flash. A appears in the display window. step 8, few more pages will print before the printer returns On Line. If problems persist, retry the stepson this page. If problems still persist conts~ your internal suppoti organi~tion or your HP dealer.I
❑ When printing stops, turn off the ❑ NOTE If above samples did not ptint, printer. make sure you’ve removed the seating tape (Seaion C, steps 7-10). B-10, Centronicaparallelisthe factorydefauk. If you know you want to use a Centronics parallel interface, go to section 9. a. AB. 0A\0 (Rear Mew) NOTE: ENSURE PRINTER AND PC ARE TURNED “OFF”BEFORE CONNECTING THE CABLE. Your printer communicates with your computer through an interface (sometimes called a “port”) at each end. Refer to your PC’s user documentation to determine the location and kinds of intetiaces your PC has,or consultyourdealer.YourLaserJet Ill printer provides both Centronics parallel and serial interfaces. The interface connections are on the back of your printer.If your PC doesn’t already have a Centronics parallel or serial interface, you may need to order
and install a special interface card for your PC.For the HP Vectra, the part numbers are:
Centronics parallel interface - HP24540B Serial interface - HP24541 B If you have a different type of computer, contact your dealer. o Use a Centronics parallel interface when:A ● Your printer is less than 10 feet (3 meters) from your computer. ● You send primarily graphic information or SORfonts to the printer. ● Your computer does not have an available serial interface.I* I I J
Graptic Information A typical parallel cable looks like this: Computers Computer End Parallel Cable Printer End HP Vectra IBM PC/ATw/PS2 HP Pan# Length Compaq = - AT&T 25 Pin Male HP92284A 6.6 (2.0 m) 36 Pin Male Plug Plus ❑ Choosethe right caMe for your computer. Dd you decide on a Centronica parallel intetiace? If so, go too. B-1 1,HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL
0( continued) o Use a serial intetiace when:B _. —● Your printer must be more than 10 feet (3 meters) but less then 50 feet(15 meters) tiom your wmputer. ● Your mmputer das not have an available Centronia parallel interfa=. Tetiual InformationA ~pical serial cable looks like this: Computers Computer End Serial RS232 Cable Printer End
IBM PC, PCN/PS 2 HP Part# Length & IBM Compatibles - Compaq Portable -25 Pin Female HP-1 7255D 3.9’ (1.2 m) AT&T 25 Pin MalePlug HP-9221 9J 16.7’ (5.0 m) Plug HP Vectra IBM PC/AT & Length IBM Compatibles Compaq Deskpro m ‘ppa*# - 286/386 9 Pin Female HP24542G 9.9 (3.0 m) 25 Pin Male Plug ———- Plug HP Vectra HP Pati# Length (Dual Serial Card) “~ = - 25 Pin Male HP17255M 3.9’ (1.2 m) 25 Pin Male Plug HP13242-WOIO 16.7’ (5.0 m) Plug ❑ Choosethe right able for your computer. Did you decide on a setialinterfam? If so, go to ~.B-12
, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUALSet u.ptoU&sea Centronics
parallel interface Make sure both your computer and printer are turned off, and then plug the cable into your computer and your printer. Use the wire clips to attach the cable to your printer. Note into which parallel port on your computer (e.g.,LPTl or LPT2) you plug the cable; you will need this information later. When complete, turn your printer and your computer ON again. ❑ Use wire chps to attach Centronics parallel ableConfigurthee control panel for a Cenironies parallel interface
Follow these steps Only to veri~ the Centronics parallel configuration setting. Step Press Printer Displays: (If not, press + or - until it does, and then press the Enter key.) 1 On ~ne 00 READY (The On Line indicator goes out.) 2 Menu (Hold down for AUTO CONT=OFF* ~ approximately 5 seconds.) 3 Menu 1/0 = PARALLEL* ~ \ 00 READY (TheOnbne indicator lights.) I T Indi-tes the factory default. Now go to Q B-13, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL set up touse a serial interface Make sure both your computer and printer are turned off, and then plug the cable into your computer and your printer. Use a small screwdriver of necessary) to attach the cable to the printer. Note into which serial port on your computer (e.g., COM1 or COM2) you plug the cable; you will need this information later. When complete, turn your printer and your computer ON again. ,, — 10 I ❑ Attach the serial cable connedor to the serial 1/0 port on the back of the ptinter. ~ou may need to use a small screwdriver).Step Press Printer Displays: (If not, press + or- until it does,
and then press the Enter key.) 1 On Une 00 READY (The On bne indicator goes out.) 2 Menu (Hold down for AUTO CONT= OFF* ~ approximately 5 seconds.) 3 , Menu 1/0 = PARALLEL* ~ 1 ! 4 + (Plus) or - (Minus) I I;O=SERIALI5Enter I/O= SERIAL* 6 Menu SERIAL= RS-232* t 7 Menu BAUD RATE =9600* ~ 8 Menu ROBUST XON=ON*t 9 Menu DTR POLARITY= HI* ~I 10 I On Une I 00 READY (The On Une indicator lights.) I
+ Indicates the facto~ default. If you are going to use serial RS-422 cable, refer to Appen&x F, .Interfaces”, in the LaserJet Ill User’s Manual (P/N 33449-90901 ). B-14,HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL The following procedure:
● Puts the instructions your computer needs to be able to talk to the printer into a file called AUTOEXEC.BAT. ● Uses the EDLIN editor that comes with DOS. ● Works with either MS-DOS or PC-DOS operating systems. Most IBM and lBM-compatible computers use one of these operating systems. If your computer does not use either MS-DOS or PC-DOS, contact your computer dealer for configuration instructions. Step What to DO How to DO h UYW the command in this procedure and press the Return key, as indiwted by Q.) 1 I Turn on vour ~rinter. I 2 ] Turn on vour mm~uter. I 3 Make sure you are in the root CD\ ~ diresto~ of the disk fromwtich you boot your mmputer. 4 Chwk to see if the DIR AUTOEXE. BCAT~ AUTOEXEC.BAT file appears in the hsting. ,- 5 If the message “File not found t appears, go to step 7.I
s 6 Make a backup mpy of your COPYAUTOEXE. BCATAUTOEXE. SCAV~ existing AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Name k AUTOEXEC.SAV.* ‘+ 7 Look for the files MODE.COM DIR * . COM @ I and EDLIN.COM in your root dke@ory.** r6 If MODE.COM and EDLIN.COMaPPear in the dkedory listing,I
goto @. 9 If MODE.COM and EDLIN.COM Place your DOS disk ic drive A and ~pe the follow’ng do not appear commands: in the dir-ory tisting, copy COPYA:MODEC.OM @ them from your DOS disks to your root dir~ory. COPYA:EDLIN.COMm . - 10 GO to Q. I *lf you need to recoveryour originalAUTOEXEC.BATfile later, type: COPY AUTOEXEC.SAV AUTOEXEC, BAT ** MODE,COM and EDLIN,COM sre on YourOriginalDOS di~k~, ~ you have a hard ~~k, these files may be in a subdiretiory,B-15
,HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL Prepare your computer to
communicate with the printerIf you have an ASCll text editor, you may want to use it instead of Edlin to enter the correct MODE
commands. You must be able to save your AUTOEXEC.BAT file as a standard ASCII text file.If your parallel port has a name other than “LPT1” or “LPT2 - or if your serial port has a name other
than “COM1 or COM2 - substitute that name in the examples below. Type EDLIN AUTOEXEC.BAT and press return.Your screen’should look Ukeone of the following: e e If your screen looks likethis,followcolumnA instructions. If your screenlook flkethis, followcolumnB instructions.ColumnA ColumnB
A-1 Type L and press [Enter] to hatthe contentsof the file. My 51 Type 1i and press [Enter]. Thiswill allow you totiaad a new time the * prompt is displayed, you can type L to li~ the line 1. 1:* will appar. TMs prompt dlowa you to enter data wntenta of your file. on the indicated line. A-2 Mthere are no existing MODE or PATH commands (lines %2 Type either the parallel or serial MODE command(s) beginning with the word MODE or PATH) in your file, go to (whicheveris oorreotfor your apphcstion), pressing [Enter] step 51 in @lumn B. at the end of each line For Parallelconfiguration,type the MODE sommand: MODE LPT1:,,P and press [Enter] For Serial sonflguration,type the MODE mmmands MODE COMI :8s00,N,8,1,P and press [Enter] MODE LPT1:=COM1 and praaa [Enter] k3 Mthe existing MODE oommand(s) are mrreof, no change is 53 After the MODE commands have been entered, hold the required. Type E to exit and press [Enter]. Go to section“N. CTRLkey down and~ C to add the tine(s) to the file. For Parallal configuration,the MODE command should be MODE LPTI :,,P For Serial mnfiguration, the MODE mmmands should be: MODE COMI :~,N,8,1,P MODE LPT1:=COM1A4 Hthere are existing MODE mmmsnds which improperly M Type Land press[Enter]to hstthecontentsofthefile. inspect
mnfigure the communications pod, they must be deleted. the nw linescsrefullyto ensurethat no typographioslerrors have been made. To delete one fine, type the number of the line to be E5 n you have made an error, type the line number of the line deleted, followed by D to delete the fine, then type L to list and press [Enter]. Then re-type the line corretily and pres the contentsof the file and press [Enter]to initiatethe [Enter]. Repeat steps M and S5 untilall items are correti. command (e.g., type 5DL and press [Enter] to delete line 5 and list the contentsof the file.) A-5 Once the incorrectmode commands have been remowd, if ~ mm all of the edits have been made, type E and press the AUTO=EC.BAT file oontainsno PATHmmmand (a line [Enter]to exit and SSW. beginningwithPATH), proceed tOSteP51. 07 Rebootyour somputer by holding down the CTRL, ALTand nyour AUTO=EC.BAT file containsa PATHcommand, the DELkeys. This initiatesyour new AUTO~EC.WT file. mode commands should be insefled after the PATHtine. Type the number followingthe PATHline, type i and press [Enter] (e.g., if the PATHmmmand is on line 1, type 2i and press [Enter]). Proceedwith step B-2. If you need to leave the EDLIN utihty bafore editing or without saving your edit= If you are at #:* (e.g.,1 :*), hold down the CTRL key and type C. If you are at an *, then type Q and press [Enter].B-16
, 1. Make sure your computer and printer are on, and your printer is on-line. 2. At your MS-DOS prompt, type DIR > PRN and press@. C:\>DIR >PRN r c.\> 1 3. The mmputer sends a li~ of the files to your LaserJet Ill printer. When the Form Feed indimtor lights,the printerhas receiveddata. Pressthe On Mne key to take the printer off-line and press the Form Feed key to eje~ the page. 4. Press the On Une key to putthe ptinterback on-lineand prepare itto receive more data. 5. if you are having trouble, go to @.Con~atulations! You’re Done! Now you can set up your sotiare to work
with your new LaserJet 111printer. B-17, ● Was your mmputer or printer on when you connected your interface @le? Turn off your computer and printer, wait 1S seconds, and turn them on again. Continue with@. ● Is the interface port configured correctlfl - Your cable may not be connected to LPT1 for a parallel interface or COM1 for a serial interface. Try worting through 9, @ , and @ again, substituting LPT2 if you have a parallel interface, or COM2 if you have a serial interface. ● Are all of the cables and power cords attached properlfl - Check all of the connections. ● Is the On Line indicator on the printer control panel lit? - If not, press the On Line key.Is the printer working properl~ Run the self-test described in o. - If necessa~, call your HP Dealer or HP Sales Representative. ● Is your mmputer working proped~ - Run an apphcation that works. - If necessary, all your computer dealer or manufacturer. ● Have you sat up the control panel proparlfl - Hold down the Menu key for about 5 sewnds until the AUTO CO~= OFF* appears in the display window. Then step through the configuration settings, If necessary, repeat O for a parallel interface or @ for a serial interface, and continue through the rest of this Guide. ● Hav9 you set up your AUTOEXEC.BAT file properl~ Type TYPEAUTOEXEBCA. TonYouCromPUatnedrpres~s . Chectkhefistinfogrerrors in the fine or lines you added. If necessary, repeat ~, ~, and @. ● D(, you have the correct printer mble? Chti ~ for:1 parallel interface or serial interface @bles. - If necessary, obtain the correct @ble.If you still need help...
Cdl the HP D~er from ~om you Call H4ett-Packards Pemoti Consuk your &rJet Ill Uaafs Manual. purdssed your LaearJ@ Ill. Peripherals Assist tine for help. (208) 32%2551 Enter your Dedefs number here ZW am. to 6W p.m. Mountain time (ZW a.m. to 4~ p.m. Wednesday)B-18
, c GENE.c-3 PROTECT THE BOARD AND YOURSELF .c-3 IDENTIFY THE BOARD .c-4 INST~ THE BOARD .c-5 TEST INSTfiLED BOARD .C-7 IN CASE OF D~FICULW .C-8 MEMORY BOARD REMOVAL .C-8 c-1. Memo~ Board Identifimtion . , .c-4 c-2. Removing RAM Expansion Access Cover .c-5 c-3. Meti Cover Plate Removal .C-6 c-4. Instilinga Board.C-6 c-5. Seating Board .c-7 C-6. Removing Board .C-8 c-1, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL c-2, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUALGENERAL
For instigation of expansion RAM memory for the HP 33440 (1 Mbyte, P/N 33443; 2 ~yte, P/N 33444; 4 Mbyte, P/N 33445), see the instructions packaged with the boards. The information below appears as Appendix E in the herJet III User’s Mmual. Instigation of the HP 33474B one-megabyte or HP 33475B two-megabyte RAM memory board Wows the HP 33449 printer’s standard memory to be expanded up to an additiond four megabytes. Any combination of one- or two-megabyte boards – up to a mtimum of four megabfies of expanded memory– can be instiled in either of the printer’s two memory expansion slots. Additiond printer memory allows page protection to be implemented, more data to be stored in the page buffer, more soft fonts to be dotioaded, and more macros to be defined. Note For the HP 33449 printer, use ody revision “B” or later memory boards (that is, 8 HP 33474B and HP33475B). E the board is to be instiled in a device other than the HP 33449 printer, consult the manual for that device.PROTECT THE BOARD AND YOURSELF
Since the memory board contains electrid components easily damaged by small amounts of static electrici~, the following cautions shotid be obsemed: w If possible, use an antistatic wrist strap and a grounding mat such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 9300-0933).OR
Before removing the board from its antistatic bag, touch the surface of the bag and any bare sheet meti surface on the printer. Maintain contact with bare meti surfaces on the printer frame while handling the board. ■ To prevent static electriti~ bufldup, avoid activities such as moving about the work area, especially if it is mrpeted. ■ Handle the board mre~y at dl times. Avoid touching board components. Never flex or put excessive pressure on it. warning Hazardous voltages are present in the printer. Never remove any access cover or work near exposed electrical parts while power is connected. @ c-3, !DEN7!FYf TE!E BOARD # Before in~ation, identi& the board. 1. For part numbers, refer to Figure C-1 and the tible below (~ indimtes that the bst five digits are manufatiuring numbers that may change). 2. H you have not received the correct board, no@ Hewleti-Packard or your authotied deder immediately. 3. If the board till not be intiled immediately, place it in a cool, dry place in its original packaging. c-4, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL j ~~~~~-~ ~~=qg p(n,qpr>,b i H& k)uknw The following section describes procedures for the removal of two cover plates, insertion of the board(s), and the replacement of the cover plates. Unless otherwise note~ replacement is the reverse of removal. A screwdriver (flat-blade or Phillips) is needed. ?Nole ~rst, read all instructions caretily. Wke sure all procedures are understood before be@nning installation ~,~ <> 1. Switch printer OFF and unplug power cord. 2. In order to remove the plastic W Expansion access cover on the printer’s leti side base, position the printer so that its left side overhangs a supporting surface by approximately one inch (see Figure C-2). flh 1” (25.4 mm) !,17-F dvdb nir. a The printer weighs over 50 pounds. If necessary, ask for assistance in moving ~q~j, it about the work area. (~~ 3. Remove the plastic W Expansion access cover by inserting the tip of your finger in the slot under the center of the lower edge, then pulling the plate outward and downward (see Figure C-2), c-5, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL - 4. Loosen the three mptive screws (they mnnot be removed) secufing the me~ cover Plate (see Figure c-3). Grasp the meti tab and slide the plate h the lefi (rear), fien remove it by Pulling ● on the &b. To discharge static electrici~ which could damage the board or sensitive internal printer components, maintin contact with bare sheet meti printer surfaces during instigation. — Figure 6-3. Metal Cover Piate Removal 5. To instil the first board, remove it from its antistatic packa~ng (be sure to follow antistatic procedures previously mentioned) and hold it with the surface to which the component are attached up. Slide the board into the printer using the slot guide rtis (see Figure C-4). Be sure ● the board is within the guide rails. Note Nthough a single board ma.v be instiled in either the fomard or rear slot, the forward slot is suggested for the first board, Figure C-4. installing a Board C-6 — ., 6. To filly seat the board, hold the printer with your free hand, then fimly push against the board’s flat green plastic area (see Figure C-5). 7, If a second board is to be instiled, insert it into the empty slot in the same manner. Be sure to fimly push against the green plastic area to properly seat the board’s pin connector as descfibed in step 6. 8. To replace the meti cover plate, first place the lefi slot behind the left screw, then tign the center slot over the center screw and push in until the plate is flush with the base. Ne~ slide the plate to the right as far as possible (until the right-most screw is engaged), and tighten the three screws. Replace the plastic cover. —TESTINSTALLEDBOARD
With the power switch OFF, plug in the power cord, then switch the printer ON. (Depending upon the amount of in~led memory, the printer may take up to 55 seconds to reach on-line status.) Run a 05 SELFTESTby taking the printer off line, then holding down the (PRINT FONTS/TESTj key until 05 SELF TEST is displayed (about three seconds). When the printing portion of the test begins, 06 PRINTINGTESTwill be displayed. If the board is operating correctiy, the self-test printout will show one of the w size messages in the Self-Test Message Table below. SELF-TEST MESSAGE TABLE .Fo~@ slot -Wr “slot W Size Mwwge lM None W size: 2048K bfles t2 M INone IW size 3072K b~es I lM lM W size 3072K b~es 2M lM W size 4096K bfies lM 2M M size: 4096K bvtesII“ 2M ]2M ]W size: 5120K bfies c-7,INCASE OF DIFFICULTY @
If W size is incorrectly reported, repeat steps 1 through 8, checking to be sure the memory board pin connectors are fimly seated. The foUowing error messages may appew ■ 53-1 ERRORUNITor 53-2 ERRORUNITIndimtes an error onaWmansion board. The number following the dash indicates which qansion board failed (1 indica~s the board in the right (front) slot 2 the lefi (rear) slot). E this error appears, now Hewleti-Packad or your authorized alder for assistance. (The user may resume printing by fiting the [-] key.) ■ 57-1 ERRORUNITor 57-2 ERRORUNITI:ndicates that more than four megabfies of =panded memory have been in~ed. The etira memo~, in one megab@ increments, in the indicated slot (1 or 2) will be ignored. but U.P to four me~—bms toti W be used. TO resume P~nting, click the (-] key. ■ 63 SERVICEERRORH this message appears, a board maybe defective or incorrectly in&led. Firm atiempt to clear the error by switching the printer off and then on again. E this does not clear the error, switch the printer OFF and check to be sure the board is seated properly. K this error @l app=s, nom Hewleti-Packard or your authorized deder for assistance.MEMORYBOARDREMOVAL
To remove a board, first access it by repeating steps 2 through 4 in the “Ind the Boar&’ section, Then unseat it (see Figure C-6) by squeezing the green tibs together w~e pfling toward you. Place the board in antistatic pack~rig. Figure C-6. Removing Board C-8,D CABLING DIAGRAMS
D. O~R~W .D-3 P-LEL WTERFACE .D-3 SEW INTERFACE .D-4 C~L~G SCHE~TICS .D-5 D-1, TWid PC~T (and compatible) and PS/2 pin assi~men~ .D-5 D-2. TWid AT (and compatible) pin assi~menti .D-5 D-3. TWid ~-422A 25-25 pinassiWmenti.D-6 Tables D-1. Padlel Intetiace Connector Pin Assi~menti.D-3PmD-2. N-232-C and M-422A Pin Assi~ments and Sl@ Descriptions.D-4 D-1, The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers support an RS-232-C serial interface, an RS-422A differential serial interface, and a Centronics parallel interface. The back of the printer has two connectors, parallel and serial, allowing you to connect one of the three interfaces. Use the Control Panel Confi~ration Menu to configure the interface. The printer stores configuration information in non-volatile RAM, which means the printer saves the configuration even if you turn off the printer. For more detailed information, see the bserJet series 11Printer Technical Reference Manual or the berJet III Printer Technical Reference Manual.PARALLEL INTERFACE
To configure your printer for parallel 1/0 operation, use the Configuration Menu and the instructions in the pamphlets, Your Road Map to setting up Your kserJet series II Printer (see Appendti A) or Your Guide to Setting Up Your tiserJet III Printer (see Appendh B). When you configure your printer for parallel operation, you ean send data to the printer using the Centronics par~el communication protocol. Table D-1 lists the signals and pin designations used for parallel communication. Table D-1. Parallel Intt Connector Pin Assignments. Pin- ~~‘-:;: :si*I :;.. -;;,-::< Data 1 (Input) 2 Data 2 (Input) 3 = t Data 3 (In~ut) 4 22 Data 3 (GND)I Data 4 (In~ut) 5 23 Data 4 (GND)
Select (Output) 13 31 I-In~ut Pfime (In~ut) IE NC 14NC 15o mc 16Chassis GND 17 I +5 mc (outDut) 18 36 INC I
The dash (-) before some signals indicates that the signal is negative true (active LOW). GND means the connection is a ground. NC indicates that the pin has no connection. D-3, ..SERIAL lNTERFACE a
Use the Configuration Menu and the instructions in either Appendk A or Appendk B to configure your printer for se~ 1/0 operation. men you configure your printer for serial operation, you transfer dab to the printer using serial communication protocol. You mn use either RS-232-C or RS-422A cable. Table D-2 fists RS-232-C and RS-422A pin assignment and signal descriptions. Those pins not appearing in the table are not used. Table D-2. RS-232-C and RS-422A Pin Assignments and Signal Descriptions. 12 Transmitted dati (data from the .~rinter). output 3 Received data (received by the printer). Input Received data inverted (RDA) (received by *Input printer) ~ 4 Request to send. This signal is HIGH whenever * outputK the printir is powered ON. F 15 Clear to send. This signal is not required for * Input
the printer to transmit flow control characters. (Del/Dc3). k6 Data set rmdy. This signal is not required for * Inputthe printer to receive data. + 4I7 Signal ground. * *9 Send data inverted (SDA). output10 Send data noninverted (SDB). output Receive data noninverted (RDB). Input Data terminal ready. (Polarity can be set from output the printer Control Panel. Normally set to HI. 4 Refer to host interface specifications for polarity I reauiremenk.) *The asterisks iden~ signals that are used. D-4,The folloting serial mbling schematics are mid of ~M (AT~T) and compatible personal
computers using the standard (9/25) pin sefi~ M-232-C inte~ace. 1725SD 1,2m (4.0 h) 2s25 pin US 232 C Printer CPU 25 pin M 25 pinF1* *1 2 *3 * ; ~:o * \ ‘o~: bserJet side is always 25 pin role. Typi~l 25 pin to 25 pin RS-232C @nneclion (DTE to Printer) Ei~ur~ ~-%. ~YP;c~l ~G/~~ (~~~ CQ~P~t~~l~) and PS/2pin assignments 24542G 3.0 m (9.W) 925 pin RS Z= C CPU Printer 9 pin F 25 pin M 1+ 4 2+ 2 + ‘~: 5 *7 6< , 20 8+ 7 >8 Ty@~ 9 pin to 25 pin RS-232C Connection Figure D-2. Typical AT (and compatible) pin assignmentsD-5
,The foUoting mbling schematic is based on an HP Vectra PC tith an HP24541B M-422A
interface mrd instied. Your cotiguration may vary. RS 422A Printer HOST = pin M 25 pinM1—NC 2 — Nc 3 — RDA SDA —9 4 — NC 7 — SG SG . —7 10— SDB RDB—18 18— RDB SOB—10 20—NC 9 — SDA RDA—3 Ty@ml 25 pin to 25 pin RS422 Connetii~ (DTE 10Ptinler) Figure D-3. Typical RS-422A 25-25 p;n assignments. D-6, ~p ~~~~~/~p ~w.g p~~myti ~~~~~~ GENE.,.E-3 PCLPWNTER COMAS .E-3 PCL5 HP-GL/2 PRINTER COMWDS (HP 33449 ONLW .E-n CONTROL CODES .E-15 ROM-8 C-CTER CO~WION T~LE .E-16 E-1, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUALE-2
, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUALIn the printer command summary which follows, the portions which are in color are HP
33449-specific. The portions in white apply to both printers. The HP 33440 uses the PCL4 PrinterCommand Langaage. The HP 33449 uses the PCL5 Printer Command LanWage. PCL PRINTER COMMANDS FUNCTtON PARAMETER COMMAND tiEGiMAL VALUE HEXADECIMALVALUE JOB CONTROL COMMANDS RESET
RESET —I EcE 02? 069 IB45NUMBER OF COPIES #of Copies (l-99) IEc&j#x (X) 027 0% 10S #...# W8 (120) lB 266C #...# 5S (78) LONG-EDGE (LE~ 16266C #.,.# 55 (75) OFFSET REGIS~ATION SNORT-EDGEWOP) IB266C #.,.# 5A (7fl OFFS~ REGIS~ATIONPAGE CONTROL COMMANDS
PAGELENGTH and SIZE PAPER SOURCE Eject Page Ec&!w (h) 027 03S 10S 0480?2 (104) lB266C~4S (68) Paper Tray Auto Feed Ec&?lH (h) 027 0% 10S 049072 (104) IB266C31 46 (68) Msnual Feed Ec&!2H (h) 027 03S 108 0500?2 (104) 1B266C324S (68) Manual Envelope Feed Ec&!W (h) 027036106051072 (104) IB266C3348 (68) PAGE SIZE Executive Ec&l 1A (a) 027036 10s 049 m5 (97) IB266C31 41 (61) Letter Ec&j2A (a) 027 OS 108050065 (97) IB266C 3241 (61) Legal Ec&13A (a) 027036 10S051 W5 (97) IB266C3341 (61) A4 Ec&!26A (a) 027036108050054065 (97) IB266C 32%41 (61) (Envelopes) Monarch Ec&!wA (a) 027 03S 10S 056048 C65 (97) 1B266C %3041 (61) COM 10 Ec&!81A (a) 027036106056049065 (97) 1B266CW31 41 (61) DL Ec&!wA (a) 027 0% 108057048 N5 (97) IB266C39S041 (61) C5 Ec&!91A (a) 027038108057049065 (97) IB266C 3931 41 (61) PAGE LENGTH #of Lines Ec&/#p e) W7 038108 #...# 080 (112) IB266C #...# 50 (70)ORIENTATION
ORIENTA~ON IEc&!OO (0) 027038108048079 (111) 1B266C304F (6F)Ec&t10 (0) 027038108049079 (111) IB266C31 4F (6F) (111) 1B266C324F (6F) (111) 1B266C334F (6fl (1 f2) lB2661 #,..# 50 (70 — Valuea inthe parentheses identify the lower case of the termination character. Ttis value is used if the printer command is comtined.E-3
, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL MARGINS and TEXT LENGTH TOP MARGIN # of tines Eca~#E (e)’ 027 03S 106 #,.,# C69 (101) lB 266C #...# 45 (65) TE~ LENGTH # of tines Eca[#F (0 02703S 106 #...# 070 (102) lB266C #...# 46 (66) LE~ MARGIN #of Columns Ecaa#L (/) 027 0% 097 #...# 076 (106) lB2661 #...# 4C (6C) RIGHT MARGIN #of Columns Ecaa#M (m) 027 0% 097 #...# 077 (109) 1B2661 #...# 4D (6D) CLEAR — Ecg 027057 IB39 HORIZONTAL MARGINS1I1PERFORATIONSKIP MODE PERFORATION SKIP Disable Eca/OL (0 027038106 04S 076 (108) IB266C304C (6C) Enable Eca~lL (0 027 0SS lW 049076 (Ire) IB266C314C (6C) HORIZONTAL COLUMN SPACING HORIZONTAL #of 1/ 120 Increments Ecak#H (h) 027 ~ 107 #..,#O48O72 (104) IB266B #...# 4B (68) MOTION INDEX WMI) VERTICAL LINE SPACING VE~CAL MOTfON #of 1/48’ Increments E~a/#c (c) 027 03S 106#...#W8076 (99) IB 266C #,..# 43 (m) INDEX WMI) LINE SPACING 1 line/inch Eca~lD (d) 027038108049 ~8 (loo) 1B266C3144 (64) (Lines per Inch) 2 lines/inch Ecat2D (d) 027038108050068 (loo) 1B266C3244 (64) 3 lines/inch Ecaf3~ (d) 0270S8 106051066 (lW) IB266C3344 (64) 4 lines/inch Eca~4~ (d) 027038106052068 (lCo) 1B266C3444 (64) 6 hnes/inch E~a[6D (d) 027038106054068 (loo) 1B266C 3644 (w) 8 hnes/inch Eca~8D (d) 027038106056 ~ (lm) 1B266C %44 (64) 12 lines/inch Ecat12D (d) 027 0% 108049 OW 066 (lm) IB266C31 3244 (64) 16 tines/inch Ecaj16D (d) 027 OW 108049054068 (lm) 1B266C31 3644 (64) 24 hnes/ inch Ec&j240 (d) 027036108050052 C68 (Iw) IB266C323444 (64) 46 hnes/inch Eca/@D (d) 027 0% 108052056 N8 (lW) IB266C34%44 (m) VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL VERTICAL POSITION # of Rows Ecaa#R (r) 027038 ~? #...# 062 (1 14) lB 2661 #,..# 52 (72) # of Dots Ec*p#Y (Y) 027042112 #...# 089 (12 1) lB 2A 70 #...5959 (79) # of Decipoints Ecaa#V (v) 027038 W? #...# 086 (118) 1B2661 #...# 56 (76) HORIZONTAL POSfTION # of Columns E~a~#c (c) 02703097 #...# 067 (99) 1B2661 #..,# 43 (63) #of Dots Ec*p#X (x) 027042112 #...# 088 (120) IB 2A 70 #.,.# 58 (78) #of Decipoints Ecaa#H (h) 027038097 #...# 072 (104) IB2661 #...# 48 (68) HALF LINE FEED IEC= 027 ml 1B3D Values in the parentheses identi~ the lower caae of the termination character. This value ia usad if the printer command is combned.E-4
, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL -., ‘.~uNcTiQN PARAMETER.- ,.‘..COMMAND DECIMAL VALUEHEXADECIMAL VALUE
END-OF-LINE TERMINATION LINE TERMINATION CR=CR LF=LF; Ec&kOG (9) 027038107048071 (103) 1628863047 (67) FF=FF CR= CR+LF; Ec&kl G (9) 027038107049071 (103) 1B288B31 47 (67) LF=LF FF=FF CR=CR Ec&WG (9) 027038107050071 (103) 1628863247 (67) LF=CR+LF FF=CR+FF CR= CR+LF; Ec&k3G (9) 027 0S8 107051071 (103) 1B288B 3347 (67) LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FFI
PUSH/POP POSITION I PUSH/POP POSl~ON Push Ec&~S (s) 027038102048083 (1 15) 1B28883053 (73) Pop Ec&fls (s) 027038102049083 (1 15) 1B26663153 (73)FONT SELECTION
SYMBOL SET SELECTIONt PRIMARY SYMBOL SET ISO 60: Norwegian 1 Ec(OD (d) 027040048 ~ (loo) 16283044 (64) *ISO61: Norwegian 2 Ec(1D (d) 027040049 ~ (100) 16283144 (64) ISO 4: United Kingdom Ec( IE (e) 027040049 W9 (101) IB2831 45 (65) *ISO 25 French (obsolete) Ec(OF (0 027040046070 (102) 1B283D46 (66) ISO 69 French Ec( 1F (0 027040049070 (102) IB2831 48 (66) *HP German (obsolete) Ec(OG (9) 027040048071 (103) 16283047 (67) ISO21: German Ec( IG (9) 027040049071 (103) 1B2831 47 (67) ISO 15: Italian Ec(Ol (0 027040048073 (105) IB283049 (69) *ISO 14 JIS ASCII Ec(OK (k) 027040048075 (107) lB28~4B (6B) *ISO 57: Chinese EC(2K (k) 027040050075 (107) 1B28324B (6B) ECMA-94 Latin 1 Ec(ON (n) 027040048 78 (1 10) 1B28304E (6E) ISO 11: Swedish Ec(OS (s) 027040048083 (115) 16283053 (73) *HP Spanish (obsolete) Ec(IS (s) 027040 W9 083 (115) 16283153 (73) ISO 17: Spaniah Ec(2S (s) 027040050083 (115) 16283253 (73) *ISO 10 Swedish Ec(3S (s) 027040051083 (115) 16283353 (73) *ISO 16 Portuguese Ec(4S (s) 027040052083 (115) 16283453 (73) *ISO W Portuguese Ec(5S (s) 027040053083 (1 15) 1B283553 (73) *ISO 85: Spaniah EC(8S (s) 027040054083 (1 15) 16283853 (73) ISO 6: ASCII Ec(OU (u) 027040048085 (1 17) IB283055 (75) *ISO 2 IRV Ec(2U (u) 027040050 ~5 (117) 16263255 (75) Roman8 EC(6U (u) 027040056 85 (1 17) IB283855 (75) PC-8 Ec(lOU (u) 027040049048085 (1 17) 1628313055 (75) PC-8 DIN Ec(ll U (u) 027040049049085 (1 17) IB28313155 (75) Pc S50 Ec(12U (u) 027040049050 0S5 (1 17) 1628313255 (75) Values inthe parentheses identiw the lowercase of the termination character. This value is used if the printer command is combined. t Additional symbol sets are supported. Refer to the LaserJet series II and the LaserJet Ill technical manuals. *These symbol sets are becoming low usage sets and are not recommended for future use. The Primary font printer commands in this table can be specified as secondary by replacing the left parenthesis”(” in the command with a right parenthesis’’). ”E-5
,SPACING
PRIMARYSPACING Proportional EC(SI p 0) 027040115049060 (112) 1628733150 (70) Fixed EC(WP (P) 027040115 ~8 060 (1 12) IB287330% (70)PITCH
PRIMARY PITW # Characters/inch Ec(s#H (h) 027040115 #...# 072 (104) IB 2873 #...# 48 (68) SET PKW MODE 10.0 Ec&kOS (s) 027036107046063 (1 15) IB266BW53 (73) Compressed (18.5-16.7) Ec&~S (s) 027036107050063 (1 15) IB266B 3253 (73) Etite (12.0) Ec&k4S (s) 027038107052 0S3 (115) 1B266B 3453 (73) POINT SIZE PRIMARY HEIGHT # Points Ec(s#v (v) 027040115 #...# 066 (1 18) lB2873 #...# 56 (78)I STYLE
PRIMARY STYLE Upright Ec(sOS (S) 027040115048 W3 (115) IB2873W53 (73) Itahc IEc(sIS (S) 027040115049 ~ (i 15) 1B287331 53 (73) The LaserJet Ill printer allows you to apscify complex structures (contours, outfines, shading, etc.) and widths as well as posture. Refer to the LaaerJet Ill Techniml Reference Manual. STROKE WEIGHT k Ultra Thin EC(S.7B 027040115-055 ~ (96) 1B2873 -3742 (62)Extra Thin EC(5.6B 027040115-054066 (96) IB2873-%42 (82) Thin Ec(a-5B 027040115-053066 (96) IB2873-3542 (62) Extra Light EC(*4B 027040115-052 @ (w) IB2873-3442 (82) Light E~(*3B 027040115 -051”~ (96) IB2873-3342 (62) Demi Light EC(5.2B 027040115-050@ (96) 1B2873 -3242 (62) Semi Light Ec(s.1 B 027040115 -049m (98) IB2873-31 42 (62) Medium (normal) Ec(soB 027040115048066 (98) IB28733042 (62) Semi Bold EC(S1B 027040115049066 (98) IB287331 42 (62) Demi Bold EC(52B 027040115050066 (98) IB28733242 (62) Bold Ec(sB 027040115051066 (98) IB28733342 (62) Extra Bold EC(WB 027040115052W (98) IB28733442 (62) Black EC(*B 027040115053066 (98) IB28733542 (62) Extra Black EC(58B 027040 115054~ (98) IB2873%42 (62) URra Black EC(S7B 027040115055066 (98) IB28733742 (62)I PRIMARY~PEFACE
WPEFACE Courier EC(S3T (t) 027040115051064 (f 16) IB28733354 (74) Univers EC(S414BT (t) 027040115052084 (1 16) IB28733454 (74) LinePrinter Ec(sOT (t) 027040115048064 (1 16) IB28733054 (74) CG Times EC(S41OIT (t) 027040115053064 (1 16) IB28733554 (74) Many more typefaces are suppofled. Refer to the LaserJet series II and the LaserJet Ill technical reference manuals, Values inthe parentheses identify the lowercase of the termination character. This value is used if the printer command is combined. The pfimary font printer commands in thistablecanbe specified as secondary by replacing the left parenthesis “v in the command tih a right parenthesis “)”.E-6
,FUNCTION PARAMETER HEXADECIMAL.COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE VALUE
FONT DEFAULT FONTDEFAULT PtimaryFont Ec(@ 027040051064 IB28%40 Secondaw Font Et)@ 027041051064 IB293340UNDERLINE
UNDERLINE Enable Fixed Ec&dOD (d) 027038100046068 (loo) IB26H3044 (64) Enable Floating Ec&d3D (d) 027038100051068 (lW) IB26M3344 (64) Disable Ec&d@ 027 0= 100 W4 IB26U40 TRANSPARENT PRINT TRANSPARENT #of Bytes Ec&p#X[Data] 027 0% 112 #...# 066 lB2670#...#W PRINT DATAFONT MANAGEMENT
ASSIGN FONT ID Font ID # Ec*c#D (d) 027042099 #...# 066 (lm) IB 2A63 #...# 44 (64) FONT AND CHARACTER Delete all Fonts Ec*cOF (O 027042 W9 048070 (102) tB2A633046 (66) CONTROL Delete all Temporary Ec*cIF (O 027042 ~9 049070 (102) 1B2A633146 (Od) Fonts Delete Last Font ID EC*C2F (O 027042 ~? 050070 (102) 1B2A633246 (66) “Swcified Delete Last Character Ec*tiF .(0 -02? 042 ~g 051070. (102) IB2A63B46 (66) Specified Make Font Temporaw Ec*c4F (Q 027042 ~9 052070 (102) 1B2A633446 (66) Make Font Permanent EC*C5F (O _ 027042099053070 (102) IB2A63 %46 (66) Copy/ ‘ti9ntheCurrentli ~: ~c*a”F (0. 027 W> M9 054070 (102) 1B2A633646 (66) : l@k@ Font-as Ternprati -“” .,- FONT SELECTION BY ID NUMBER SELECT FONT (with ID #) ID # Primaw Font Ec(#X (x) 027040 #...# ~ (120) lB 28 #...# 56 (78) ID # Secondaw Font Ec)#X (x) 027041 #,.,# 068 (120) lB 29 #...# 58 (78)SOFT FONT CREATION
FONT DESCRIPTOR # of B~es Ec)s#W[Data] 027041 115#...#O67 lB2973 #,..# 57 (FONT HEADER) 30WNLOAD CHARACTER #of Bfles Ec(s#W[Data] 027040115 #...# 087 lB 2873 #...# 57 CHARACTERCODE Character Code # (decimal) Ec*c#E (e) 027042099 #,..# ~9 (101) lB 2A63 #...# 45 (65) l_~ Values inthe parentheses identiw the lowercase of the termination character. This value is used if the printer command is combined.E-7
,GRAPHICS
RASTER GRAPHICS RASER RESOL~ON 75 Dots/inch Ec*t75R (r) 027042116055053062 (1 14) IB2A74373552 (72) 100 Dots/inch Ec*tl~R (r) 027042118049046048062 (1 14) IB2A7431 303052 (72) 150 Dots/inch Ec*tl~R (r) 027042116049053048082 (114) 1B2A743135N52 (72) 300 Dots/ inch Ec*t~R (r) 027042116051 M048062 (1 14) IB2A7433 30 W 52 (72) Vslues in the parentheses identi~ the lowercase of the termination character. This value is used if the printer command is amtined., HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL Values in the parentheses identifi the lower caae of the termination character. Ttis value is usedifthe printercommandiscombined.E-9
, RECTANGULARAREA FILL =ILL RECTANGUUR AREA EC*W 1B2A633050 00) ~c~fp==” ,- - . ..-Ec*c;p- 327042 ~ 050060 (1 12)
Ec*c3P ~c*-m: .; ~ -: Ec*&~- - ~AT7ERN ID ohof Shading or Ec*c#G 027042099 #...# 071 (103) lB2A63#,..#47 (67) Type of Pattern SHADING 2010Gray EC*C2G (9) 027042099050071 (103) lB2Aa33247 (67) 100/0Gray EC*C10G (9) 027042099049046071 (103) lB2Aa331 3047 (67) 15% Gray EC*C15G (9) 027042099049053071 (103) IB2A6331 3547 (67) W% Gray Ec*c~G (9) 027042099051046071 (103) lB2A63~3047 (67) 45% Gray Ec*c45G (9) 027042099052053071 (103) 1B2A63343547 (67) 70% Gray Ec*c70G (9) 027042099055048071 (103) IB2A63373047 (67) 90% Gray Ec*c90G (9) 027042099057046071 (103) 1B2A63393047 (67) lWIO Gray Ec*cl~G (g) 027042099049046 U6 071 (103) IB2A6331 303047 (67) PA~RN 1 Horiz. Line Ec*c IG (9) 027042 ~9 049071 (103) IB2A633147 (67) 2 Vert. Mnea EC*C2G (9) 027042 W 050071 (103) IB2A633247 (67) 3 Diagonal Lines EC*C3G (9) 027042099051071 (103) IB2A633347’ (67) 4 Magonal Lines EC*C4G (9) 027042 W9 052071 (103) lB2Aa33447 (67) 5 Square Grid EC*C5G (9) 027042 W9 053071 (103) lB2Aa3S47 (6~ 6 Magonal Grid EC*C6G (9) 027042 ~9 054071 (103) IB2A63S647 (67) MACRO ID Macro ID # Ec&f#Y (Y) 027 0% 102 #...# 069 (121) lB 2666 #...# 59 (79) MACRO CONTROL Ec&fOX h) 027 0% 102 ~ 066 (120) 1B2666S058 (78) Stop Macro Def. Ec&flX (x) 027 0% 102049 ~ (120) 1B266631 56 (76) Excecute Macro Ec&f2X (x) 02703102050 OW (120) lB26a63256 (78) Call Macro Ec&f3X (x) 027 03a 102051 ~ (120) IB26663356 (78) Enable ~erlay EC&f4X (x) 027 0% 102052068 (120) lB2aa63456 (78) Disable @erlay Ec&f5X (x) 027 OS 102053 ~ (120) IB26663556 (78) Delete Macros Ec&f6X (x) 027038102 0S 068 (120) lB2a663658 (78) Delete All Temp. Macros Ec&f7X (x) 027038102055068 (120) lB2666375a (78) Delete Macro ID Ec&f6X (x) 027038102056068 (120) lB266a 3658 (78) Make Tempora~ Ec&f9X (x) 027038102057068 (120) IB26663958 (78) Make Permanent Ec&f10X (x) 027038102049046086 (120) lB2686313D5a (78)PROGRAMMING SWITCHES
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS ON Ecy 027089 1B59 OFF Ecz 02? No 1B5A END-OF-LINE WRAP Enabled Ec&sOC (c) 027038 i 15048067 (99) IB2673 3043 (63) Disabled Ec&alC (c) 027038115049087 (99) lB26733t 43 (63) Values inthe parentheses identify the lower case of the termination character. This value is used f the printer command is combned,E-10
,COMMAND MNEMONIC PARAMETERS* DUAL CONTEXT EXTENSIONS
ENTER PCL MODE Escoh#A O-Retain previous PCL cursor position and pallette 1- Use current HPGL pen position and pailette RESET ESCE None PRIMARY FONT FI Font–lD SECONDARY FONT FN Font–lD SCALABLE OR BITMAPPED SB 0- Scalable fonts only FONTS 1- Sitmapped fonts allowedPALETTE EXTENSIONS
TRANSPARENCY MODE TR O- Off (opaque) 1 -On (transparent) NUMBEROF PENS NP 2,4,8 SCREENEDVECTORS Sv ‘ [screen–type[,shadng[, index]]]HP-GL/2 Kernel VECTOR GROUP
*Parameters in brackats are optional. IE-n
,HP-GL/2 Kernel (continued)
CO~AND MNEMONIC- PARAMETEHS* .- ~. “. .- -POLYGON GROUP
*Parameters in brackets are optional. E-12,HP-GL/2 Kernel (continued) COMMAND MNEMONIC PARAMETERS* CHARACTER GROUP
*Parameters in brackets are optional. SELECT STANDARD FONT Ss SELECT ALTERNATE FONT SA ABSOLUTE DIRECTION DI [run,rise]; RELATIVE DIRECTION DR [run,rise]; ASSOLUTE CHARACTER SI [width,heightfiSIZE
RELATIVE CHARACTER S121 SR [width,height]; CHARACTER SLANT SL [tangent–of_anglel E~RA SPACE ES [width [,height]] STANDARD FONT SD [kind,value . [,kind,value]];DEFINITION
ALTERNATEFONT AD [kind,value ... [,kind,value]];DEFINITION
CHARACTER FILL MODE CF [fill-ode[,edgegen]~ LABEL ORIGIN LO [postion]; LABEL LB [char .,. [char]] lbterm DEFINE LABEL TERMINATO DT [ Ibterm[,mode]]; CHARACTER PLOT CP [spacesJines]; TRANSPARENT DATA TD [mode]; DEFINE VARIABLE TEN DV [path[,hne]lPATH E-13
,HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL HP-GL/2 Kernel (continued)
“- ‘C~MMAND- ‘, .1 -.. “’MNEMONIC. .-” ‘-~ ~ “.: ~ - ~ PARAMmERS%’ - ‘ ‘:. -LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP
*Parameters in brackets are optional. LIN:~PE : S: -.-:.- ~‘;. t z. “= ~~ “-~; :?. :~ ,“ :& , ‘-.- .- . ?.“: -,,.. .- . ,.,,, -,.: = ~. ~ini+6~P~~ernJpri9th[, rn:dell~ “-..-”, .- _ : ‘,,.=,-~k:, ~ ;..=:.;.:, ~-.=,; ,.. ..:. ,= -:-...”. - . .., .-:.:.. -:. .= ‘-ti$E’A~lB@6= ? “, ...- ;CA: .:.: :.=- .; [knd,vslue..-[,tifl~,va~ue]i “‘ .; “- ; : ;.; - :Pw; :.=_: -:.:. ~. .- PEN.6&-< ‘:;; ~,j =-:< ,. - ‘[wid~h[,pei]]; - -: - :, .“, - ,-. ~ ..”” ...; . .-,-. -: . .- .. .- :- .-:. .:-. - pEti&w UN;- - ~ ~= - :@u -, = “z .-”. ‘. -[reek:. -. .:.. -”” ..= .,- :CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP
*Parameters in brackets are optional. KALE ‘-.’=- Sc. - : ., -, ~, [x~,x2~yl,y2[,typ@Jetijbotiom]]]; : ~ .- , ,.. ;- .. .,-. ,.’ ,. -.-: ,-. : :-.:. ,- ”... “. ~l~xfatior,yl,~atior,2~ . ..- ‘l**,dw. ““-“.: ‘,-,” “. -~ ,.-:: ”-:-: [xLL,yLL:xUR:yUR~ / ,. : - ,=”;=:.!:; .~-;,- ”:- f-=..:. ~ lNPN-PIAN~Pi: ‘~-;. _: jp.-, :-; :-:“_- “ .-. .[plx,ply[,p2x,p2y]]; -_‘“ ‘-.. “.- ‘ .: -““ :- .-, -“: ::: ;’, -, .,.- -:.~:-.—. ,.:., .-: ::-: :-:- -:,R: .:, lNPti kEh~$:Pl ~-D,P2 ~ [plx,ply[,p2x,p2y]]; ,.- .-. .:.-. .“ tiFAULT VALUES “ “ D~.,.. .,- -. .’ - -lNrn~,UE - ,. -:..IN.: .= ; .-, - “[rig ‘-: .‘ .- ..-,=.,=,-,. - .s. - ,. .-. ..-Ro :.-, - : “.. -. “;i~?~~ti~lNA~ “-~ ‘:: [~ngie];-:, -“ ~~ “ , .“” “- - ,-, ~ ~ ., -.,”. , - -,~ ‘ ; Sy$.E.:M ~ “;” ~ -. ~ ;-. ~ .: .:...- -, .. -.;.- ... -,,-: .- ..- .,, .->. :‘, ..- -.,: -.. ..-, -:.“._. -. .-.- .-. ... .. .. :- .”- .“-:- ~g,VAp2EFML,Pa:!L ,’5. ffi- :=-:-:.-: ,- :: [nt=. : ,“=.: ,-. ” .’ .= .“ .“ -.:-, .- ”- ,- ~EpLoT ‘ ,:.,:’ -;=>=: : :’, - Rp : .- -, “- “_ [:~, . .. - -,.E-14
, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL Backspace B~ Move one column left unless at left margin in which case no action is taken, Line Feed LF Move to nefi print line while maintaining current column position. Form “F‘F Move to first line at top of the neti Feed page while maintaining current column -, position. .: Carriage ?R- Move to the left margin on current Return print line. Shift Out . ‘o Select characters that follow from the “ current secondary font until receipt of a Shift In. Shift In sI Select characters that follow from the current primary font until receipt of a Escape “~c” Indicates the beginning of a special control sequence (escape sequence). ~: .- Horizontal ~ Move to ne~ horizontal tab stop. The Tab -“ tab stops are at the left margin and at every eight columns to the right of the left margin. Space “,sP ‘ Move one column to the right unless at right margin in which case no action is taken. E-15, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUALROMAN-8 CHARACTER CONVERSIONTABLE
“Hex. - .pct :“-.- 00-” 000 01 001 SOH (stak of heading) 02 002 STX (stafl of text) 03 003 ETX (end of text) 04 004 EOT (end of transmission) 05 005 ENQ (enquiry) 06 006 ACK (acknowledge) 07 007 BEL (bell) 08 010 BS (backspace) 011 HT (horizontal tabulation) :; 012 LF (line feed) 013 VT (vertical tabulation) :: 014 FF (form feed) OD 015 CR (carriage return) 016 SO (shift out) :: 017 S1(shift in) 10 020 DLE (data link escape) 11 021 DC1 (device control 1 or X-ON) 12 022 DC2 (device control 2) 13 023 DC3 (device control 3 or X-OF~ 14 024 DC4 (device control 4) 15 025 NAK (negative acknowledge) 16 026 SYN (synchronous idle) 17 027 ETB (end of transmission block) 18 030 CAN (cancel) 19 031 EM (end of medium) 1A 032 SUB (substitute) lB 033 ESC (escape) lC 034 FS (file separator) lD 035 GS (group separator) lE 036 RS (record separator) lF 037 US (unit separator) 20 040 SP (space) 21 041 Exclamation point 22 042 Quotation mark 23 043 Number sign 24 044 Dollar sign 045 Percent sign 2 046 Ampersand 27 047 Closing single quote (apostrophe) E-16, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL Graphic. -.Hex -Dec.Ott.Description . ,“. ., - .“. ( 28- 40 050 Opening parenthesis ~ 29 41 051 Closing parenthesis 2A 42 052 Asterisk + 2B 43 053 Plus , 2C 44 054 Comma 2D 45 055 Hyphen 2E 46 056 Period (point) i 2F 47 057 Slant (solidus) o 30 48 060 Zero 31 49 061 One ; 32 50 062 Two 3 33 51 063 Three 4 34 52 064 Four 5 35 53 065 Five 6 36 54 066 Six 7 37 55 067 Seven 8 38 56 070 Eight 9 39 57 071 Nine 3A 58 072 Colon 3B 59 073 Semicolon : 3C 60 074 Less than sign = 3D 61 075 Equals sign > 3E 62 076 Greater than sign ? 3F 63 077 Question mark @ 40 64 100 Commercial At A 41 65 101 Uppercase A 42 66 102 Uppercase B : 43 67 103 UppercaseCD44 68 104 UppercaseDE45 69 105 Uppercase E 46 70 106 UppercaseFL47 71 107 UppercaseGH48 72 110 UppercaseHI49 73 111 UppercaseIJ4A 74 112 UppercaseJK4B 75 113 UppercaseKL4C 76 114 UppercaseLM4D 77 115 Uppercase M 4E 78 116 Uppercase N : 4F 79 117 Uppercase O E-17, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL .::~e~:,;2.. :;:.- B,&.&i-:.-.;;:::@::@t:f;:,,: 50 80 120 Uppercase P 51 81 121 Uppercase Q 52 82 122 Uppercase R 53 83 123 Uppercase S 54 84 124 Uppercase T 55 85 125 Uppercase U 56 86 126 Uppercase V 57 87 127 Uppercase W 58 88 130 Uppercase X 59 89 131 Uppercase Y 5A 90 132 Uppercase Z 5B 91 133 Opening square bracket 5C 92 134 Reverse slant 5D 93 135 Closing bracket 5E 94 136 Caret (circumflex) 5F 95 137 Underscore (low line) 60 96 140 Opening Single Quote 61 97 141 Lowercase a 62 98 142 Lowercase b 63 99 143 Lowercase c 64 100 144 Lowercase d 65 101 145 Lowercase e 66 102 146 Lowercase f 67 103 147 Lowercase g 68 104 150 Lowercase h 69 105 151 Lowercase i 6A 106 152 Lowercase j 6B 107 153 Lowercase k 6C 108 154 Lowercase I 6D 109 155 Lowercase m 6E 110 156 Lowercase n 6F 111 157 Lowercase o 70 112 160 Lowercase p 71 113 161 Lowercase q 72 114 162 Lowercase r 73 115 163 Lowercases 74 116 164 Lowercase t 75 117 165 Lowercase u 76 118 166 Lowercase v 77 119 167 Lowercase w E-18, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL Graphic Hex Dec ““od Dti@ion x 78 120 170 LowercasexY79 121 171 Lowercase y 7A 122 172 Lowercase z \ 7B 123 173 Opening brace (curly bracket) 7C 124 174 Vertical line } 7D 125 175 Closing brace (curly bracket) 7E 126 176 Approximate (tilde) i 7F 127 177 DEL (delete, rubout) 80 128 200 –undefined control code 81 129 201 -undefined control cod- 82 130 202 -undefined control code 83 131 203 –undefined control code 84 132 204 -undefined control cod- 85 133 205 -undefined control cod- 86 134 206 –undefined control code 87 135 207 -undefined control cod+ aa 136 210 -undefined control.cod- a9 137 211 -undefined control cod- aA 138 212 –undefined control cod+ aB 139 213 -undefined control cod- ac 140 214 -undefined control cod- 141 215 -undefined control code :: 142 216 –undefined control cod- aF 143 217 -undefined control code 90 144 220 –undefined control code 91 145 221 -undefined control code- 146 222 -undefined control code- :: 147 223 -undefined control code- 94 148 224 -undefined control code- 95 149 225 –undefined control code- 96 150 226 –undefined control cod- 97 151 227 -undefined control cod- 9a 152 230 -undefined control code- 99 153 231 –undefined control cod- 9A 154 232 –undefined control cod- 9B 155 233 -undefined control code- 9C 156 234 –undefined control code- 9D 157 235 -undefined control code- 9E 15a 236 -undefin~ control code- 9F 159 237 -undefined control code- E-19, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL - Hex. -”=..-..bec-‘.-,- .,-..;Qc.t:,:- AO 160 240 -undefined- Al 161 241 Uppercase A grave A2 162 242 Uppercase A circumflex 163 243 Uppercase E grave :: 164 244 Uppercase E circumflex A5 165 245 Uppercase E dieresis A6 166 246 Uppercase I circumflex A7 167 247 Uppercase I dieresis A8 168 250 Lowercase acute accent A9 169 251 Lowercase grave accent 170 252 Lowercase circumflex accent E 171 253 Lowercase dieresis accent AC 172 254 Lowercase tilde accent AD 173 255 Uppercase U grave 174 256 Uppercase U circumflex :: 175 257 Italian Iira (pound sterling) BO 176 260 Overscore (high line) 177 261 Uppercase Y acute :; 178 262 Lowercase y acute B3 179 263 Degree B4 180 264 Uppercase C cedilla 181 265 Lowercase c cedilla :: 182 266 Uppercase N tilde B7 183 267 Lowercase n tilde B8 184 270 Inverted exclamation mark B9 185 271 Inverted question mark 186 272 General currency symbol :: 187 273 Pound sterling sign BC 188 274 Yen sign BD 189 275 Section mark BE 190 276 Dutch guilder symbol BF 191 277 Cent sign co 192 300 Lowercase a circumflex cl 193 301 Lowercase e circumflex C2 194 302 Lowercase o circumflex C3 195 303 Lowercase u circumflex C4 196 304 Lowercase a acute 197 305 Lowercase e acute E 198 306 Lowercase o acute C7 199 307 Lowercase u acute I E-20, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUALGraphic Hex Dec:- Ott Description
200 “31O Lowercase a grave : ;: 201 311 Lowercase e grave b CA 202 312 Lowercase o grave u CB 203 313 Lowercase u grave 204 314 Lowercase a dieresis : ;; 205 315 Lowercase e dieresis o CE 206 316 Lowercase o dieresis u CF 207 317 Lowercase u dieresisA DO 208 320 Uppercase A belle
D1 209 321 Lowercase i circumflex ; D2 210 322 Uppercase O oblique E D3 211 323 Uppercase AE diphthong a D4 212 324 Lowercase a belle i D5 213 325 Lowercase i acute 0 D6 214 326 Lowercase o oblique B D7 215 327 Lowercase ae diphthong A D8 216 330 Uppercase A dieresis D9 217 331 Lowercase i grave A DA 218 332 Uppercase O dieresis u DB 219 333 Uppercase U dieresis G.. DC 220 334 Uppercase E acute I DD 221 335 Lowercase i dieresis DE 222 336 Lowercase es-zet ligature : DF 223 337 Uppercase O circumflex A EO 224 340 UppeGcaseA acute A El 225 341 Uppercase A tilde a E2 226 342 Lowercase a tilde B E3 227 343 Uppercase Eth d E4 228 344 Lowercase eth Icelandic i E5 229 345 Uppercase I acute i E6 230 346 Uppercase I grave 6 E7 231 347 Uppercase O acute o E8 232 350 Uppercase O grave o E9 233 351 Uppercase O tilde EA 234 352 Lowercase o tilde :. EB 235 353 Uppercase S hacek EC 236 354 Lowercase s hacek t ED 237 355 Uppercase U acute Y EE 238 356 Uppercase Y dieresis Y EF 239 357 Lowercase y dieresis E-21, ‘Gmphic P FO 240 360 Uppercase Thorn P F1 241 361 Lowercase thorn F2 242 362 Lowercase Catalan middle dot F3 243 363 Lowercase mu (micro) F4 244 364 Pilcrow (paragraph sign) F5 245 365 Vulgar fraction: three fourths F6 246 366 Minus sign F7 247 367 Vulgar fraction: one fourth 1/2 F8 248 370 Vulgar fraction: one half a F9 249 371 Female ordinal o FA 250 372 Male ordinal FB 251 373 Left pointing guillemots (quotes) FC 252 374 Medium solid box FD 253 375 Right pointing guillemots (quotes) FE 254 376 Plus over minus FF 255 377 -undefined-I I I I I I
E-22, HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL E-23,F HP 33449DISPLAYLANGUAGE MESSAGE TRANSLATIONS
contents F. HP 3W9 DISPMY WGUAGE ~SSAGE WSM~ONS Lodlzed Display Message Tables .F-3 Display Language Messages .,.F-3 Printing Menu Messages .F-3 ConfiWration Menu Messages .F-4 Stitus Messages .F-4 Attendance Messages .F-5 Error and Setice Messages .., .F-5 F-1,LocalizeDidsplay Message Tables The folloting tibles contin iodized tea translations for HP 33449 printer Control Panel display
messages. HP 33440 display messages are not iodized.Display Language Messages
~bh ‘.” .@d- - “’-. .’:;..,-: ;G+:,:-. ;-::.::? ;“ -” ‘Itwti: -”” ‘“” ,- Spm’@h: ~~‘-” “ LANGUAGE=ENG LANGUE=FR SPRAaHB=DEU LINGVA=lTh LENGUAJE=ESPPrinting Menu Messages
COPIES= COPIES= EXEMPLARE= NUM. aOPIE= aoPIAs= FONT SOURah TVPE POL= SaHRIFTQUELLE= SERIE aARATT= FONT FUENTE= [I,L,R,s] [I,G,D,TEL] [E,L,R,sj [I,S,D,SF] 11.Z.D,S1 FONT NUMBER= No POLIaE= S.NUMMER= N.aARATTERE= NUM.DE FONT= PITaH= ESPAaEMNT= Z.-DIaHTE= PASSO= PITaH= I ! PT. SIZh aoRPs= GROESSE= aoRPo= ~m50Pt0= PAPER= FORMA= FORMA= FORMATO= PAPEL= [LEmER,L*AL, [LWTER,LEGAL, [LEmR,LEGAL, ~ETTERA,LEGALE, [LETTER,LEGAL, IIIEXEC,A4] EXEa,A4] EXEC,A4] EX~,A4] I EXEa,A4]I I ENVELOPE= ENVELOP= UMSaHLAG= BUSTA= I SOBRE= I I [aOMIO~ONARa, [COMIOWONARa, [aOMIO,MONARC, [aOMIO~ONARa, [aOMIO~ONARa, IIIDL,a61 DL,aS] DL,a6] DL,a6] DL,a6] ORIENTATION=IP.LI ORIENTA~ON=[F,I] AUSRICHTUNG=[H,Q] ORIENTAMENTO=[V,O] ORIENTACION=[V,H] FORM=mm LINES NB LIGNES= FORMATO= MANUAL FEED= ALIM MANUELLE= MAN. ZUFUHR= ALIMENT MAN= ALIM.MANUAL= IIItON,OFF] [O,NJ IEIN,AUS] [ON,OFF] ION.OFFI SVM SE= SVMBOL= Z.SATZ= SIMBOLI= JGO.CAR= ...GERMAN.SPANISH,...GERMAN.SP ANISH,... I ...GERMAN.SPANISH,...GERMAN.SPANISH,... I ...,ALEMAN,E~a501,...IF-3
,Configuration Menu Messages
AUTO CONT= REPRISE AUTO= AUTO WEITER= CONT AUTOM= AUTO CONT=I
[ON.OFF1 I [O,NI [EIN,AUS] [ON,OFF] [ON,OFF] 1/0= lNTF= E/A= 1/0= E/S= [NONE,SERIAL, [RIEN,SERIE, [KEINE,SERIELL, [NESSUNA,SERIALE, [NINGUNO,SERIE, PARALLEL,OPTIONAL1 PARALLELE,OPTION] PARALLEL,OPTIONAL] PARALLELA.OPZIONALE PARALELO,OPCIONAL1 SERIAL= SERIE= SERIELL= SERIALE= SERIE= [RS-262,RS-422] I BAUD RATE= VITESSE= BAUDRATE= VEL TRASM= VELOCIDAD=I
[800,600,1200,2400,4800,I
9600,19200] ROBUST XON= ROBUST XON= ROBUST XON= ROBUST XON= ROBUST XON= [ON,OFF] [O,N] rEIN.AUSl iON.OFFl ION.OFF1 DTR POLARITY= POLARITE DTR= DTR-POLARITY= POLAR DTR= POLARID DTR= [H1,LO] [H,B] IH.N1 rALTA.BASSAl [ALT,BAJ] RET= RET= RET= RET= REk [DARK,MEDIUM, I [SOMBREMOYEN, [DUNKEL,NORMAL, [SCURO,NORMALE, [oscuRo,MEDlO, LIGHT,OFF] CLAIR,NON] HELL.AUSI CHIARO,OFF1 CLARO,DESACTIVADO] PAGEPROTECT= RESERV MEM= KOMPLEX= PROTEZ PAG= PROTEC.PAG.= [OFF,LTR,LGL,A4] [NON,LTR,LGL,A4] IAUS,LTR.LGL.A41 [OFF,LTR,LGL,A4] [OFF,LTR,LGL,A4]Status Messages
,En.,=. –. - z>=~- j;+-,;;-+ #8&:-&:,’. .?;p.7z4;:E-.,>;,v_;T7&~zer2.?’(=g.:;,>>-.. -~- ..,-=+- -./-:;=- .,7),=- ~ f<.- ...~,,.r,~.-,-=-.’- , .=,-:=.,e.., _.-e- .=<.- -e -<“->: -a-” -gKjE:#:~.~<<&~;.5,;j*~~ ~q~mq,y:~+~;<>: g.a$;$??&~~:“&,g5e,=*&~’Ka-b%:“ -*=.E~K—*”~4-L””-+>-.:;“”, ::.~,.n.,&—w-,:.i~+-.?,$:-.~w_&g::gz ,+;,$,.:2 b :_’ =. -=- .37“+“,.->.—:”.,-,.-,-.- :~~y;*&:*w@x~*.G:~m:zLgF’~. <:< 00 READY 00 PRET 00 BEREIT 00 PRONTA 00 PREPARADO 02 WARMING UP 02 PRECHAUFFE 02 BITTE WARTEN 02 ATTENDERE 02 ESPERAR 04 SELF TEST 04 AUTO-TEST 04 SELBSTTEST 04 AUTO TEST 04 AUTO TEST 06 SELF TEST 06 AUTO-TEST 05 SELBSTTEST Ob AUTO TEST 05 AUTO TEST 06 PRINTING TEST 06 IMPR TEST 06 DRUCKTEST 06 STAMPA TEST 06 TEST IMPRES. 06 FONT PRINTOUT 06 IMPRIME POL 06 SCHRIFTLISTE 06 STAMPA CARATT 06 LISTADO FONTS 07 RESET 07 REINIT 07 ZURUECKSETZEN 07 RESET 07 INICIALIZAR 09 MENU RESET 09 REINIT MENU 09 AUSGANGSWERTE 00 RESET MENU 09 MENU INICIAL lb ENGINE TEST lb TEST MCTEUR lb MOTORTEST 15 TEST MACCHINA lb TEST MAQUINA 17 MEMORY CONFIG 17 CONFIG MEM 17 SPEICHERKONFG 17 CONFIG.MEMOR. 17 CONFIG.MEMOR.F-4
,Attendance Messages Engf~i..a.h{“ ~ ,;., :&en&-<:?“:.””’:.:,’:-<,.-”. ‘Ittim ““ “. ‘- sp&h
‘- IIII110 RESET TO SAVE 10 REINIT CONFIG 10 ZUR.Z.SICHERN 10 RESE&SALVA 10 RESET, GUARDA 12 PRINTER OPEN 12 CAPOT OUVERT la GERAET OFFEN 12 STAMP. APERTA 12 IMPR. ABIERTA 18 PAPER JAM 18 BOURRAGE 18 PAPIERSTAU 1S CARTA INCEPP.IIIIS ATASCO PAPELI I 14 NO EP CART 14 CART ENCRE ! 14 KEINE TONER-K I 14 MANCA CART EP a14 CART.NO INST.16 TONER LOW 16 MANQUE ENCRE 16 TONER FEHLT I 16 MANCA TONER 16 TONER BAJOFE CARTRIDGE PE ATTN POL CART SK ENTFERNT I ER CARTUCCIA EF CARTUCHO FC LEFT PC GAUCHE SK LINKS ENTF. CC SINISTRA CF IZQUIERDOIIIIIFC RIGHT PC DROITE SK RECHTS ENTF. CC DESTRA CF DERECHO FC BOTH SK BEIDE ENTF, CC S+D CF AMBOS FC LEFT NO FONT PC GAUCHE ERR SK LINK FEHLER CC SIN. NO FONT CF lZQDO NO FONT FC RIGHT NO FONT PC DROITE ERR SK RECHTS FEHLER I CC DESTR NO FONT I CF DRCHO NO FONT I FC BOTH NO FONT PC G/D ERR SK BEIDE FEHLER CC S+D NO FONT CF AMBOS NO FONT PF FEED [paper] PM ALIM ~aper] PK M.ZUF. [paper] AC MAN. [paper] AM PAPEL [paper] PE FEED [mvelop e] EM ALIM [envelope] BK M.ZUF. [envelope] AB MAN. [mvelop e] AM SOBRE [envelope] PC LOAD haper] CP CHRG [paper] PK LADEN ~uper] CA CARIC kaper] CP CARGA [paper] EC LOAD [envelope] CE CHRG [enwlop e] BK LADEN [awlope] VB CARICA [envelope] AS CARGA [-velope] PE TRAY=[envelOp e] AE BAC=[envelop e] BU KASS=[emveIOpe] VB PRONTO= [envelop e] SP BAND J=[envelop e]Error and Service Messages
ao MEM OVERFLOW 20 MEM SATUREE aO SPEICHER VOLL 20 SUPERAM. MEM. I 20 DESBORD MEM. I 21 PRINT OVERRUN 21 PAGE TP DENSE 21 ZUVIELE DATEN al TROPPI DATI 21 DESBORD PAG. I 22 1/0 CNFIG ERR I 22 ERR CONF INTF 2a E/A-KONFGF. 22 ERR 00NF 1/0 a2 ERR CONF E/S 42 INTERFACE OPT 42 OPT INTERFACE 42 lNTERFAC. OPZ 42 INTERFASE OPCI I 48 INTERFACE OPT 43 OPT INTERFACE 48 INTERFAC. OPZ I 43 INTERFASE OPC II ERROR ERREUR FEHLER I SERVICE MATERIEL WARTUNG!
I 68 READY/SERVICE I 68 PRET/MATERIEL 68 BEREIT/WARTNGF-5
,Glossary
Application A sotiare program or group of programs, for example, Wordstar and Lotus 1-2-3, for solting common business tasks. &sembIy A collection of printer components assembled into a single replaceable unit. Atten&nee Meswge A Control Panel display message asking that the user perform a requested task, such as loading paper, before printing continues. Baud &te The data transfer rate between the computer and the printer. The computer and the printer must be configured at the same baud rate. It can be set between 300 and 19,200 baud, depending upon the type of computer used. Bitmapped Font A particular co~ection of symbols with fked character she and shape. Bam Detect ~mr Reflects the beginning of each laser beam print line into the Fiber Optics Cable. The DC Controller PCA receives the reflected laser beam and translates it into a Beam Detect signal. cold &set Used to return the user default settings for both the Printing and 1/0 Configuration Menus back to the initial factory setiings. component A single part of the printer that does not have any attached parts. Codiption The process of specifying cetin setiings to allow the computer and printer to communicate properly. For example, interface selection (serial or parallel) is part of printer configuration. The printer is confiWred through the Control Panel. An “MS-DOS” computer is confiWred through MODE commands in the AUTOE~C.BAT file. Cotii-tion Menu One of two Control Panel menus accessed using the [=) key. The Configuration Menu contains printer configuration settings such as communication parameters, Resolution Enhancement levels, and memory configuration. Glossary-1, Control Panel The main printer access and display panel used to modify the printer’s printing and o configuration information as well as to display printer status. Usually, the computer’s software application can send signals to modify the printer’s printing information (lines-per-page, font type used, page orientation, etc.). Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3-2, “Unpacking and Instigation,” for more information. cotton Bond A type of paper which includes a percentage of cotion fibers. It is usually used when a “high-quality” paper is desired. DC ContNller PCA Synchronizes dl printer operations by monitoring and supplying voltages to dl electro-mechanicd assemblies inside the printer. Defadt A printer setiing used in the absence of a sofiare application selection. Dots-per-inch (DPI) The number of horizonti and vertid dots produced by a printer inside the area of a square inch. The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are capable of producing a vertid dot every l/300th of an inch and a horizonti dot every 1/300 of an inch. DomlMdng Refers to the process of transferring fonts or macros stored on disks to the printer’s memory. These transferred fonts and macros are stored in the printer until it is turned off or they are removed by a sotiare printer command. ● Dwl 1/0 Intetiace The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers come with two interface ports, serial and parallel. The serial port can be configured as either RS-232 or RS-422. (See Chapter 3, Section 3-2, “Unpacking and Intimation.”) Electmstatie DischaWe (ESD) Electrid charges generated by friction that are displaced to another object. Electronic components can be permanently damaged by Electrostatic Discharge. Embedded Printer Comman& Printer commands written by the user directly into a sotiare file. Escape Sequences Software commands to the printer. The printer distinguishes these commands from re~lar text by the presence of an ‘c, a special control code which precedes the character string. EP-S Cartridge Contains items such as the cleaning blade, primary corona, photosensitive drum, and a supply of toner. Because the drum is photosensitive, it must be protected from exposure to light. The replaceable cartridge prints an average of 4,000 pages. Emr Message A Control Panel display message that informs the user when the printer stops due to a data or print error. Glossary-2, Face-up my A tray, which can be opened at the rear of the printer, which suppoti printed pages sticked in face-up, reverse order. Facto~ Detidt settin~ The Control Panel menu settings that are programmed into the printer at the factory. These settings are used as defaults unless they are changed by user Control Panel selections or overridden by print commands sent through a sotiare application. mowchati A diagram used to provide detiled sequential direction through a linear process. In Chapter 7, troubleshooting flowcharts are used to direct the service representative through a series of detiled problem solving processes. Font Fonti are co~ections of characters and symbols derived from a specific typeface. A font is described by iti symbol set, spacing, pitch, point size, style, stroke weight, and typeface. Fonts can refer to the printer’s internal fonts or to fonfi stored in optional font ~rtridges or on flOppy disks. Font Catitidge A plug-in device containing additiond fonts. Font mrtridges contain fonts which mn supplement the printer’s internal resident fonts to increase the variety of available typefaces. Font Ptintout A Font Printout is used to verify dl fonts available in the printer (see Chapter 3, Section 3-5). Front Panel Referred to in previous documents as the printer’s “fron$ “ “display,” or “pushbutton” panel, it is now referred to as the Control Panel. (The “front cover panel” or simply “front panel” is the front portion of the Main Body Covers.) Internal Fonts The fonts resident in the printer when shipped from the factory. Keys The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers have eight Control Panel keys used to access specific functions of the printer (see Chapter 3). kser Bam Amplified tight waves that are concentrated by the bser PCA to produce an intense beam of light which writes on the EP drum to produce an image. bser Pfinting Pmeess The stages of the kser Printing Process which must each function independently and be coordinated with dl other printer processes to form an image (see Chapter 5, Section 5-2, “Image Formation System”). Menu Menus list items that mn be selected from the printer’s Control Panel. The printer has two menus the Printing Menu and the Configuration Menu. The Printing Menu lets the user select printing defatits such as the number of copies to print and the default font. The Glossary-3, Configuration Menu lets the user select configuration items, such as pardel or serhd 1/0 configuration. OH Line When the printer is ofl line, it will not accept data from the computer. The printer is taken ofl line by pressing the -] key. When the ON LINE indicator is off, the printer is ofl line. on Line When the printer is on line, it will accept data from the computer. The printer is on line when the ON LINE indicator is on. Ofientition Orientation refers to the direction of print on the page. Printing across the narrower dimension of a page is died portrait orientation printing. The word portrait is derived from portraiti of people which are usually vertid in format. Printing across the wider dimension of a page is died landscape orientation printing. The term landscape is derived from pictures of the landsmpe which are usually horizonti in format. output by Two output trays are available with the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers: the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray and the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. Page Cowt The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers keep a record of the number of pages they print. This record is died the Page Count. Each time the printer is turned off, the Page Count is rounded down to the closest increment often. To alter the Page Count, the technician must be in the Service Mode. Page Count is displayed as part of the Self-Test Printout. ● Page Protection Reserving a block of printer memory to prevent 21 PRINT OVERRUN errors when composing very dense or complex graphics and tefi (see Chapter 3, Section 3-4, “Using the Printing and Configuration Menus”). Paper Jam A paper jam describes what happens when paper gets stuck somewhere inside the printer’s paper path. Paper jams u be mused by toner buildup in the Fusing Assembly, faulty photosensors, worn printer parts, or poor or improperly handled media (see Chapter 4, Section 4-5, “Clearing Paper Jams”). Paper Path The route the paper takes during the printing process. It begins at the paper pick-up area and ends when the paper etits the printer at the paper output tray. Pemanent Soft Fonts Soft fonts dotioaded into the printer’s memory that remain resident there, even if the printer is reset until the printer is powered off or the fonts are deleted by software printer commands. (Resetiingthe printer does not clear a permanent font from memory.) (See downloading.) Photosensitive Du The Photosensitive Drum in the EP-S Cartridge is sensitive to both light and electrid voltages. It is used in the creation and transfer of images to the printed page. Glossa~4 —, Photosensor A sensor that is activated when its field of vision is blocked. These sensors are used to detect the presence of paper inside the printer. Pitch The number of characters printed per horizonti inch. Pitch applies only to fonts with fued spacing. Point size The height of a font. Point size is measured from stightiy above the top of uppercase letters to slightiy below the bottom of lowerwe descenders, such as the tail of the letter “y.” There are 72 points per inch. Ptima~ Corona The Primary Corona, located inside the EP-S Cartridge, is used to neutralize the photosensitive drum’s surface charge and place a uniform charge back onto the drum. Refer to Chapter 5, Section 5-2, “Image Formation System.” Ptint Density Print densi~ refers to the relative darkness of print on the page. Very dense print appears totily black. Less dense print looks lighter and may have solid filled areas that are not totily covered. The print density can be adjusted in LaserJet printers (see Chapter 4, Section 4-9, “Print Densi@ Adjustment”). Pfint Pefiod The print period begins when the DC Controller PCA receives a VDO signal from the Interface/Formatter PCA and ends when the last fine of print data is transmitted. Ptint Qmlity Print qufllty refers to the sharpness and clarity of the type or graphic on the printed page. Ptinting Menu One of two menus accessed from the printer Control Panel by pressing the [=) key. Several printing items We the number of copies to print and the number of lines per page are selected from this menu. Pmpotiional speing The horizonti spacing between characters based upon the character’s relative width, rather than a fried cell size. The width of each character cell varies. Wsolution Enhancement (R~) (HP 3W9 only) An HP 33449-only feature that improves the 300 dpi print quality standard (see Chapter 3, Section 3-4, “Using the Printing and Configuration Menus”).Robmt-xon
Robust-Xon is a transmission protocol used in serial communiwtions. When Robust-Xon is ON, the printer sends continuous ready messages to the computer, one per second. When Robust-Xon is OFF, the printer sends only one ready message. Robust-Xon is recommended. Rotiting Smnner mmr a This mirror, part of the Laser/Scanning Assembly, is used to scribe and reflect the laser beamonto the photosensitive drum. Glossary-5 ——, scalable me Salable me refers to characters (generated from a spetilc ~eface) that can be soled to virtually any desirable size or pitch. This provides significantly expanded font mpabitities with otiy a few ~efaces (from which the font shapes are generated). This feature is built into the HP 33449. Self Test Used to veri& proper printer operation (see Chapter 3, Section 3-6, “Self Tests”),Setice Message
This is a Control Panel display message that informs the user when a printer part fails to perform correctiy. Service Mode While in Service Mode, the user mn print a Chart A printout, Service Mode Self Test printout, and change the Page Count (see Chapter 3, Section 3-7, “Service Mode”). Set-Up Strings Embedded commands, usudy for inititiing the printer, that precede any other print data.SofiFont
Soft fonts are fonti created or stored on disks. They mn be transferred to the printer’s memory where they remain available to be used until the printer is turned off. so~enoid An electtidly directed mechanism used to control the movement of gears inside the printer. Spacing The distance between individud printed characters. Ml fonts have either freed or proportional spacing. Stindby Petiod This is the period of time just after power up, after the self test has executed and the Fusing Assembly has reached its operating temperature. The printer is RE~Y but has not received the first print command (PRNT) from the Interface/Formatter PCA. Note that this is characteristic of a RE~Y printer with no Main or Scanner Motor operating. Statm Message Control Panel display messages that keep the user informed of the printer’s current operating status. Stroke Weight The thickness of a printed font for example, light medium,and bold. style The slant of a font for example, upright (normal text) or italic (slanted tefi). $pbo] Set A unique grouping of dl the available characters in a font. Each symbol set is defined with a specific set of applications in mind. For example, the LEGAL symbol set includes special characters used in the law profession. Glossary-6, Temporary Font A font that resides in printer’s memory until the user prints a font list, resets the printer, powers the printer off, or dears or replaces it using a software command. Temporary fonts are not listed on the font printout be~use they are erased when the font fist is generated. Test Ptint Used to veri~ proper operation of the print engine controlled by the DC Controller PCA (see Chapter 3, Section 3-6). Toner Toner is a dry mtiure of powdered “ink” mpable of being electridly charged and attracted to discharged areas on the revolving photosensitive drum in the EP-S Cartridge (see Chapter 5, Section 5-2, “Image Formation System”). Treatment Treatment is the emphasis placed on a font, such as itiic or bold. Treatment describes both style and stroke weights. ~eface The design aspect of fonts from which symbol sets are created (see scalable type). User Defadt Settings User Default Settings are Printing Menu choices the user has selected through the Control Panel. They are set using the Printing Menu (see Chapter 3, Section 3-3. “Using the Control Panel”). Warn-up Period The warm-up period covers the time from titching the printer’s power ON until the fusing temperature reaches 165° C. Glossary-7 —,Index
o c 02 W-NG UP (continuous) Message, 7-23 Cabting diagrams 1/0, D-1 1 Printer, 7-88 11 PAPER OUT Message, 7-23 Capabilities of the HP 33440 and HP 33449 13 PAPER JAM Message, 4-11, 7-29 compared, 1-3 14 NO EP CART Message, 7-44 Cartridges 16 TONER LOW Message, 4-15, 7-46 EP-S Carttidge, 4-15, 2-4 Emulation, 1-4, 5-20 4 Font, 5-19, 5-20 41 ERROR Message, 7-48 Macro, 1-3 CDRH, see Center for Devices and Radiologid 5 Health 51 ERROR Message, 7-52 Center for Devices and Wdiologid Health 52 ERROR Scanner Malfunction, 7-56 (CDRH) re@ations, 1-8 57- and 19-Tooth Gears, 6-22 Character voids, 7-67 Checkpoint, maintenance, 4-4 A Circuit Breaker, 6-20 AC Power Functional Check, 7-22 Claws, see Deflector Pawls, 6-51 AC Power Module, 6-20 Cleaning, 4-5, 5-6 Adhesive Labels, 2-11 Areas to be cleaned, 4-5 Air quality testing, 2-11 Beam-To-Drum Mirror, 4-9 Adjustments Feed Guide Assembly, 4-7 Print densi@, 3-19, 4-16 Fuser separation pawls, 4-8 Resolution Enhancement, 3-17 Fusing Assembly, 4-8 Ammonia e~osure, 2-3 Primary Corona, 4-10 Antistatic procedures, 6-5, C-3 Registration Assembly, 4-7 Attendance message troubleshooting, 7-13 Theory, 5-6 AUTOE=C.BAT Toner safety, 4-5 Stindard Configuration Test, 7-84 Transfer Corona Assembly, 4-6 HP 33440, A-14 Transfer Guide, 4-5 HP 33449, B-15 Cleaning brush, 4-10 Cleaning Pad replacement 4-14 B Cold Reset Routine, 3-13 Background scatier, 7-68 Command language Beam Detect pulse, 5-8 HP 33440, 1-3 Beam-to-Drum Mirror Assembly Functional HP 33449, 1-4 Check, 7-71 Communications Check 7-84 Black pages, 7-60 Component location and identification, 6-7 Black pages with horizonti white stripes, 7-66 Conditioning, 5-7 Blank Display, 7-20 Configuration Bottom Covers removal, 6-53 AUTOE~C.BAT, 7-84 Communications Check, 7-84 HP 33440, A-10-16 HP 33449, B-11-17 1/0, 3-4-6 Index-1, Menu, 3-16 Drum Drive Shaft, 6-22 Page Protection, 3-17, 3-20 Drum Rotition Functional Check, 7-70 m Resolution Enhancement, 3-17, 3-19 Drum Sensitivi~, 5-5 Test message, 7-84 Drum Sensitivi@ Switches (SW301 and Connector Location Diagrams, 7-88 SW302) Functional Check 7-45 Consumables, 4-3, 1-18 Dust exposure, 2-3 Cleaning Pad, 4-3 Duty cycle, 1-19 EP-S Cartridge, 4-3 Feed Roller Assembly, 4-3 E Fusing Assembly, 4-3 “ Electrid specifications, 1-6 Life expectancy, 4-3 Emulation mrtridge, 1-4, 5-20 Service Efe, 4-3 Envelopes, 2-8 Consumables and accessories, 1-18 Background, 4-16 Direct Marketing Division (DMK), 1-18 Cassette size setting, 3-12 Ordering, 1-18 Construction, 2-9 Control Panel Face-Up Tray required, 2-8 Blank Display, 7-20 Non-standard, 2-9 Indicator lights overview, 1-16 Recommendations, 2-8 Overview, 1-15 Size, 2-9 Removal, 6-15 Specifiwtions, 2-8 Functional description, 3-8 Types to avoid, 2-9 Corona effect, 5-7 Warranty, 2-10 Coofing Fan Environmental specifimtions, 1-6, 1-18, A-4, Lower, 6-53 B-3 Upper, 6-20 EP-S Cartridge, 4-15 Cover Latch Assembly, 6-28 16 TONER LOW message, 4-15 Cover Latch Hooks, 6-28 Catiridge Guide Functional Check, 7-71 Cover Release Button, 6-18 Cleaning drum, 4-4, 5-6 Covers, miscellaneous, 6-17 Conditioning drum, 5-7 Densi~ adjustment 5-10 D Developing stage, 5-10 DC Controller PCA, 5-16, 6-55 Disassembly, mution against, 2-5 DC Controller Signal Listing Table, 7-94 Distributing toner, 4-15 DC Power Supply Assembly, 6-24 Expiration date, 2-4 DC Power Supply Fuse, 6-24 Handling suggestions, 2-5 Date Codes, 3-26-27 Image formation system, 5-4 Defect tier, 7-87 Instigation, HP 33440, A-5 Deflector Pawls (Claws), 6-51 Instigation, HP 33449, B-5 Delivery area, 6-49 Life and use, 4-15 Delivery Assembly, 6-50 Refilting, mution agains~ 2-5, 4-15 Delivery Coupler Assembly, 6-50 Storage &er opening packaging, 2-4 Density adjustment, 3-19 Storage conditions, 2-4 Densi@ Check, 7-81 Storage with packa~ng intact 2-4 Developer AC Bias Functional Check (DBAC), Storing and handling, 2-4 7-75 Storing Conditions, 2-4 Developer DC Bias Functional Check (DBDC), Temperature Conditions, 2-4 7-76 Toner, 5-10 Developing stage, 5-10 Transfer Age, 5-11 DHHS Radiation Performance Standard, 1-8 Vibration or mechanid shock, caution Distorted print, 7-65 against 2-5 Drum Writing to drum, 5-8 Ammonia-based cleaning products to be EP-S Cartridge Guide Functional Check, 7-71 avoided, 4-4 Erase Lamp Assembly, 6-48 Cleaning, 4-4 Functional Check, 7-78 Light exposure caution, 2-5 Erase Lamp Connector Arm, 6-49 index-2, Erase Lamps, 5-6 Fuser Insulating Cover, 6-49 ERROR 50 condition, 5-12 Fuser separation pawls, 4-8 Error Messages Fusing Assembly, 6-40 02 Warming Up (continuous), 7-23 Fusing Assembly area paper jams, 4-12, 7-40 11 Paper Out 7-23 Fusing Check, 7-83 12 Printer Open, 7-27 Fusing roller, 5-12 13 Paper Jam, 7-29 Fusing stage, 5-12 14 NO EP CART, 7-44 16 Toner Low, 7-46 G 41 Error, 7-48 Gears, 57- and 19-Tooth, 6-22 50 Service, 7-48 German ZZF Declaration, 1-10 51 Error, 7-52 Grounding Block (Transfer Corona), 6-35 52 Error, 7-56 Grounding spring plate (Feed Guide Assem- Memory board, C-8 bly), 6-33, 6-39 PC/EC Load, 7-23 Error message troubleshooting, 7-13 H Etit Area Checks, 7-40 Hdf Self Test, 7-70 Efit Sensor Hardware lis$ 6-6 Arm (Flag), 6-42 Hardware instigation, 3-4 Flag, 6-42 High-Voltige Power Supply Assembly, 6-26, PCA, 6-40 7-72 PCA cover, 6-17 Hinge Assemblies, 6-52 Hinge Bracket Plates, 6-52 F Hook Guides, 6-28 Faint print 7-60 Humidi&, 1-6 Fan Guide (Serial Number Plate), HP 33449, ~S, see High-Voltage Power Supply Assem- 6-14 bly Fasteners, types of, 6-6 Faulty registration, 7-62 FCC RFI relations, 1-10 Identification number, 1-5 FCC RFI statement, 1-8 Image Development (Half Self Test) Func- Features tional Check, 7-70 Common to Both Printers, 1-3 Image Distortion Every 3; Inches (95 mm), HP 33440 only, 1-3 7-68 HP 33449 only, 1-4 Image formation system Feed Drive Assembly, 6-23 Cleaning, 5-6 Feed Guide Assembly, 6-38 Conditioning, 5-7 Grounding spring plate, 6-33, 6-39 Density adjustmen$ 5-10 Feed Roller Assembly, 6-31 Developing stage, 5-10 Feed Roller Assembly Functional Check, 7-37 Drum Sensitive@, 5-5 Fiber Optic Cable EP-S Cartridge, 5-4 Removal, 6-27 ERROR 50 condition, 5-12 Replacement, 6-27 Fusing stage, 5-12 Finnish laser statement, 1-9 Overview, 5-4 Font Cartridge Interface, 5-19 Paper curl, 5-11 Font handling capabilities Photosensitive Drum, 5-5 HP 33440, 1-3 Stages, 5-4 HP 33449, 1-4 Thermistor, 5-12 Formatier PCA Block Diagram, 5-19 Thermoprotector, 5-12 Front cover panel replacement Transfer stage, 5-11 HP 33449, 6-12 Writing to drum, 5-8 Front Support Plate, 6-16 Image Formation Troubleshooting, 7-57 Fuse, DC Power Supply, 6-24 Image Qudi~ Check, 7-78 Fuser Bulb, 7-51 Image skew, 7-66 Fuser Cleaning Pad replacement, 4-14 index-3, Improperly sized image, 7-67 HP 33449, 6-12 Indicator lights overview, 1-16 Main Drive, 5-15 Instigation Main Motor and Drive Assembly, 6-21 Memory, C-1 Main Motor Drive Gmrs cover, 6-17 Printer, A-1, B-1, 3-3-6 Main Motor (Ml) Functional Check, 7-33 Interface Maintenance checkpoints, 4-4 Cabling, 3-4 Cleaning, 4-5 Diagrams, D-1 Rubber rollers, 4-4 Optional 1/0, 1-3, 3-16 Manual feed, 5-14 Parallel, D-3 Manual Feed Guide, 6-32 Serial, D-4 Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) Functional Interface/Formatter PCA, 6-54 Check, 7-25 Interface PCA Block Diagram, 5-17 Medi~ see Paper, Labels, or Transparencies Interface system, 5-17 Memory board Optional tiridges, 5-17 Identification, C-4 Proper communication, 5-17 Instigation, C-3-7 Resolution EnhancementTM, 5-17 Instigation problems, C-8 Interface troubleshooting overview, 7-84 Removal, C-8 Safety, C-3 K Testing, 3-25, C-7 Key descriptions, 3-8 Memory capaci~ HP 33440, 1-3 HP 33449, 1-4 Labels, 2-11 Menus Laser Configuration, 3-16 Beam Detect pulse, 5-8 Printing, 3-14 Beam smnning, 5-8 Microswitches Electrostatic image formation, 5-8 SW201, 7-26 Electrostatic latent image, 5-8 SW202, 7-26 Operation, 5-8 SW203, 7-26 Scanner Motor, 5-8 SW205 (Thermistor bypass), 7-83 Writing to drum, 5-8 SW301, 7-45 Laser Power Checker, 7-54 SW302, 7-45 Laser power output check, 7-54 Mirror Assembly, 6-47 Laser safety, 1-8 Cleaning caution, 6-46 Laser/Smnning Assembly, 6-27 Mirror Shutter Assembly, 6-46 Laser Shutter Arm, 6-30 Miscellaneous covers, 6-17 Life expectancy, 4-3 MS-DOS Cleaning Pad, 4-3 Configuration protocol, 3-5 EP-S Cartridge, 4-3 System configuration, 3-6 Fusing Assembly, 4-3 Ozone Filter, 4-3 Paper Feed Roller Assembly, 4-3 Overhead transparencies, 2-12 Separation Pad, 4-3 Warranty, 2-11 Transfer Corona Assembly, 4-3 Owner’s manual, 1-7 Limitations to warranty, 1-19 Ozone emission, 1-11 Lower Cooling Fan, 6-53 Ozone Filter Complaint conditions, 4-13 Environment factors, 4-13 Machine control system, 5-16 HP 33440 older models, 4-13 DC Controller PCA, 5-16 Service Note 33440-07, 4-13 Macro cartridges, 1-3 Location requirement, 4-13 Main body covers, 6-11 Removal, 6-19 HP 33440, 6-11 Replacement 4-13 Ozone Filter Mount removal, 6-19 index-4, P HP 33440, A-n Packing material, 1-20, 3-3 HP 33449, B-13 Page count Parts, 1-17 Obtaining, 3-32 Index, 8-51 Setting, 3-32 List, 8-4 Page Protection (HP 33449 only), 3-20 Support Materials Organization, 1-17 Pages per month, limits, 1-19 Pati overview, 1-12 Paper, 2-6 PC/EC LOAD Message, 7-23 Curl, 5-11 Photosensitive Drum, 5-5 Letterheads, 2-6 Light exposure mution, 2-5 Multipart forms or mrbonless paper, 2-6 Physid dimensions, 1-6 Preprinted, 2-6 PostScriptR Printer Language, 1-4 Recommended, 2-6 Power distribution overview, 5-21 Sensor (PS301), 7-24 Power supply, 1-6 Sensor (PS302), 7-24 Pozidrive screwdriver, 6-6 Sensor (PS331), 7-31, 7-42 Pressure Assembly, 6-33 Specifications, 1-7, 2-6 Preventive maintenance, 4-3 Types to avoid, 2-6 Primary Corona Types to Use, 2-6 Cleaning, 4-10 Paper Control PCA, 6-25 Primary Corona Functional Check, 7-75 Paper curl troubleshooting, 7-80 Primary Corona grid, 5-7 Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Functional Check, Ptint 7-42 Densi@ adjustment, 3-19 Paper Feed Area Checks, 7-32 Densi@ Check, 7-81 Paper Feed Mechanid Checks, 7-35 Resolution Enhancement, 3-19 Paper jams, 4-11 Print density did, 7-54 13 PAPER JAM, 4-11 Print quality checks, 7-78 Clearing, 4-11 Printer Detection, 7-31 CDRH regulations, 1-8 Exit area, 4-12 Command language, HP 33440, 1-3 Paper pickup area, 4-11 Command language, HP 33449, 1-4 Sensing, 5-14 Consumables and accessories, 1-18 Transfer Guide area, 4-12 Descriptions, 1-3 Paper jam sensing, 5-14 DHHS fidiation Performance Standard, 1-8 Paper Jam Sensor (PS331) Functional Check, Electrid specifimtions, 1-6 7-42 Environment specifications, 1-6 Paper Out Sensor (PS301) Functional Check, Features, 1-3 7-25 Features common to both printers, 1-3 Paper path, 5-13 Font handling capabilities, HP 33440, 1-3 Paper pickup and feed system, 5-13 Font handling mpabilities, HP 33449, 1-4 Main Drive, 5-15 HP 33440, features, 1-3 Manual feed, 5-14 HP 33449, features, 1-4 Paper jam sensing, 5-14 Identification number, 1-5 Paper path, 5-13 Laser safety, 1-8 Registration and Feed Rollers, 5-14 Limited warranty, 1-18 Paper pickup/input tray area, 6-29 Memory capacity, HP 33440, 1-3 Paper Pickup Roller, 5-13 Memory mpaci@, HP 33449, 1-4 Paper Pickup Solenoid, 5-13 Memory instigation (HP 33449), C-3 Paper Sensing Arm, 6-29 Memory instigation safev, C-3 Paper Specification Guide, LaserJet series II Packing material, 1-20 Printer, 1-7 Parts, 1-17 Paper Tray Checks, 7-34 Parts overview, 1-12 Paper troubleshooting overview, 7-79 Physid dimensions, 1-6 Parallel interface, D-3 Power supply, 1-6 Regulato~ label, 1-5 index-5, Related documentation, 1-7 Returning printer for service, 1-20 Repair parts, 1-17 RFI statemen~ 1-8 Resolution, HP 33440, 1-3 Right-Hand teti missing, 7-62 Resolution, HP 33449, 1-4 M-422 configuration, 3-5 Safety information, 1-8 Rubber rollers, cleaning, 4-4 Serial number, 1-5 Service, 1-19 s Service approach, 1-17 Safety Setup, HP 33440, A-1 Information, 1-8 Setup, HP 33449, B-1 Laser, 1-8-10 U.S. Depatiment of Hdth and Human Scanner Motor, 5-8 Services, 1-8 Scanner Motor Functional Check, 7-56 Warranty, 1-18 Screws required, 6-6 Printer memory Self Tests, see dso Testing Board removal, C-8 Self Tests Identification, C-4 General, 3-25 InMlation, C-5-7 Messages, C-7 Intimation problems, C-8 Service Mode, 3-30-32 Test, C-7 Sensors Printer Wiring Diagram, 7-92 PS301, 7-24 Print Qufllty Check 7-78 PS302, 7-24 PS331, 7-31, 7-42 R Separation Pad W memory Removal, 6-36 Formatter PCA, 5-20 Replacement when worn, 6-36 Initiation, C-3, C-5-7 Serial interface, D-4-6 Instigation safety, C-3 Serial interface setup, 3-4 Interface PCA, 5-18 HP 33440, A-12 N Size Message, C-7 HP 33449, B-14 Testing, 3-25 Serial number location, 1-5 hndom horizonti black lines, 7-63 Serial Number Plate, HP 33449, 6-14 Registration and Feed Rollers, 5-14 Service Registration Assembly, 6-34 ~er warran~, 1-20 Registration Assembly Functional Check, 7-39 Approach, 1-17 Registration Check, 7-82 During warran~, 1-19 Registration/Transfer Area Checks, 7-38 Information, 1-19 Regulatory label, 1-5 Philosophy, 6-5 Related documentation, 1-7 Setup, see Instigation and Configuration Related manuals, 1-7 Shielded interface cable, 1-10 Removing memory board, C-8 Shipping damage, 3-3 Repacking the printer, 1-20 Signal Listing Table, 7-94 Repair parts, 1-17, 8-3 Signal Timing Chart, 7-100 Repetitive Defect Ruler, 7-87 Site environment specifications, 1-18 Repetitive defects, 7-65 Site requirement, 2-3 Replacement service philosophy, 6-5 Skew Tolerance, 7-83 Reset Menu Routine, 3-13 SL301 Functional Che& 7-36 Resistors SL302 Functional Check, 7-39 15-Mohm, 6-37 Slightiy faint print 7-63 l-Kohm, 6-37 Smeared print/improper fising, 7-64 Replacement, 6-37 Smudged band with overprint, 7-68 Resolution Enhancement and print density, 3- Sotiare instigation, 3-5 19 Solenoid (SL301), 7-35 Resolution EnhancementTM, 5-17 Solenoid (SL302), 7-38 Resolution, = 33440, 1-3 Space requirement, 2-3 Resolution, HP 33449, 1-4 index-6, Specifimtions Transfer Corona Functional Check, 7-77 Envelopes, 2-8-10 Transfer Corona Grounding Block, 6-35 Environment 1-7, 2-4 Transfer Corona Troubleshooting, 7-77 EP-S Cartridge, 4-15 Transfer Guide area paper jams,. 4-12 Labels, 2-11-12 Transfer Guide Lock, see Registration Assem- Paper, 2-6-7 bly cover, 4-12 Printer, 1-6-7 Transfer stage, 5-11 Transparencies, 2-12 Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, SW203) SpecMed prin$ 7-61 Functional Check, 7-26 Static Charge Eliminator, 5-11 Troubleshooting Static Eliminator, 6-51 Aids to troubleshooting, 7-87 Status message troubleshooting, 7-13 Introduction, 7-5 Suede print, 7-64 Message Summary Table, 7-13 Sunlight exposure, 2-3 Pre-Troubleshooting Check List, 7-6 Switchboxes, 1-19 Pre-troubleshooting procedures, 7-6 Procedure, 7-5T
Technid reference manual, 1-7 u Test message for communications check, 7-84 Unpacking, 3-3 Testing HP 33440, A-4 Communication, 7-84 HP 33449, B-4 Continuous, 3-29 Upper and Lower Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray 1/0, 7-84 Doors, 6-18 Interface/Formatter PCA, 3-25 U.S. Department of Health and Human Memory, 3-25-27, C-7 Services, 1-8 Paper movemen$ 7-11, 12- v Power-Up, 7-10 Ventilation requirements, 2-3 Print engine, 3-29 Verification procedure, 7-8-12 Print quality, 7-78 Verti@ dark streaks, 7-67 Service Mode, 3-30, 32- Vertid white streaks, 7-61 Very faint print, 7-60 Thermistor, 5-12, 6-40 Thermistor (TH1) Functional Check, 7-50 w Thermoprotector, 5-12, 6-40 Warran@, 1-18 Thermoprotector/Fuser Btib Functional Check, Environment specifications, 1-18 7-51 Exclusions, 1-18, 2-6, 2-9, 2-11, 4-15 Timing Diagram, 7-100 Llmititions, 1-19 Toner Low Functional Check, 7-46 Service tier, 1-20 Toner safety and care, 1-11 Switchboxes, 1-19 Tools required, 6-5 White or blank pages, 7-69 Top Cover Assembly, 6-43 White streaks, vertid, 7-61 Removal methods, 6-44 Wiring Diagram, 7-92 Transfer area check, 7-38 Writing to drum, 5-8 Transfer Corona Assembly, 6-37 index-7]15
Similar documents
hp LaserJet 8100 and 8150 print systems and paper handling devices printed on at least 50% total recycled fiber with at least 10% post-consumer paper copyright © 2000 Hewlett-Packard Company printed in USA service manual english *C4265-90907* *C4265-90907* C4265-90907 HP LaserJet 8150 and 8100 Serie
CDMA PORTABLECELLULARTELEPHONESCH-210 SE R VICE Manual CDMA PORTABLE CELLULAR TELEPHONE CONTENTS 1. General Introduction 2. Specification 3. Installation 4. NAM Programming 5. Product Support Tools 6. Circuit Description 7. Troubleshooting 8. Exploded Views and Parts List 9. PCB Diagrams 10. Electri
FIXED WIRELESS PHONE SCW-F200 SE R VICE Manual FIXED WIRELESS PHONE CONTENTS 1. Specification 2. NAM Programming 3. Data Transfer 4. Setup Method 5. Circuit Description 6. Troubleshooting 7. Exploded Views and Parts List 8. PCB Diagrams 9. Electrical Parts List 10. Block & Circuit Diagrams 10. SCW-F
GSM Mobile Cellular Phone SGH-600 SERVICE Manual GSM Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. General Description 2. Circuit Description 3. Specification 4. Manual Adjustment Test Procedure 5. Troubleshooting C /OK / 6. PCB Views 1 . 2ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5JKL 6MNO 7. Electrical Parts List 7PQRS 8TUV 9WXYZ 8. E
GSM Mobile Cellular Phone SGH-500 Manual SERVICE GSM Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. Exploded Views and Parts List 2. Electrical Parts List 3. Block Diagram 4. PCB Views 5. Schematic DiagramsC12ABC 3DEF 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO 7PQRS 8TUV 9WXYZ 5. Schematic Diagrams 5-1 Main Power 5-1 5-2 Memory Power 5-2 5
DUAL BAND Mobile Cellular Phone SGH-2400 SERVICE Manual DUAL BAND Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. Exploded Views and Parts List 2. Electrical Parts List 3. Block Diagrams 4. PCB Diagrams 5. Schematic Diagrams 6. Troubleshooting 1 2ABC 4G 3DH EFI 5 JKL 7 6MPQ NR OS 8TUV 9WXYZ 1. Exploded Views and
00-Cover 7/28/99 2:29 PM Page 2 GSM Mobile Cellular Phone SGH-800C SERVICE Manual GSM Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. Exploded Views and it’s Part list 2. Electrical Part list 3. Block Diagram 4. PCB Diagram 5. Schematic Diagram 01-Exploded 7/21/99 11:28 AM Page 1 1. Exploded View and its Parts Li
SGH-M100 Inte rgrated Analog Circuit Diagram 5. Circuit Diagrams 5-1 SGH-M100 Intergrated Analog Circuit Diagram SAMSUNG Proprietary-Contents may change without notice 5-1 5-2 SGH-M100 I/F Connector & LCD Circuit Diagram VBat Bp_Vf Vtest SPK2P SPK2N Vext Vext VCCD Debug_Rx Debug_Tx MP_UP_DATA MP_DOW
DUAL BAND Mobile SGH-Q100 by Toko (www.gsm-free.com) Manual SERVICE Dual Band Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. Electrical Parts List 2. Exploded Views and Parts List 3. Block Diagrams 4. PCB Diagrams 5. Flow Chart of Troubleshooting and Circuit Diagrams C DEF ABC GHI MNO JKL PQRS WXYZ TUV 1. SGH-Q1
GPRS GSM TELEPHONE SGH-Q200 Manual SERVICE GPRS GSM TELEPHONE CONTENTS 1. Electrical Parts List 2. Exploded Views and Parts List 3. Block Diagrams 4. PCB Diagrams 5. Flow Chart of Troubleshooting and Circuit Diagrams 1. SGH-Q200 MAIN Electrical Parts List Level SEC Code Design LOC DESCRIPTIONS 0 SGH
Cordless Telephone SP-R5100SECRETManual SERVICE Cordless Telephone CONTENTS 1. Safety Precautions 2. Specification 3. Function Structures 4. Test Mode 5. Component Pin Array 6. Alignment & Adjustment 7. Trouble Shooting 8. PCB Views 9. Electrical Parts List 10. Exploded Views and Parts List 11. Bloc
HP Mopier 320 System Service Manual English Copyright© 1998 Hewlett-Packard Co. Printed in USA Manual Part No. HP Mopier 320 System C4229-90911 Service Manual *C4229-90911* Printed on at least *C4229-90911* 50% Total Recycled Fiber with at least 10% Post-Consumer Paper C4229-90911 Service Manual HP
GPRS GSM TELEPHONE SGH-S100 Manual SERVICE GPRS GSM TELEPHONE CONTENTS 1. Electrical Parts List 2. Exploded Views and Parts List 3. Block Diagrams 4. PCB Diagrams 5. Flow Chart of Troubleshooting and Circuit Diagrams 1. SGH-S100 MAIN Electrical Parts List Level SEC Code Design LOC DESCRIPTIONS 0 GH9
SERVICE MANUAL No. S1308XL55//// MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM MODEL XL-55 XL- 55 Micro Component System consisting of XL- 55 (main unit) and CP- XL55 (speaker system). MODEL XL-55C Illustration XL-55 XL- 55C Micro Component System consisting of XL- 55C (main unit) and CP- XL55 (speaker system). • In the i
LPC2361/62 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit MCU; up to 128 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 03 — 11 November 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2361/62 microcontrollers are based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time emulat
LPC2364/65/66/67/68 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit microcontrollers; up to 512 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 05 — 9 April 2009 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2364/65/66/67/68 microcontrollers are based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-
LPC2377/78 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit microcontroller; 512 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 04 — 19 November 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2377/78 microcontroller is based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time emulation that com
LPC2387 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit MCU; 512 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 03 — 29 October 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2387 microcontroller is based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time emulation that combin
LPC2388 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit micro; 512 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 01 — 19 December 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2388 microcontroller is based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time emulation that com
INVERTEC ® V450-PRO For use with machines having Code Numbers: SERVICE MANUAL SVM199-A | Issue D ate 10-Jul © Lincoln Global, Inc. All Rights Reserved. View Safety Info View Safety Info View Safety Info View Safety Info i SAFETY i WARNING CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGS Diesel engine exhaust and
LPC2458 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit micro; 512 kB flash, Ethernet, CAN, ISP/IAP, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, external memory interface Rev. 02 — 25 November 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description NXP Semiconductors designed the LPC2458 microcontroller around a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU core wi
LPC2478 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit micro; 512 kB flash, Ethernet, CAN, LCD, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, external memory interface Rev. 01 — 11 November 2008 Preliminary data sheet 1. General description NXP Semiconductors designed the LPC2478 microcontroller, powered by the ARM7TDMI-S core, to be a high
DR DR DR DR DRAFT T DR AF AF AF ATTTFTLPC2470DRDR D DA A RA RFFFATFDTDTDFlashless 16-bit/32-bit microcontroller; Ethernet,R ACAN,R LA RFCD, A USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, external memory interfaFcTeTFDRDTRDRev. 01.01 — 24 September 2009 Preliminary dAFaTta sh AeFetDTRDA RF AT DR 1. General description A
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS BT High Temperature Range, For +125°C Useseries Highly dependable reliability withstanding load life of 2000 to 10000 hours at +125°C. Suited for automobile electronics where heavy duty services are indispensable. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). BW High
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS PA Miniature Sized, Low lmpedance,High Reliability For Switching Power Suppliesseries Lower impedance than PW series. Smaller case size and high ripple current. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). PA LowImpedance PW Specifications ltem Performance Character
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS GW Snap-in Terminal Type, 105°C High Ripple Currentseries High Ripple current. Withstanding 3000 hours application of rated ripple current at 105°C. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). GW High RippleCurrent GU Specifications Item Performance Characteristics
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS AR Snap-in Terminal Type, 105°C Permissible Overvoltageseries Withstanding 2000 hours application of rated ripple current at 105°C. Reduction of short incidence when overvoltage (rated voltage x 1.5) is applied to a capacitor. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS AQ Snap-in Terminal Type, 105°C Permissible Abnormal Voltage,Smaller-sized(692 type) series Withstanding 2000 hours application of rated ripple current of 105°C. Extended voltage range at 200V, 220V and 400V. AK Smaller case sizes and higher ripple current than AK se
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS AS Wide Temperature Range, Miniature Type Permissible Abnormal Voltageseries Improved safety feature for abnormally excessive voltage. AQ High ripple current product. Smaller Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). AS Specifications Item Performance Characteris
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS PB Miniature Sized, High Ripple Current High Reliabilityseries High ripple current load life of 5000 / 7000 hours at +105°C. Suited for ballast application. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). CA Long Life PB Smaller PT Specifications Item Performance Chara